From a74c16d06af04f22a53debd1a1ef211416c3a6f6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Karl Berry This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a
-document preparation system, version as of May 2011. It is
+document preparation system, version as of May 2012. It is
intended to cover LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of
LaTeX for many years.
Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about
+LaTeX. Here are a few:
+ Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.
+ Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+ The guide for document authors maintained as part of LaTeX; there
+are several others.
+ Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX.
+ What is LaTeX?
-
LaTeX2e reference manual (May 2012)
+
+
+
+
-LaTeX2e reference manual (May 2011)
-Short Table of Contents
+Short Table of Contents
-
Table of Contents
+Table of Contents
-
LaTeX2e
-
+• About this document: Bug reporting, etc.
+
-• About this document: Bug reporting, etc.
• Overview: What is LaTeX?
+
-• Overview: What is LaTeX?
• Starting & ending: The standard beginning and end of a document.
+
-• Starting & ending: The standard beginning and end of a document.
• Document classes: Some of the various classes available.
+
-• Document classes: Some of the various classes available.
• Typefaces: And fonts, such as bold, italics etc.
+
-• Typefaces: And fonts, such as bold, italics etc.
• Layout: Controlling the page layout.
+
-• Layout: Controlling the page layout.
• Sectioning: How to section properly.
+
-• Sectioning: How to section properly.
• Cross references: Automatic referencing.
+
-• Cross references: Automatic referencing.
• Environments: Such as enumerate & itemize.
+
-• Environments: Such as enumerate & itemize.
• Line breaking: Influencing line breaks.
+
-• Line breaking: Influencing line breaks.
• Page breaking: Influencing page breaks.
+
-• Page breaking: Influencing page breaks.
• Footnotes: How to produce footnotes.
+
-• Footnotes: How to produce footnotes.
• Definitions: Define your own commands etc.
+
-• Definitions: Define your own commands etc.
• Counters: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
+
-• Counters: Internal counters used by LaTeX.
• Lengths: The length commands.
+
-• Lengths: The length commands.
• Making paragraphs: Paragraph commands.
+
-• Making paragraphs: Paragraph commands.
• Math formulas: How to create mathematical formulas.
+
-• Math formulas: How to create mathematical formulas.
• Modes: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+
-• Modes: Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
• Page styles: Various styles of page layout.
+
-• Page styles: Various styles of page layout.
• Spaces: Horizontal and vertical space.
+
-• Spaces: Horizontal and vertical space.
• Boxes: Making boxes.
+
-• Boxes: Making boxes.
• Special insertions: Inserting reserved and special characters.
+
-• Special insertions: Inserting reserved and special characters.
• Splitting the input: Dealing with big files by splitting.
+
-• Splitting the input: Dealing with big files by splitting.
• Front/back matter: Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
+
-• Front/back matter: Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
• Letters: The letter class.
+
-• Letters: The letter class.
• Terminal input/output: User interaction.
+
-• Terminal input/output: User interaction.
• Command line: System-independent command-line behavior.
+
-• Command line: System-independent command-line behavior.
• Document templates: Starter templates for various document classes.
+
-• Document templates: Starter templates for various document classes.
• Concept Index: General index.
+
-• Concept Index: General index.
• Command Index: Alphabetical list of LaTeX commands.
+ • Command Index: Alphabetical list of LaTeX commands.
-
-1 Overview of LaTeX
+
+1 About this document
@@ -500,6 +504,28 @@ comments to latexrefman-discuss@gna
current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other
infrastructure.
+
+
+
@@ -508,7 +534,7 @@ infrastructure.
Next: Starting & ending, Previous: About this document, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
2 Overview of LaTeX
+2 Overview of LaTeX
.dvi
Many other less-common variants of LaTeX (and TeX) exist, which can produce HTML, XML, and other things.
-\begin{document}
commands (this area is called the
Next: Typefaces, Previous: Starting & ending, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-Standard options are described below.
• Document class options: | Global options. + | |
• Document class options: | Global options. |
These commands are used like \textit{italic text}
. The
-corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which
-takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
-next type style command or the end of the current group.
+
This first group of commands is typically used like
+\textit{italic text}
. The corresponding command in
+parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which takes no arguments. The
+scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command
+or the end of the current group.
The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either
\sffamily\bfseries
or \bfseries\sffamily
to get bold
sans serif.
You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance,
-\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}
.
+
You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for
+instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}
.
These commands automatically supply an italic correction if the +
\textrm (\rmfamily)
The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used (in points) with the ‘10pt’, ‘11pt’, and -‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see Document class options). +‘12pt’ document size options, respectively (see Document class +options).
@@ -1092,7 +1118,7 @@ these commands; for instance,\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}
.
Previous: Font sizes, Up: Typefaces [Contents][Index]
-\selectfont
.
Next: Sectioning, Previous: Typefaces, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
• \onecolumn: | Use one-column layout. + | |
• \onecolumn: | Use one-column layout. | |
• \twocolumn: | Use two-column layout. + | |
• \twocolumn: | Use two-column layout. | |
• \flushbottom: | Make all text pages the same height. + | |
• \flushbottom: | Make all text pages the same height. | |
• \raggedbottom: | Allow text pages of differing height. + | |
• \raggedbottom: | Allow text pages of differing height. | |
• Page layout parameters: | \headheight \footskip. + | |
• Page layout parameters: | \headheight \footskip. |
\onecolumn
\onecolumn
\twocolumn
\twocolumn
\flushbottom
\flushbottom
\raggedbottom
\raggedbottom
Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units: @@ -1514,10 +1540,8 @@ Next: Cross references, section title can appear in two other places:
You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text. @@ -1568,18 +1592,18 @@ The setting Next: Environments, Previous: Sectioning, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.”
• \label: | Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text. + | |
• \label: | Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text. | |
• \pageref: | Refer to a page number. + | |
• \pageref: | Refer to a page number. | |
• \ref: | Refer to a section, figure or similar. + | |
• \ref: | Refer to a section, figure or similar. |
\label
\label
Synopsis: @@ -1640,7 +1664,7 @@ a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes: Next: \ref, Previous: \label, Up: Cross references [Contents][Index]
-\pageref{key}
\pageref{key}
\ref{key}
\ref{key}
• abstract: | Produce an abstract. + | |
• abstract: | Produce an abstract. | |
• array: | Math arrays. + | |
• array: | Math arrays. | |
• center: | Centered lines. + | |
• center: | Centered lines. | |
• description: | Labelled lists. + | |
• description: | Labelled lists. | |
• displaymath: | Formulas that appear on their own line. + | |
• displaymath: | Formulas that appear on their own line. | |
• document: | Enclose the whole document. + | |
• document: | Enclose the whole document. | |
• enumerate: | Numbered lists. + | |
• enumerate: | Numbered lists. | |
• eqnarray: | Sequences of aligned equations. + | |
• eqnarray: | Sequences of aligned equations. | |
• equation: | Displayed equation. + | |
• equation: | Displayed equation. | |
• figure: | Floating figures. + | |
• figure: | Floating figures. | |
• flushleft: | Flushed left lines. + | |
• flushleft: | Flushed left lines. | |
• flushright: | Flushed right lines. + | |
• flushright: | Flushed right lines. | |
• itemize: | Bulleted lists. + | |
• itemize: | Bulleted lists. | |
• letter: | Letters. + | |
• letter: | Letters. | |
• list: | Generic list environment. + | |
• list: | Generic list environment. | |
• math: | In-line math. + | |
• math: | In-line math. | |
• minipage: | Miniature page. + | |
• minipage: | Miniature page. | |
• picture: | Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles. + | |
• picture: | Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles. | |
• quotation: | Indented environment with paragraph indentation. + | |
• quotation: | Indented environment with paragraph indentation. | |
• quote: | Indented environment with no paragraph indentation. + | |
• quote: | Indented environment with no paragraph indentation. | |
• tabbing: | Align text arbitrarily. + | |
• tabbing: | Align text arbitrarily. | |
• table: | Floating tables. + | |
• table: | Floating tables. | |
• tabular: | Align text in columns. + | |
• tabular: | Align text in columns. | |
• thebibliography: | Bibliography or reference list. + | |
• thebibliography: | Bibliography or reference list. | |
• theorem: | Theorems, lemmas, etc. + | |
• theorem: | Theorems, lemmas, etc. | |
• titlepage: | For hand crafted title pages. + | |
• titlepage: | For hand crafted title pages. | |
• verbatim: | Simulating typed input. + | |
• verbatim: | Simulating typed input. | |
• verse: | For poetry and other things. + | |
• verse: | For poetry and other things. |
abstract
abstract
array
array
\arrayrulewidth
and \arraystretch
.
Next: description, Previous: array, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-center
center
\\
.
• \centering: | Declaration form of the center environment.
+ | |
• \centering: | Declaration form of the center environment.
|
\\
.
Up: center [Contents][Index]
-\centering
\centering
description
description
displaymath
displaymath
equation
environment (see enumerate, Previous: displaymath, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-document
document
enumerate
enumerate
The enumerate
environment uses the commands \labelenumi
through \labelenumiv
to produce the default label. So, you can
-use \renewcommand
to change the labels (see \newcommand & \renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase
+use \renewcommand
to change the labels (see \newcommand &
+\renewcommand). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase
letters:
eqnarray
eqnarray
First, a caveat: the eqnarray
environment has some infelicities
+which cannot be overcome; the article “Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars
+Madsen describes them in detail
+(http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf). The bottom
+line is that it is better to use the align
environment (and
+others) from the amsmath
package.
+
Nevertheless, here is a description of eqnarray
:
+
\begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*
)
formula1 \\
@@ -2130,7 +2167,7 @@ zero width.
Next: figure, Previous: eqnarray, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
equation
equation
figure
figure
When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a full-width figure (across both columns).
+ +The optional argument (Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment
-appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”, you can
+[placement]
determines where LaTeX will try
to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly
put a float:
@@ -2196,10 +2235,15 @@ FAQ: http://w
h
t
is
-automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”,
-use the float
and use its H
placement letter. (That
-package also provides other options.)
+appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; t
is
+automatically added.
+\usepackage{float}
and use the H
specifier which it
+defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere.
p
!
Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
+ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear
+and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page.
+The !
specifier does not mean “put the float here”;
+see above.
+
The standard report and article classes use the default placement
tbp
.
The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, etc. -you wish. +
The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands, +etc. you wish.
The \caption
command specifies caption text for the
@@ -2221,6 +2273,9 @@ figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is
present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text
(see Tables of contents).
Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and +non-float text: +
The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at @@ -2234,6 +2289,25 @@ the bottom; default ‘.3’. default ‘.5’.
\textfraction
+
+Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too +much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a +different page. The default is ‘.2’. +
+\topfraction
+
+Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before +floats; default ‘.7’. +
Parameters relating to vertical space around floats: +
+\floatsep
Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page; default ‘20pt plus2pt minus4pt’. +
Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page:
- -\textfraction
-
+\bottomnumber
+
Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too -much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a -different page. The default is ‘.2’. +
Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page; +default 1.
\topfraction
-
+\topnumber
+
Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before -floats; default is ‘.7’. +
Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page; +default 2.
\totalnumber
+
+Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3. +
The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats: +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats. +
flushleft
flushleft
\\
.
• \raggedright: | Declaration form of the flushleft environment.
+ | |
• \raggedright: | Declaration form of the flushleft environment.
|
\\
.
Up: flushleft [Contents][Index]
-\raggedright
\raggedright
flushright
flushright
\\
.
• \raggedleft: | Declaration form of the flushright environment.
+ | |
• \raggedleft: | Declaration form of the flushright environment.
|
\\
.
Up: flushright [Contents][Index]
-\raggedleft
\raggedleft
itemize
itemize
\item
command within the environment.
letter
environment: writing lettersletter
environment: writing lettersThis environment is used for creating letters. See Letters. @@ -2575,7 +2660,7 @@ Next: list, Previous: math, Previous: letter, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-list
list
{}
, which leaves the default spacing.
Next: minipage, Previous: list, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-math
math
minipage
minipage
picture
picture
The picture
commands are described in the following sections.
• \circle: | Draw a circle. + | |
• \circle: | Draw a circle. | |
• \makebox (picture): | Draw a box of the specified size. + | |
• \makebox (picture): | Draw a box of the specified size. | |
• \framebox (picture): | Draw a box with a frame around it. + | |
• \framebox (picture): | Draw a box with a frame around it. | |
• \dashbox: | Draw a dashed box. + | |
• \dashbox: | Draw a dashed box. | |
• \frame: | Draw a frame around an object. + | |
• \frame: | Draw a frame around an object. | |
• \line: | Draw a straight line. + | |
• \line: | Draw a straight line. | |
• \linethickness: | Set the line thickness. + | |
• \linethickness: | Set the line thickness. | |
• \thicklines: | A heavier line thickness. + | |
• \thicklines: | A heavier line thickness. | |
• \thinlines: | The default line thickness. + | |
• \thinlines: | The default line thickness. | |
• \multiput: | Draw multiple instances of an object. + | |
• \multiput: | Draw multiple instances of an object. | |
• \oval: | Draw an ellipse. + | |
• \oval: | Draw an ellipse. | |
• \put: | Place an object at a specified place. + | |
• \put: | Place an object at a specified place. | |
• \shortstack: | Make a pile of objects. + | |
• \shortstack: | Make a pile of objects. | |
• \vector: | Draw a line with an arrow. + | |
• \vector: | Draw a line with an arrow. |
\circle
\circle
\makebox
\makebox
\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}
@@ -2864,7 +2949,7 @@ your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:
Next: \dashbox, Previous: \makebox (picture), Up: picture [Contents][Index]
\framebox
\framebox
Synopsis: @@ -2891,7 +2976,7 @@ and the contents of the box. Next: \frame, Previous: \framebox (picture), Up: picture [Contents][Index]
-\dashbox
\dashbox
dlen
.
Next: \line, Previous: \dashbox, Up: picture [Contents][Index]
-\frame
\frame
Synopsis: @@ -2937,7 +3022,7 @@ space is put between the frame and the object. Next: \linethickness, Previous: \frame, Up: picture [Contents][Index]
-\line
\line
Synopsis:
@@ -2962,7 +3047,7 @@ see the curve2e
and many many other packages on CTAN.
Next: \thicklines, Previous: \line, Up: picture [Contents][Index]
\linethickness
\linethickness
The \linethickness{dim}
command declares the thickness
@@ -2980,7 +3065,7 @@ circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval
.
Next: \thinlines, Previous: \linethickness, Up: picture [Contents][Index]
\thicklines
\thicklines
The \thicklines
command is an alternate line thickness for
@@ -2995,7 +3080,7 @@ cf. \linethickness and \multiput, Previous: \thicklines, Up: picture [Contents][Index]
\thinlines
\thinlines
The \thinlines
command is the default line thickness for
@@ -3010,7 +3095,7 @@ cf. \linethickness and \oval, Previous: \thinlines, Up: picture [Contents][Index]
\multiput
\multiput
Synopsis: @@ -3031,7 +3116,7 @@ pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position Next: \put, Previous: \multiput, Up: picture [Contents][Index]
-\oval
\oval
Synopsis: @@ -3071,7 +3156,7 @@ boxes with rounded corners. Next: \shortstack, Previous: \oval, Up: picture [Contents][Index]
-\put
\put
\shortstack
\shortstack
Synopsis: @@ -3123,7 +3208,7 @@ positions are: Previous: \shortstack, Up: picture [Contents][Index]
-\vector
\vector
Synopsis: @@ -3144,7 +3229,7 @@ length and slope. The x and y values must lie between Next: quote, Previous: picture, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-quotation
quotation
quote
quote
tabbing
tabbing
Synopsis: @@ -3358,7 +3443,7 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\ Next: tabular, Previous: tabbing, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-table
table
\caption
command allows you to title your table.
Next: thebibliography, Previous: table, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-tabular
tabular
or +
or
\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols} @@ -3445,7 +3530,8 @@ the environment.
t
align on top row -
b
align on bottom row
@{text}
This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the
intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space
-between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in
-text. An \extracolsep{wd}
command in an @-expression
-causes an extra space of width wd
to appear to the left of all
-subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
-command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not
-suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep
command can be
-used only in an @-expression in the cols
argument.
+before the adjacent item must be included in text.
+
To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given
+column, you have to load the array
package and use the
+>{...}
specifier.
+
An \extracolsep{wd}
command in an @-expression causes an
+extra space of width wd
to appear to the left of all subsequent
+columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
command.
+Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed
+by an @-expression. An \extracolsep
command can be used only
+in an @-expression in the cols
argument.
p{wd}
cols
argument.
appear in the item, except in the following situations:
minipage
, array
, or tabular
.
-\parbox
.
-\centering
, \raggedright
, or \raggedleft
+minipage
, array
, or tabular
.
+\parbox
.
+\centering
, \raggedright
, or \raggedleft
declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an
environment when used in a p
-column element.
tabular
and array
environments; default is &lsq
These commands can be used inside a tabular
environment:
+
The following commands can be used inside a tabular
+environment:
• \multicolumn: | Make an item spanning several columns. + | |
• \multicolumn: | Make an item spanning several columns. | |
• \cline: | Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns. + | |
• \cline: | Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns. | |
• \hline: | Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns. + | |
• \hline: | Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns. | |
• \vline: | Draw a vertical line. + | |
• \vline: | Draw a vertical line. |
tabular
and array
environments; default is &lsq
Next: \cline, Up: tabular [Contents][Index]
\multicolumn
\multicolumn
Synopsis:
@@ -3603,7 +3693,7 @@ for flushleft, r
for flushright. The third mandatory argument,
Next: \hline, Previous: \multicolumn, Up: tabular [Contents][Index]
\cline
\cline
Synopsis: @@ -3624,7 +3714,7 @@ which are specified in the mandatory argument. Next: \vline, Previous: \cline, Up: tabular [Contents][Index]
-\hline
\hline
The \hline
command draws a horizontal line the width of the
@@ -3640,7 +3730,7 @@ of a table.
Previous: \hline, Up: tabular [Contents][Index]
\vline
\vline
The \vline
command will draw a vertical line extending the full
@@ -3656,7 +3746,7 @@ move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an
Next: theorem, Previous: tabular, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
thebibliography
thebibliography
9
for bibliographies with
less than 10 references, 99
for ones with less than 100, etc.
• \bibitem: | Specify a bibliography item. + | |
• \bibitem: | Specify a bibliography item. | |
• \cite: | Refer to a bibliography item. + | |
• \cite: | Refer to a bibliography item. | |
• \nocite: | Include an item in the bibliography. + | |
• \nocite: | Include an item in the bibliography. | |
• Using BibTeX: | Automatic generation of bibliographies. + | |
• Using BibTeX: | Automatic generation of bibliographies. |
99
for ones with less than 100, etc.
Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography [Contents][Index]
-\bibitem
\bibitem
\cite
\cite
\cite[p.~314]{knuth}
might produce
Next: Using BibTeX, Previous: \cite, Up: thebibliography [Contents][Index]
-\nocite
\nocite
\nocite{key_list}
@@ -3780,7 +3870,7 @@ which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the ‘.aux’
Previous: \nocite, Up: thebibliography [Contents][Index]
\cite
and
Next: titlepage, Previous: thebibliography, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-theorem
theorem
\newtheorem
Next: verbatim, Previous: theorem, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-titlepage
titlepage
titlepage
environment.
Next: verse, Previous: titlepage, Up: Environments [Contents][Index]
-verbatim
verbatim
The verbatim
uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt
).
• \verb: | The macro form of the verbatim environment.
+ | |
• \verb: | The macro form of the verbatim environment.
|
\verb
\verb
verse
verse
\\
command, and you can always manually force breaks.
• \\: | Start a new line. + | |
• \\: | Start a new line. | |
• \obeycr & \restorecr: | Make each input line start a new output line. + | |
• \obeycr & \restorecr: | Make each input line start a new output line. | |
• \newline: | Break the line + | |
• \newline: | Break the line | |
• \- (hyphenation): | Insert explicit hyphenation. + | |
• \- (hyphenation): | Insert explicit hyphenation. | |
• \fussy: | Be fussy about line breaking. + | |
• \fussy: | Be fussy about line breaking. | |
• \sloppy: | Be sloppy about line breaking. + | |
• \sloppy: | Be sloppy about line breaking. | |
• \hyphenation: | Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word. + | |
• \hyphenation: | Tell LaTeX how to hyphenate a word. | |
• \linebreak & \nolinebreak: | Forcing & avoiding line breaks. + | |
• \linebreak & \nolinebreak: | Forcing & avoiding line breaks. |
\\
[*][morespace]\\
[*][morespace]\obeycr
& \restorecr
\obeycr
& \restorecr
\newline
\newline
\-
(discretionary hyphen)\-
(discretionary hyphen)\fussy
\fussy
The declaration \fussy
(which is the default) makes TeX
@@ -4133,7 +4223,7 @@ words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.
Next: \hyphenation, Previous: \fussy, Up: Line breaking [Contents][Index]
\sloppy
\sloppy
The declaration \sloppy
makes TeX less fussy about line
breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose
@@ -4149,7 +4239,7 @@ interword spacing.
Next: \linebreak & \nolinebreak, Previous: \sloppy, Up: Line breaking [Contents][Index]
\hyphenation
\hyphenation
\linebreak
& \nolinebreak
\linebreak
& \nolinebreak
• \cleardoublepage: | Start a new right-hand page. + | |
• \cleardoublepage: | Start a new right-hand page. | |
• \clearpage: | Start a new page. + | |
• \clearpage: | Start a new page. | |
• \newpage: | Start a new page. + | |
• \newpage: | Start a new page. | |
• \enlargethispage: | Enlarge the current page a bit. + | |
• \enlargethispage: | Enlarge the current page a bit. | |
• \pagebreak & \nopagebreak: | Forcing & avoiding page breaks. + | |
• \pagebreak & \nopagebreak: | Forcing & avoiding page breaks. |
\cleardoublepage
\cleardoublepage
\clearpage
\clearpage
\newpage
\newpage
\clearpage
above).
Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Previous: \newpage, Up: Page breaking [Contents][Index]
-\enlargethispage
\enlargethispage
\pagebreak
& \nopagebreak
\pagebreak
& \nopagebreak
By default, the \pagebreak
(\nopagebreak
) command forces
-(prevents) a page break at the current position. For
-\linebreak
, the vertical space on the page is stretched out
+(prevents) a page break at the current position. With
+\pagebreak
, the vertical space on the page is stretched out
where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin.
With the optional argument priority, you can convert the @@ -4342,7 +4432,7 @@ insistent the request is. Next: Definitions, Previous: Page breaking, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced
@@ -4351,15 +4441,15 @@ produced with two commands, the \footnotemark
and the
\footnotetext
commands.
• \footnote: | Insert a footnote. + | |
• \footnote: | Insert a footnote. | |
• \footnotemark: | Insert footnote mark only. + | |
• \footnotemark: | Insert footnote mark only. | |
• \footnotetext: | Insert footnote text only. + | |
• \footnotetext: | Insert footnote text only. | |
• Symbolic footnotes: | Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes. + | |
• Symbolic footnotes: | Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes. | |
• Footnote parameters: | Parameters for footnote formatting. + | |
• Footnote parameters: | Parameters for footnote formatting. |
\footnotemark
and the
Next: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes [Contents][Index]
-\footnote
\footnote
Synopsis:
@@ -4396,7 +4486,7 @@ tables or in a tabular
environment. (See following sections.)
Next: \footnotetext, Previous: \footnote, Up: Footnotes [Contents][Index]
\footnotemark
\footnotemark
With no optional argument, the \footnotemark
command puts the
@@ -4421,7 +4511,7 @@ markers referring to the same footnote with
Next: Symbolic footnotes, Previous: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes [Contents][Index]
\footnotetext
\footnotetext
Synopsis: @@ -4445,7 +4535,7 @@ appear in outer paragraph mode. Next: Footnote parameters, Previous: \footnotetext, Up: Footnotes [Contents][Index]
-If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing
@@ -4470,7 +4560,7 @@ redefine \@fnsymbol
.
Previous: Symbolic footnotes, Up: Footnotes [Contents][Index]
LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
• \newcommand & \renewcommand: | (Re)define a new command. + | |
• \newcommand & \renewcommand: | (Re)define a new command. | |
• \newcounter: | Define a new counter. + | |
• \newcounter: | Define a new counter. | |
• \newlength: | Define a new length. + | |
• \newlength: | Define a new length. | |
• \newsavebox: | Define a new box. + | |
• \newsavebox: | Define a new box. | |
• \newenvironment & \renewenvironment: | Define a new environment. + | |
• \newenvironment & \renewenvironment: | Define a new environment. | |
• \newtheorem: | Define a new theorem-like environment. + | |
• \newtheorem: | Define a new theorem-like environment. | |
• \newfont: | Define a new font name. + | |
• \newfont: | Define a new font name. | |
• \protect: | Using tricky commands. + | |
• \protect: | Using tricky commands. |
\newcommand
& \renewcommand
\newcommand
& \renewcommand
\newcounter
\newcounter
\newlength
\newlength
\newsavebox
\newsavebox
Synopsis: @@ -4663,7 +4753,7 @@ defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. Next: \newtheorem, Previous: \newsavebox, Up: Definitions [Contents][Index]
-\newenvironment
& \renewenvironment
\newenvironment
& \renewenvironment
\newtheorem
\newtheorem
\newfont
\newfont
\protect
\protect
\protect
.
http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html -http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect +
http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect
\protect
.
Next: Lengths, Previous: Definitions, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-• \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: | Print value of a counter. + | |
• \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol: | Print value of a counter. | |
• \usecounter: | Use a specified counter in a list environment. + | |
• \usecounter: | Use a specified counter in a list environment. | |
• \value: | Use the value of a counter in an expression. + | |
• \value: | Use the value of a counter in an expression. | |
• \setcounter: | Set the value of a counter. + | |
• \setcounter: | Set the value of a counter. | |
• \addtocounter: | Add a quantity to a counter. + | |
• \addtocounter: | Add a quantity to a counter. | |
• \refstepcounter: | Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. + | |
• \refstepcounter: | Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. | |
• \stepcounter: | Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. + | |
• \stepcounter: | Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters. | |
• \day \month \year: | Numeric date values. + | |
• \day \month \year: | Numeric date values. |
\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
: Printing counters\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
: Printing countersAll of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
instance, \alph{enumi}
.
@@ -4935,7 +5025,7 @@ double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
Next: \value, Previous: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters [Contents][Index]
\usecounter{counter}
\usecounter{counter}
\value{counter}
\value{counter}
\setcounter{counter}{value}
\setcounter{counter}{value}
\addtocounter{counter}{value}
\addtocounter{counter}{value}
The \addtocounter
command increments counter by the
@@ -5021,7 +5111,7 @@ amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative.
Next: \stepcounter, Previous: \addtocounter, Up: Counters [Contents][Index]
\refstepcounter{counter}
\refstepcounter{counter}
The \refstepcounter
command works in the same way as
@@ -5036,7 +5126,7 @@ current \ref
value to be the result of \thecounter
.
Next: \day \month \year, Previous: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters [Contents][Index]
\stepcounter{counter}
\stepcounter{counter}
The \stepcounter
command adds one to counter and
@@ -5050,7 +5140,7 @@ resets all subsidiary counters.
Previous: \stepcounter, Up: Counters [Contents][Index]
\day \month \year
: Predefined counters\day \month \year
: Predefined countersA length
is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a
length as an argument.
• \setlength: | Set the value of a length. + | |
• \setlength: | Set the value of a length. | |
• \addtolength: | Add a quantity to a length. + | |
• \addtolength: | Add a quantity to a length. | |
• \settodepth: | Set a length to the depth of something. + | |
• \settodepth: | Set a length to the depth of something. | |
• \settoheight: | Set a length to the height of something. + | |
• \settoheight: | Set a length to the height of something. | |
• \settowidth: | Set a length to the width of something. + | |
• \settowidth: | Set a length to the width of something. | |
• Predefined lengths: | Lengths that are, like, predefined. + | |
• Predefined lengths: | Lengths that are, like, predefined. |
\setlength{\len}{value}
\setlength{\len}{value}
in
), millimeters (mm
), poin
Next: \settodepth, Previous: \setlength, Up: Lengths [Contents][Index]
-\settodepth
\settodepth
\settodepth{\gnat}{text}
@@ -5150,7 +5240,7 @@ equal to the depth of the text
argument.
Next: \settowidth, Previous: \settodepth, Up: Lengths [Contents][Index]
\settoheight
\settoheight
\settoheight{\gnat}{text}
@@ -5167,14 +5257,13 @@ equal to the height of the text
argument.
Next: Predefined lengths, Previous: \settoheight, Up: Lengths [Contents][Index]
\settowidth{\len}{text}
\settowidth{\len}{text}
The \settowidth
command sets the value of the command \len
to the width of the text argument.
These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
-commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width etc. of the
-text in the box. \totalheight
equals \height
+
+commands (see Boxes). They specify the natural width, etc., of
+the text in the box. \totalheight
equals \height
+
\depth
. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
natural size, e.g., say
• \indent: | Indent this paragraph. + | |
• \indent: | Indent this paragraph. | |
• \noindent: | Do not indent this paragraph. + | |
• \noindent: | Do not indent this paragraph. | |
• \parskip: | Space added before paragraphs. + | |
• \parskip: | Space added before paragraphs. | |
• Marginal notes: | Putting remarks in the margin. + | |
• Marginal notes: | Putting remarks in the margin. |
\indent
\indent
15pt
for 10pt
documents, 17pt\parskip, Previous: \indent, Up: Making paragraphs [Contents][Index]
-16.2 \noindent
+16.2 \noindent
@@ -5280,7 +5369,7 @@ the middle of a paragraph.
Next: Marginal notes, Previous: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs [Contents][Index]
-16.3 \parskip
+16.3 \parskip
@@ -5295,7 +5384,7 @@ before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt
.
Previous: \parskip, Up: Making paragraphs [Contents][Index]
-16.4 Marginal notes
+16.4 Marginal notes
@@ -5315,12 +5404,9 @@ where the \marginpar
occurs.
will be placed
--
-in the right margin for one-sided layout;
-
-
-in the outside margin for two-sided layout;
-
-
-in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
+
- in the right margin for one-sided layout;
+
- in the outside margin for two-sided layout;
+
- in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
@@ -5374,7 +5460,7 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page.
Next: Modes, Previous: Making paragraphs, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-17 Math formulas
+17 Math formulas
@@ -5436,17 +5522,17 @@ below summations. For example
-• Subscripts & superscripts: Also known as exponent or index.
+ • Subscripts & superscripts: Also known as exponent or index.
-• Math symbols: Various mathematical squiggles.
+ • Math symbols: Various mathematical squiggles.
-• Math functions: Math function names like sin and exp.
+ • Math functions: Math function names like sin and exp.
-• Math accents: Accents in math.
+ • Math accents: Accents in math.
-• Spacing in math mode: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
+ • Spacing in math mode: Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
-• Math miscellany: Stuff that doesn’t fit anywhere else.
+ • Math miscellany: Stuff that doesn’t fit anywhere else.
@@ -5458,7 +5544,7 @@ below summations. For example
Next: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas [Contents][Index]
-17.1 Subscripts & superscripts
+17.1 Subscripts & superscripts
@@ -5480,7 +5566,7 @@ superscript.
Next: Math functions, Previous: Subscripts & superscripts, Up: Math formulas [Contents][Index]
-17.2 Math symbols
+17.2 Math symbols
@@ -6747,7 +6833,7 @@ the pi symbol (\pi) in your output.
Next: Math accents, Previous: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas [Contents][Index]
-17.3 Math functions
+17.3 Math functions
@@ -6969,7 +7055,7 @@ spacing.
Next: Spacing in math mode, Previous: Math functions, Up: Math formulas [Contents][Index]
-17.4 Math accents
+17.4 Math accents
@@ -7005,7 +7091,7 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text
-
-
Math hác<ek (check) accent: \check{x}.
+
Math háček (check) accent: \check{x}.
\ddot
@@ -7052,6 +7138,12 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text
Math dotless j.
+\mathring
+
+
+-
+
Math ring accent: x*.
+
\tilde
@@ -7090,7 +7182,7 @@ in math. These are different from accents in normal text
Next: Math miscellany, Previous: Math accents, Up: Math formulas [Contents][Index]
-17.5 Spacing in math mode
+17.5 Spacing in math mode
@@ -7127,7 +7219,7 @@ commands for use in math mode:
Previous: Spacing in math mode, Up: Math formulas [Contents][Index]
-17.6 Math miscellany
+17.6 Math miscellany
@@ -7231,7 +7323,7 @@ descenders.
Next: Page styles, Previous: Math formulas, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-18 Modes
+18 Modes
@@ -7243,12 +7335,9 @@ Next: Page styles, Previous:
modes:
--
-Paragraph mode
-
-
-Math mode
-
-
-Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
+
- Paragraph mode
+
- Math mode
+
- Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
@@ -7286,7 +7375,7 @@ in, is called “outer paragraph mode”.
Next: Spaces, Previous: Modes, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-19 Page styles
+19 Page styles
@@ -7294,13 +7383,13 @@ Next: Spaces, Previous:
-• \maketitle: Generate a title page.
+ • \maketitle: Generate a title page.
-• \pagenumbering: Set the style used for page numbers.
+ • \pagenumbering: Set the style used for page numbers.
-• \pagestyle: Change the headings/footings style.
+ • \pagestyle: Change the headings/footings style.
-• \thispagestyle: Change the headings/footings style for this page.
+ • \thispagestyle: Change the headings/footings style for this page.
@@ -7312,7 +7401,7 @@ the page’s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
Next: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles [Contents][Index]
-19.1 \maketitle
+19.1 \maketitle
@@ -7371,7 +7460,7 @@ document. Use \\
to force a line break, as usual.
Next: \pagestyle, Previous: \maketitle, Up: Page styles [Contents][Index]
-19.2 \pagenumbering
+19.2 \pagenumbering
@@ -7409,7 +7498,7 @@ Next: \pagestyle, Prev
Next: \thispagestyle, Previous: \pagenumbering, Up: Page styles [Contents][Index]
-19.3 \pagestyle
+19.3 \pagestyle
@@ -7475,7 +7564,7 @@ the page.
Previous: \pagestyle, Up: Page styles [Contents][Index]
-19.4 \thispagestyle{style}
+19.4 \thispagestyle{style}
The \thispagestyle
command works in the same manner as the
@@ -7490,7 +7579,7 @@ changes to style for the current page only.
Next: Boxes, Previous: Page styles, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-20 Spaces
+20 Spaces
LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
@@ -7501,31 +7590,31 @@ more often useful in math mode (see Spacing in
Horizontal space
-
• \hspace: Fixed horizontal space.
+ • \hspace: Fixed horizontal space.
-• \hfill: Stretchable horizontal space.
+ • \hfill: Stretchable horizontal space.
-• \SPACE: Normal interword space.
+ • \SPACE: Normal interword space.
-• \AT: Ending a sentence.
+ • \AT: Ending a sentence.
-• \thinspace: One-sixth of an em.
+ • \thinspace: One-sixth of an em.
-• \/: Per-character italic correction.
+ • \/: Per-character italic correction.
-• \hrulefill: Stretchable horizontal rule.
+ • \hrulefill: Stretchable horizontal rule.
-• \dotfill: Stretchable horizontal dots.
+ • \dotfill: Stretchable horizontal dots.
Vertical space
-
• \addvspace: Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
+ • \addvspace: Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
-• \bigskip \medskip \smallskip: Fixed vertical spaces.
+ • \bigskip \medskip \smallskip: Fixed vertical spaces.
-• \vfill: Infinitely stretchable vertical space.
+ • \vfill: Infinitely stretchable vertical space.
-• \vspace: Add arbitrary vertical space.
+ • \vspace: Add arbitrary vertical space.
@@ -7537,7 +7626,7 @@ Vertical space
Next: \hfill, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.1 \hspace
+20.1 \hspace
Synopsis:
@@ -7564,7 +7653,7 @@ form.
Next: \SPACE, Previous: \hspace, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.2 \hfill
+20.2 \hfill
The \hfill
fill command produces a “rubber length” which has
@@ -7584,7 +7673,7 @@ equivalent to \hfill
.
Next: \AT, Previous: \hfill, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.3 \SPACE
+20.3 \SPACE
@@ -7606,7 +7695,7 @@ are equivalent to \
.
Next: \thinspace, Previous: \SPACE, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.4 \@
+20.4 \@
The \@
command makes the following punctuation character end a
@@ -7615,15 +7704,15 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without
\@
:
-… in C\@. Pascal, though …
-… in C. Pascal, though …
+… in C\@. Pascal, though …
+… in C. Pascal, though …
produces
-… in C. Pascal, though …
-… in C. Pascal, though …
+
… in C. Pascal, though …
+… in C. Pascal, though …
@@ -7634,7 +7723,7 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without
Next: \/, Previous: \AT, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.5 \thinspace
+20.5 \thinspace
\thinspace
produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that
@@ -7649,7 +7738,7 @@ in ’”.
Next: \hrulefill, Previous: \thinspace, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.6 \/
+20.6 \/
The \/
command produces an italic correction. This is a
@@ -7677,7 +7766,7 @@ with pdfTeX.
Next: \dotfill, Previous: \/, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.7 \hrulefill
+20.7 \hrulefill
The \hrulefill
fill command produces a “rubber length” which can
@@ -7692,7 +7781,7 @@ rule.
Next: \addvspace, Previous: \hrulefill, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.8 \dotfill
+20.8 \dotfill
@@ -7707,7 +7796,7 @@ with dots instead of just white space.
Next: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Previous: \dotfill, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.9 \addvspace
+20.9 \addvspace
@@ -7728,7 +7817,7 @@ of the total vertical space equal to length
.
Next: \vfill, Previous: \addvspace, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.10 \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
+20.10 \bigskip \medskip \smallskip
These commands produce a given amount of space.
@@ -7766,7 +7855,7 @@ quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink).
Next: \vspace, Previous: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.11 \vfill
+20.11 \vfill
The \vfill
fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which
@@ -7781,7 +7870,7 @@ can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It’s equivalent to
Previous: \vfill, Up: Spaces [Contents][Index]
-20.12 \vspace[*]{length}
+20.12 \vspace[*]{length}
Synopsis:
@@ -7805,7 +7894,7 @@ space is not removed.
Next: Special insertions, Previous: Spaces, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-21 Boxes
+21 Boxes
@@ -7813,23 +7902,23 @@ Next: Special insertions<
used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
-• \mbox: Horizontal boxes.
+ • \mbox: Horizontal boxes.
-• \fbox and \framebox: Put a frame around a box.
+ • \fbox and \framebox: Put a frame around a box.
-• lrbox: An environment like \sbox.
+ • lrbox: An environment like \sbox.
-• \makebox: Box, adjustable position.
+ • \makebox: Box, adjustable position.
-• \parbox: Box with text in paragraph mode.
+ • \parbox: Box with text in paragraph mode.
-• \raisebox: Raise or lower text.
+ • \raisebox: Raise or lower text.
-• \savebox: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
+ • \savebox: Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
-• \sbox: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
+ • \sbox: Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
-• \usebox: Print saved text.
+ • \usebox: Print saved text.
@@ -7841,7 +7930,7 @@ used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
Next: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes [Contents][Index]
-21.1 \mbox{text}
+21.1 \mbox{text}
@@ -7857,7 +7946,7 @@ lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation.
Next: lrbox, Previous: \mbox, Up: Boxes [Contents][Index]
-21.2 \fbox
and \framebox
+21.2 \fbox
and \framebox
@@ -7893,7 +7982,7 @@ argument.
Next: \makebox, Previous: \fbox and \framebox, Up: Boxes [Contents][Index]
-21.3 lrbox
+21.3 lrbox
\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}
@@ -7911,7 +8000,7 @@ must have been declared with \newsavebox
.
Next: \parbox, Previous: lrbox, Up: Boxes [Contents][Index]
-21.4 \makebox
+21.4 \makebox
Synopsis:
@@ -7953,7 +8042,7 @@ see \makebox (picture).
Next: \raisebox, Previous: \makebox, Up: Boxes [Contents][Index]
-21.5 \parbox
+21.5 \parbox
Synopsis:
@@ -8014,7 +8103,7 @@ for this to work.
Next: \savebox, Previous: \parbox, Up: Boxes [Contents][Index]
-21.6 \raisebox
+21.6 \raisebox
Synopsis:
@@ -8041,7 +8130,7 @@ ignoring its natural height and depth.
Next: \sbox, Previous: \raisebox, Up: Boxes [Contents][Index]
-21.7 \savebox
+21.7 \savebox
Synopsis:
@@ -8063,7 +8152,7 @@ declared with \newsavebox
(see \newsa
Next: \usebox, Previous: \savebox, Up: Boxes [Contents][Index]
-21.8 \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}
+21.8 \sbox{\boxcmd}{text}
Synopsis:
@@ -8086,7 +8175,7 @@ included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled
Previous: \sbox, Up: Boxes [Contents][Index]
-21.9 \usebox{\boxcmd
+21.9 \usebox{\boxcmd
Synopsis:
@@ -8106,23 +8195,23 @@ Previous: \sbox, Up: Splitting the input, Previous: Boxes, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-22 Special insertions
+22 Special insertions
LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a
special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
-• Reserved characters: Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+ • Reserved characters: Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-• Text symbols: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
+ • Text symbols: Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
-• Accents: Inserting accents.
+ • Accents: Inserting accents.
-• Non-English characters: Inserting other non-English characters.
+ • Non-English characters: Inserting other non-English characters.
-• \rule: Inserting lines and rectangles.
+ • \rule: Inserting lines and rectangles.
-• \today: Inserting today’s date.
+ • \today: Inserting today’s date.
@@ -8134,7 +8223,7 @@ special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
Next: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions [Contents][Index]
-22.1 Reserved characters
+22.1 Reserved characters
@@ -8190,7 +8279,7 @@ with "
, so the previous example could also be written as
Next: Accents, Previous: Reserved characters, Up: Special insertions [Contents][Index]
-22.2 Text symbols
+22.2 Text symbols
@@ -8647,7 +8736,7 @@ has the ascender height.
Next: Non-English characters, Previous: Text symbols, Up: Special insertions [Contents][Index]
-22.3 Accents
+22.3 Accents
@@ -8821,7 +8910,7 @@ descenders. See also \underline
in Math
-Produces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in ‘o<’.
+
Produces a háček (check, caron) accent, as in ‘ǒ’.
@@ -8834,7 +8923,7 @@ descenders. See also \underline
in Math
Next: \rule, Previous: Accents, Up: Special insertions [Contents][Index]
-22.4 Non-English characters
+22.4 Non-English characters
@@ -8944,7 +9033,7 @@ used in languages other than English.
Next: \today, Previous: Non-English characters, Up: Special insertions [Contents][Index]
-22.5 \rule
+22.5 \rule
Synopsis:
@@ -8978,7 +9067,7 @@ rectangles. The arguments are:
Previous: \rule, Up: Special insertions [Contents][Index]
-22.6 \today
+22.6 \today
The \today
command produces today’s date, in the format
@@ -8999,7 +9088,7 @@ of other date formats.
Next: Front/back matter, Previous: Special insertions, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-23 Splitting the input
+23 Splitting the input
@@ -9010,11 +9099,11 @@ there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type
when you run LaTeX.
-• \include: Conditionally include a file.
+ • \include: Conditionally include a file.
-• \includeonly: Determine which files are included.
+ • \includeonly: Determine which files are included.
-• \input: Unconditionally include a file.
+ • \input: Unconditionally include a file.
@@ -9026,7 +9115,7 @@ when you run LaTeX.
Next: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input [Contents][Index]
-23.1 \include
+23.1 \include
Synopsis:
@@ -9056,7 +9145,7 @@ read by another \include
command.
Next: \input, Previous: \include, Up: Splitting the input [Contents][Index]
-23.2 \includeonly
+23.2 \includeonly
Synopsis:
@@ -9081,7 +9170,7 @@ effective.
Previous: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input [Contents][Index]
-23.3 \input
+23.3 \input
Synopsis:
@@ -9107,7 +9196,7 @@ is tried (‘foo’ or ‘foo.bar’).
Next: Letters, Previous: Splitting the input, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-24 Front/back matter
+24 Front/back matter
• Tables of contents:
@@ -9126,7 +9215,7 @@ Next: Letters, Previous: Glossaries, Up: Front/back matter [Contents][Index]
-24.1 Tables of contents
+24.1 Tables of contents
@@ -9153,9 +9242,9 @@ Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents.
prevents any of these lists from being generated.
-• \addcontentsline: Add an entry to table of contents etc.
+ • \addcontentsline: Add an entry to table of contents etc.
-• \addtocontents: Add text directly to table of contents file etc.
+ • \addtocontents: Add text directly to table of contents file etc.
@@ -9167,7 +9256,7 @@ Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents.
Next: \addtocontents, Up: Tables of contents [Contents][Index]
-24.1.1 \addcontentsline
+24.1.1 \addcontentsline
@@ -9217,7 +9306,7 @@ command \contentsline{unit}{name}
.
Previous: \addcontentsline, Up: Tables of contents [Contents][Index]
-24.1.2 \addtocontents
+24.1.2 \addtocontents
The \addtocontents
{ext}{text} command adds text
@@ -9244,7 +9333,7 @@ generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables.
Next: Indexes, Previous: Tables of contents, Up: Front/back matter [Contents][Index]
-24.2 Glossaries
+24.2 Glossaries
@@ -9271,7 +9360,7 @@ glossaries.
Previous: Glossaries, Up: Front/back matter [Contents][Index]
-24.3 Indexes
+24.3 Indexes
@@ -9338,7 +9427,7 @@ TeX FAQ entry on this topic,
Next: Terminal input/output, Previous: Front/back matter, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-25 Letters
+25 Letters
@@ -9381,31 +9470,31 @@ commands, use \\
to separate the items.
These commands are used with the letter
class.
-• \address: Your return address.
+ • \address: Your return address.
-• \cc: Cc list.
+ • \cc: Cc list.
-• \closing: Saying goodbye.
+ • \closing: Saying goodbye.
-• \encl: List of enclosed material.
+ • \encl: List of enclosed material.
-• \location: Your organisation’s address.
+ • \location: Your organisation’s address.
-• \makelabels: Making address labels.
+ • \makelabels: Making address labels.
-• \name: Your name, for the return address.
+ • \name: Your name, for the return address.
-• \opening: Saying hello.
+ • \opening: Saying hello.
-• \ps: Adding a postscript.
+ • \ps: Adding a postscript.
-• \signature: Your signature.
+ • \signature: Your signature.
-• \startbreaks: Allow page breaks.
+ • \startbreaks: Allow page breaks.
-• \stopbreaks: Disallow page breaks.
+ • \stopbreaks: Disallow page breaks.
-• \telephone: Your phone number.
+ • \telephone: Your phone number.
@@ -9417,7 +9506,7 @@ commands, use \\
to separate the items.
Next: \cc, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.1 \address{return-address}
+25.1 \address{return-address}
The \address
specifies the return address of a letter, as it
@@ -9438,7 +9527,7 @@ letter will be formatted as a personal letter.
Next: \closing, Previous: \address, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.2 \cc
+25.2 \cc
@@ -9460,7 +9549,7 @@ printed on a separate line.
Next: \encl, Previous: \cc, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.3 \closing
+25.3 \closing
@@ -9485,7 +9574,7 @@ Next: \encl, Previous: \location, Previous: \closing, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.4 \encl
+25.4 \encl
@@ -9506,7 +9595,7 @@ Next: \location, Previo
Next: \makelabels, Previous: \encl, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.5 \location
+25.5 \location
\location{address}
@@ -9522,7 +9611,7 @@ if the firstpage
pagestyle is selected.
Next: \name, Previous: \location, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.6 \makelabels
+25.6 \makelabels
\makelabels{number}
@@ -9539,7 +9628,7 @@ address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
Next: \opening, Previous: \makelabels, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.7 \name
+25.7 \name
\name{June Davenport}
@@ -9555,7 +9644,7 @@ address.
Next: \ps, Previous: \name, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.8 \opening{text}
+25.8 \opening{text}
@@ -9581,7 +9670,7 @@ For instance:
Next: \signature, Previous: \opening, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.9 \ps
+25.9 \ps
@@ -9596,7 +9685,7 @@ Next: \signature, Prev
Next: \startbreaks, Previous: \ps, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.10 \signature{text}
+25.10 \signature{text}
Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the
@@ -9611,7 +9700,7 @@ space for your signature. \\
starts a new line within
Next: \stopbreaks, Previous: \signature, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.11 \startbreaks
+25.11 \startbreaks
\startbreaks
@@ -9627,7 +9716,7 @@ Next: \stopbreaks, Pr
Next: \telephone, Previous: \startbreaks, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.12 \stopbreaks
+25.12 \stopbreaks
\stopbreaks
@@ -9643,7 +9732,7 @@ Next: \telephone, Prev
Previous: \stopbreaks, Up: Letters [Contents][Index]
-25.13 \telephone
+25.13 \telephone
\telephone{number}
@@ -9659,14 +9748,14 @@ Previous: \stopbreaks
Next: Command line, Previous: Letters, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-26 Terminal input/output
+26 Terminal input/output
-• \typein: Read text from the terminal.
+ • \typein: Read text from the terminal.
-• \typeout: Write text to the terminal.
+ • \typeout: Write text to the terminal.
@@ -9678,7 +9767,7 @@ Next: Command line, Previou
Next: \typeout, Up: Terminal input/output [Contents][Index]
-26.1 \typein[cmd]{msg}
+26.1 \typein[cmd]{msg}
Synopsis:
@@ -9703,7 +9792,7 @@ redefined to be the typed input.
Previous: \typein, Up: Terminal input/output [Contents][Index]
-26.2 \typeout{msg}
+26.2 \typeout{msg}
Synopsis:
@@ -9731,7 +9820,7 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J
in
Next: Document templates, Previous: Terminal input/output, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-27 Command line
+27 Command line
The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted;
@@ -9762,12 +9851,12 @@ command; e.g.
Next: Concept Index, Previous: Command line, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-Appendix A Document templates
+Appendix A Document templates
Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
-be useful. Additional templates are collected at
-http://www.howtotex.com/templates.
+be useful. Additional template resources are listed
+http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates.
• book template:
@@ -9786,7 +9875,7 @@ be useful. Additional templates are collected at
Next: beamer template, Up: Document templates [Contents][Index]
-A.1 book
template
+A.1 book
template
\documentclass{book}
\title{Book Class Template}
@@ -9813,7 +9902,7 @@ The end.
Next: tugboat template, Previous: book template, Up: Document templates [Contents][Index]
-A.2 beamer
template
+A.2 beamer
template
The beamer
class creates slides presentations.
@@ -9848,7 +9937,7 @@ Next: tugboat template,
Previous: beamer template, Up: Document templates [Contents][Index]
-A.3 tugboat
template
+A.3 tugboat
template
TUGboat is the journal of the TeX Users Group,
http://tug.org/TUGboat.
@@ -9857,13 +9946,13 @@ Previous: beamer templat
\usepackage{graphicx}
\usepackage{ifpdf}
\ifpdf
- \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
- urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
+ urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
\else
- \usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{url}
\fi
-\title{Example \TUB\ Article}
+\title{Example \TUB\ article}
% repeat info for each author.
\author{First Last}
@@ -9871,12 +9960,12 @@ Previous: beamer templat
\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
-\maketitle
-
\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
\begin{abstract}
-This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue.
+This is an example article for \TUB{}.
\end{abstract}
\section{Introduction}
@@ -9888,22 +9977,23 @@ We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the
hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output).
Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
-The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others:
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more:
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
+% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
+\begin{verbatim}[\small]
\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
-\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \LaTeXe
-\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX
\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
-\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG \tug
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\TUB \TUG \tug
\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
\careof \thinskip
-\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred} % please use!
+\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
\cs{fred} -> \fred
\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
\meta{fred} -> <fred>
@@ -9911,14 +10001,13 @@ The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others:
\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
\booktitle{Book of Fred}
\end{verbatim}
-}
For more information, see the ltubguid document at:
\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references).
Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
-
\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
@@ -9934,7 +10023,7 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
Next: Command Index, Previous: Document templates, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-Concept Index
+Concept Index
Jump to: *
@@ -10004,7 +10093,7 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
‘.idx’ file: Indexes
‘.ind’ file: Indexes
-‘
+`
‘see’ and ‘see also’ index entries: Indexes
A
@@ -10015,8 +10104,10 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
acute accent: Accents
acute accent, math: Math accents
ae ligature: Non-English characters
-aligning Equations: eqnarray
+align environment, from amsmath
: eqnarray
+aligning equations: eqnarray
alignment via tabbing: tabbing
+amsmath package, replacing eqnarray
: eqnarray
appendix, creating: Sectioning
aring: Non-English characters
arrays, math: array
@@ -10171,6 +10262,7 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
figures, inserting: figure
fixed-width font: Font styles
float
package: figure
+float
package: figure
flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage
font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands
font sizes: Font sizes
@@ -10200,12 +10292,13 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
greek letters: Math symbols
H
-hác<ek accent, math: Math accents
+háček accent, math: Math accents
hacek accent: Accents
hat accent: Accents
hat accent, math: Math accents
header style: \pagestyle
header, parameters for: Page layout parameters
+here, putting floats: figure
hungarian umlaut accent: Accents
hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation
hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation)
@@ -10265,8 +10358,8 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak
lines in tables: tabular
-lining text up in columns using tab stops: tabbing
lining text up in tables: tabular
+lining text up using tab stops: tabbing
list items, specifying counter: \usecounter
lists of items: itemize
lists of items, generic: list
@@ -10283,6 +10376,7 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
M
macron accent: Accents
macron accent, math: Math accents
+Madsen, Lars: eqnarray
makeidx
package: Indexes
makeindex
program: Indexes
making a title page: titlepage
@@ -10352,6 +10446,7 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
period, centered, in text: Text symbols
pictures, creating: picture
pilcrow: Text symbols
+placement of floats: figure
poetry, an environment for: verse
polish l: Non-English characters
postscript, in letters: \ps
@@ -10386,6 +10481,7 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
right-justifying text: \raggedleft
right-justifying text, environment for: flushright
ring accent: Accents
+ring accent, math: Math accents
robust commands: \protect
roman font: Font styles
running header and footer: Page layout parameters
@@ -10416,6 +10512,7 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode
Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols
special characters: Non-English characters
+specifier, float placement: figure
splitting the input file: Splitting the input
starting & ending: Starting & ending
starting a new page: \newpage
@@ -10554,7 +10651,7 @@ Next: Command Index, Previ
Previous: Concept Index, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
-Command Index
+Command Index
-
-
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf
index 9d805092ae2..ca7c6eca809 100644
Binary files a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf and b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.pdf differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi
index df7973788ba..f962885638c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.texi
@@ -1,24 +1,23 @@
\input texinfo
-@c $Id: latex2e.texi 261 2011-05-12 17:45:37Z karl $
+@c $Id: latex2e.texi 263 2012-04-25 16:43:05Z karl $
@comment %**start of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.)
@setfilename latex2e.info
-@set UPDATED May 2011
+@set UPDATED May 2012
@settitle @LaTeX{}2e reference manual (@value{UPDATED})
@comment %**end of header (This is for running Texinfo on a region.)
-@c xx latex 2.09 commands should all be present now,
+@c latex 2.09 commands should all be present now,
@c xx but latex2e stuff is missing.
@c
-@c xx mention \mathring
-@c xx mention usrguide
-@c xx mention ! float placement, p.15 of usrguide
-@c xx merge http://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/latex-info/
-@c xx merged permuted-index
+@c xx mention \oldstylenums (comes from where?)
+@c xx mention \topnumber, \bottomnumber, \totalnumber
@c
-@c xx The typeset source2e will have an index with all kernel
-@c xx commands, which would be a good start. classes.dtx et al.
-@c xx define additional commands, and some of the kernel commands are
-@c xx internal and so shouldn't be included here.
+@c xx merge http://ctan.org/tex-archive/info/latex-info/ (alt-latex-info)
+@c xx merge permuted-index
+@c
+@c xx The typeset source2e has an index with all kernel
+@c xx commands, though some are internal and shouldn't be included.
+@c xx classes.dtx et al. define additional commands.
@c
@c xx packages -- required, additional, useful; oberdiek ...
@c xx fonts -- latexsys
@@ -27,8 +26,8 @@
This document is an unofficial reference manual for @LaTeX{}, a
document preparation system, version of @value{UPDATED}.
-This was originally translated from @file{LATEX.HLP} v1.0a in the VMS
-Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
+This manual was originally translated from @file{LATEX.HLP} v1.0a in
+the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
George@tie{}D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The
@LaTeX{}@tie{}2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The
@LaTeX{}2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl
@@ -39,7 +38,7 @@ and C.@tie{}Biemesderfer (published by the @TeX{} Users Group as
@cite{@TeX{}niques} number 10), as reference material (no text was
directly copied).
-Copyright @copyright{} 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Karl Berry.@*
+Copyright @copyright{} 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012 Karl Berry.@*
Copyright @copyright{} 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.@*
Copyright @copyright{} 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
@@ -128,7 +127,7 @@ intended to cover @LaTeX{}2e, which has been the standard version of
@node About this document
-@chapter Overview of @LaTeX{}
+@chapter About this document
@cindex Knuth, Donald E.
@cindex Lamport, Leslie
@@ -153,6 +152,24 @@ The home page for this document is
current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other
infrastructure.
+Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about
+@LaTeX{}. Here are a few:
+
+@table @url
+@item http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr
+Two pages of recommended references to @LaTeX{} documentation.
+
+@item http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc
+Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+
+@item http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide
+The guide for document authors maintained as part of @LaTeX{}; there
+are several others.
+
+@item http://tug.org/begin.html
+Introduction to the @TeX{} system, including @LaTeX{}.
+@end table
+
@node Overview
@chapter Overview of @LaTeX{}
@@ -455,18 +472,20 @@ and a style. The @LaTeX{} commands for doing this are described here.
The following type style commands are supported by @LaTeX{}.
-These commands are used like @code{\textit@{italic text@}}. The
-corresponding command in parenthesis is the ``declaration form'', which
-takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
-next type style command or the end of the current group.
+This first group of commands is typically used like
+@code{\textit@{italic text@}}. The corresponding command in
+parenthesis is the ``declaration form'', which takes no arguments. The
+scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command
+or the end of the current group.
The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either
@code{\sffamily\bfseries} or @code{\bfseries\sffamily} to get bold
sans serif.
-You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance,
-@code{\begin@{ttfamily@}...\end@{ttfamily@}}.
+You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for
+instance, @code{\begin@{ttfamily@}...\end@{ttfamily@}}.
+These commands automatically supply an italic correction if the
@table @code
@item \textrm (\rmfamily)
@findex \textrm
@@ -1412,7 +1431,19 @@ letters:
@findex eqnarray @r{environment}
@cindex equations, aligning
-@cindex aligning Equations
+@cindex aligning equations
+
+@cindex align @r{environment, from @code{amsmath}}
+@cindex amsmath @r{package, replacing @code{eqnarray}}
+@cindex Madsen, Lars
+First, a caveat: the @code{eqnarray} environment has some infelicities
+which cannot be overcome; the article ``Avoid eqnarray!''@: by Lars
+Madsen describes them in detail
+(@url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf}). The bottom
+line is that it is better to use the @code{align} environment (and
+others) from the @code{amsmath} package.
+
+Nevertheless, here is a description of @code{eqnarray}:
@example
\begin@{eqnarray@} @r{(or @code{eqnarray*})}
@@ -1487,6 +1518,8 @@ Figures will not be split between two pages.
When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a
full-width figure (across both columns).
+@cindex placement of floats
+@cindex specifier, float placement
The optional argument @code{[placement]} determines where @LaTeX{} will try
to place your figure. There are four places where @LaTeX{} can possibly
put a float:
@@ -1505,22 +1538,34 @@ FAQ: @url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat}.
@item h
@cindex @code{float} package
(Here)---at the position in the text where the figure environment
-appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, @code{t} is
-automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear ``here'',
-use the @code{float} and use its @code{H} placement letter. (That
-package also provides other options.)
+appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; @code{t} is
+automatically added.
+
+@cindex here, putting floats
+@cindex @code{float} package
+To absolutely force a figure to appear ``here'', you can
+@code{\usepackage@{float@}} and use the @code{H} specifier which it
+defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+@url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere}.
@item p
(Page of floats)---on a separate float page, which is a page
containing no text, only floats.
+@item !
+Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, @LaTeX{}
+ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear
+and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page.
+The @code{!} specifier does @emph{not} mean ``put the float here'';
+see above.
+
@end table
The standard report and article classes use the default placement
@code{tbp}.
-The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, @LaTeX{} commands, etc.
-you wish.
+The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, @LaTeX{} commands,
+etc.@: you wish.
@findex \caption
The @code{\caption} command specifies caption @var{text} for the
@@ -1528,7 +1573,9 @@ figure. The caption is numbered by default. If @var{loftitle} is
present, it is used in the list of figures instead of @var{text}
(@pxref{Tables of contents}).
-@c xx float-placement, float-caption sections?
+Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text:
+
@ftable @code
@findex \bottomfraction
The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at
@@ -1538,6 +1585,19 @@ the bottom; default @samp{.3}.
The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
default @samp{.5}.
+@item \textfraction
+Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+different page. The default is @samp{.2}.
+
+@item \topfraction
+Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+floats; default @samp{.7}.
+@end ftable
+
+Parameters relating to vertical space around floats:
+
+@ftable @code
@item \floatsep
Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
@samp{12pt plus2pt minus2pt}.
@@ -1550,18 +1610,26 @@ Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
@item \textfloatsep
Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
default @samp{20pt plus2pt minus4pt}.
+@end ftable
-@item \textfraction
-Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
-much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
-different page. The default is @samp{.2}.
+Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page:
-@item \topfraction
-Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
-floats; default is @samp{.7}.
+@ftable @code
+@item \bottomnumber
+Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
+default 1.
+@item \topnumber
+Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+default 2.
+
+@item \totalnumber
+Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
@end ftable
+The principal @TeX{} FAQ entry relating to floats:
+@url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats}.
+
@node flushleft
@section @code{flushleft}
@@ -2288,7 +2356,7 @@ Unlike the @code{quotation} environment, paragraphs are not indented.
@findex tabbing @r{environment}
@cindex tab stops, using
-@cindex lining text up in columns using tab stops
+@cindex lining text up using tab stops
@cindex alignment via tabbing
Synopsis:
@@ -2442,7 +2510,8 @@ column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
\end@{tabular@}
@end example
- or
+@noindent
+or
@example
\begin@{tabular*@}@{width@}[pos]@{cols@}
@@ -2474,6 +2543,7 @@ the environment.
@table @code
@item t
align on top row
+
@item b
align on bottom row
@end table
@@ -2484,7 +2554,6 @@ following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and
intercolumn material.
@table @code
-
@item l
A column of left-aligned items.
@@ -2500,13 +2569,20 @@ A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
@item @@@{@var{text}@}
This inserts @var{text} in every row. An @@-expression suppresses the
intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space
-between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in
-@var{text}. An @code{\extracolsep@{wd@}} command in an @@-expression
-causes an extra space of width @code{wd} to appear to the left of all
-subsequent columns, until countermanded by another @code{\extracolsep}
-command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not
-suppressed by an @@-expression. An @code{\extracolsep} command can be
-used only in an @@-expression in the @code{cols} argument.
+before the adjacent item must be included in @var{text}.
+
+To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given
+column, you have to load the @code{array} package and use the
+@code{>@{...@}} specifier.
+@c xx should fully explain array, tabularx, and all other base packages...
+
+@findex \extracolsep
+An @code{\extracolsep@{wd@}} command in an @@-expression causes an
+extra space of width @code{wd} to appear to the left of all subsequent
+columns, until countermanded by another @code{\extracolsep} command.
+Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed
+by an @@-expression. An @code{\extracolsep} command can be used only
+in an @@-expression in the @code{cols} argument.
@item p@{@var{wd}@}
Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width
@@ -2555,7 +2631,8 @@ Half the width of the space between columns; default is @samp{6pt}.
@end ftable
-These commands can be used inside a @code{tabular} environment:
+The following commands can be used inside a @code{tabular}
+environment:
@menu
* \multicolumn:: Make an item spanning several columns.
@@ -3136,8 +3213,8 @@ Synopses:
@end example
By default, the @code{\pagebreak} (@code{\nopagebreak}) command forces
-(prevents) a page break at the current position. For
-@code{\linebreak}, the vertical space on the page is stretched out
+(prevents) a page break at the current position. With
+@code{\pagebreak}, the vertical space on the page is stretched out
where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin.
With the optional argument @var{priority}, you can convert the
@@ -3753,7 +3830,6 @@ The @code{\settowidth} command sets the value of the command @var{\len}
to the width of the @var{text} argument.
-
@node Predefined lengths
@section Predefined lengths
@cindex lengths, predefined
@@ -3772,8 +3848,8 @@ to the width of the @var{text} argument.
@findex \totalheight
These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
-commands (@pxref{Boxes}). They specify the natural width etc. of the
-text in the box. @code{\totalheight} equals @code{\height} +
+commands (@pxref{Boxes}). They specify the natural width, etc., of
+the text in the box. @code{\totalheight} equals @code{\height} +
@code{\depth}. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
natural size, e.g., say
@@ -4801,6 +4877,10 @@ Math dotless i.
@cindex dotless j, math
Math dotless j.
+@item \mathring
+@cindex ring accent, math
+Math ring accent: @ringaccent{x}. @c don't bother implementing in texinfo
+
@item \tilde
@cindex tilde accent, math
Math tilde accent: @math{\tilde{x}}.
@@ -5221,16 +5301,16 @@ a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without
@code{\@@}:
@example
-@dots{} in C\@@. Pascal, though @dots{}
-@dots{} in C. Pascal, though @dots{}
+@dots{} in C\@@. Pascal, though @dots{}
+@dots{} in C. Pascal, though @dots{}
@end example
@noindent produces
@c Texinfo does it differently, but the result is the same.
@quotation
-@dots{} in C@. Pascal, though @dots{}
-@dots{} in C. Pascal, though @dots{}
+@dots{} in C@. Pascal, though @dots{}
+@dots{} in C. Pascal, though @dots{}
@end quotation
@@ -6797,8 +6877,8 @@ If @LaTeX{} stops in the middle of the document and gives you a
@cindex document templates
Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
-be useful. Additional templates are collected at
-@url{http://www.howtotex.com/templates}.
+be useful. Additional template resources are listed
+@url{http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates}.
@menu
* book template::
@@ -6872,13 +6952,13 @@ The @code{beamer} class creates slides presentations.
\usepackage{graphicx}
\usepackage{ifpdf}
\ifpdf
- \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
- urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
+ urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
\else
- \usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{url}
\fi
-\title{Example \TUB\ Article}
+\title{Example \TUB\ article}
% repeat info for each author.
\author{First Last}
@@ -6886,12 +6966,12 @@ The @code{beamer} class creates slides presentations.
\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
-\maketitle
-
\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
\begin{abstract}
-This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue.
+This is an example article for \TUB{}.
\end{abstract}
\section{Introduction}
@@ -6903,22 +6983,23 @@ We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the
hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output).
Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
-The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others:
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more:
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
+% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
+\begin{verbatim}[\small]
\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
-\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \LaTeXe
-\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX
\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
-\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG \tug
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\TUB \TUG \tug
\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
\careof \thinskip
-\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred} % please use!
+\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
\cs{fred} -> \fred
\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
\meta{fred} ->
@@ -6926,14 +7007,13 @@ The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others:
\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
\booktitle{Book of Fred}
\end{verbatim}
-}
For more information, see the ltubguid document at:
\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references).
Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
-
\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
index e0acffde016..bfb0410d602 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
@@ -1,17 +1,252 @@
LaTeX2e
+1 About this document
+2 Overview of LaTeX
+3 Starting & ending
+4 Document classes
+5 Typefaces
+6 Layout
+7 Sectioning
+8 Cross references
+9 Environments
+10 Line breaking
+11 Page breaking
+12 Footnotes
+13 Definitions
+14 Counters
+15 Lengths
+16 Making paragraphs
+17 Math formulas
+18 Modes
+19 Page styles
+20 Spaces
+21 Boxes
+22 Special insertions
+23 Splitting the input
+24 Front/back matter
+25 Letters
+26 Terminal input/output
+27 Command line
+Appendix A Document templates
+Concept Index
+Command Index
+LaTeX2e
+1 About this document
+2 Overview of LaTeX
+3 Starting & ending
+4 Document classes
+ 4.1 Document class options
+5 Typefaces
+ 5.1 Font styles
+ 5.2 Font sizes
+ 5.3 Low-level font commands
+6 Layout
+ 6.1 '\onecolumn'
+ 6.2 '\twocolumn'
+ 6.3 '\flushbottom'
+ 6.4 '\raggedbottom'
+ 6.5 Page layout parameters
+7 Sectioning
+8 Cross references
+ 8.1 '\label'
+ 8.2 '\pageref{KEY}'
+ 8.3 '\ref{KEY}'
+9 Environments
+ 9.1 'abstract'
+ 9.2 'array'
+ 9.3 'center'
+ 9.3.1 '\centering'
+ 9.4 'description'
+ 9.5 'displaymath'
+ 9.6 'document'
+ 9.7 'enumerate'
+ 9.8 'eqnarray'
+ 9.9 'equation'
+ 9.10 'figure'
+ 9.11 'flushleft'
+ 9.11.1 '\raggedright'
+ 9.12 'flushright'
+ 9.12.1 '\raggedleft'
+ 9.13 'itemize'
+ 9.14 'letter' environment: writing letters
+ 9.15 'list'
+ 9.16 'math'
+ 9.17 'minipage'
+ 9.18 'picture'
+ 9.18.1 '\circle'
+ 9.18.2 '\makebox'
+ 9.18.3 '\framebox'
+ 9.18.4 '\dashbox'
+ 9.18.5 '\frame'
+ 9.18.6 '\line'
+ 9.18.7 '\linethickness'
+ 9.18.8 '\thicklines'
+ 9.18.9 '\thinlines'
+ 9.18.10 '\multiput'
+ 9.18.11 '\oval'
+ 9.18.12 '\put'
+ 9.18.13 '\shortstack'
+ 9.18.14 '\vector'
+ 9.19 'quotation'
+ 9.20 'quote'
+ 9.21 'tabbing'
+ 9.22 'table'
+ 9.23 'tabular'
+ 9.23.1 '\multicolumn'
+ 9.23.2 '\cline'
+ 9.23.3 '\hline'
+ 9.23.4 '\vline'
+ 9.24 'thebibliography'
+ 9.24.1 '\bibitem'
+ 9.24.2 '\cite'
+ 9.24.3 '\nocite'
+ 9.24.4 Using BibTeX
+ 9.25 'theorem'
+ 9.26 'titlepage'
+ 9.27 'verbatim'
+ 9.27.1 '\verb'
+ 9.28 'verse'
+10 Line breaking
+ 10.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE]
+ 10.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
+ 10.3 '\newline'
+ 10.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
+ 10.5 '\fussy'
+ 10.6 '\sloppy'
+ 10.7 '\hyphenation'
+ 10.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
+11 Page breaking
+ 11.1 '\cleardoublepage'
+ 11.2 '\clearpage'
+ 11.3 '\newpage'
+ 11.4 '\enlargethispage'
+ 11.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
+12 Footnotes
+ 12.1 '\footnote'
+ 12.2 '\footnotemark'
+ 12.3 '\footnotetext'
+ 12.4 Symbolic footnotes
+ 12.5 Footnote parameters
+13 Definitions
+ 13.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
+ 13.2 '\newcounter'
+ 13.3 '\newlength'
+ 13.4 '\newsavebox'
+ 13.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
+ 13.6 '\newtheorem'
+ 13.7 '\newfont'
+ 13.8 '\protect'
+14 Counters
+ 14.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
+ 14.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}'
+ 14.3 '\value{COUNTER}'
+ 14.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
+ 14.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
+ 14.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'
+ 14.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
+ 14.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters
+15 Lengths
+ 15.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
+ 15.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
+ 15.3 '\settodepth'
+ 15.4 '\settoheight'
+ 15.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
+ 15.6 Predefined lengths
+16 Making paragraphs
+ 16.1 '\indent'
+ 16.2 '\noindent'
+ 16.3 '\parskip'
+ 16.4 Marginal notes
+17 Math formulas
+ 17.1 Subscripts & superscripts
+ 17.2 Math symbols
+ 17.3 Math functions
+ 17.4 Math accents
+ 17.5 Spacing in math mode
+ 17.6 Math miscellany
+18 Modes
+19 Page styles
+ 19.1 '\maketitle'
+ 19.2 '\pagenumbering'
+ 19.3 '\pagestyle'
+ 19.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}'
+20 Spaces
+ 20.1 '\hspace'
+ 20.2 '\hfill'
+ 20.3 '\SPACE'
+ 20.4 '\@'
+ 20.5 '\thinspace'
+ 20.6 '\/'
+ 20.7 '\hrulefill'
+ 20.8 '\dotfill'
+ 20.9 '\addvspace'
+ 20.10 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
+ 20.11 '\vfill'
+ 20.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}'
+21 Boxes
+ 21.1 '\mbox{TEXT}'
+ 21.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox'
+ 21.3 'lrbox'
+ 21.4 '\makebox'
+ 21.5 '\parbox'
+ 21.6 '\raisebox'
+ 21.7 '\savebox'
+ 21.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}'
+ 21.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD'
+22 Special insertions
+ 22.1 Reserved characters
+ 22.2 Text symbols
+ 22.3 Accents
+ 22.4 Non-English characters
+ 22.5 '\rule'
+ 22.6 '\today'
+23 Splitting the input
+ 23.1 '\include'
+ 23.2 \'includeonly'
+ 23.3 \input
+24 Front/back matter
+ 24.1 Tables of contents
+ 24.1.1 \addcontentsline
+ 24.1.2 \addtocontents
+ 24.2 Glossaries
+ 24.3 Indexes
+25 Letters
+ 25.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS}
+ 25.2 '\cc'
+ 25.3 '\closing'
+ 25.4 '\encl'
+ 25.5 '\location'
+ 25.6 '\makelabels'
+ 25.7 '\name'
+ 25.8 '\opening{TEXT}'
+ 25.9 '\ps'
+ 25.10 '\signature{TEXT}'
+ 25.11 '\startbreaks'
+ 25.12 '\stopbreaks'
+ 25.13 '\telephone'
+26 Terminal input/output
+ 26.1 '\typein[CMD]{MSG}'
+ 26.2 '\typeout{MSG}'
+27 Command line
+Appendix A Document templates
+ A.1 'book' template
+ A.2 'beamer' template
+ A.3 'tugboat' template
+Concept Index
+Command Index
+LaTeX2e
*******
This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document
-preparation system, version as of May 2011. It is intended to cover
+preparation system, version as of May 2012. It is intended to cover
LaTeX2e, which has been the standard version of LaTeX for many years.
-1 Overview of LaTeX
-*******************
+1 About this document
+*********************
The LaTeX document preparation system is implemented as a macro package
for Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program. LaTeX was originally
created by Leslie Lamport; it is now maintained by a group of volunteers
-(`http://latex-project.org'). The official documentation written by the
+('http://latex-project.org'). The official documentation written by the
LaTeX project is available from their web site.
The present document is completely unofficial and has not been
@@ -19,10 +254,22 @@ reviewed by the LaTeX maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything
else about this document to them. Instead, please send all comments to
.
- The home page for this document is `http://home.gna.org/latexrefman'.
+ The home page for this document is 'http://home.gna.org/latexrefman'.
That page has links to the current output in various formats, sources,
mailing lists, and other infrastructure.
+ Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about
+LaTeX. Here are a few:
+
+ Two pages of recommended references to LaTeX documentation.
+
+ Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+
+ The guide for document authors maintained as part of LaTeX; there
+ are several others.
+
+ Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX.
+
2 Overview of LaTeX
*******************
@@ -37,44 +284,44 @@ output:
1. The main output file, which is one of:
- `.dvi'
- If invoked as `latex', a "Device Independent" (`.dvi') file is
+ '.dvi'
+ If invoked as 'latex', a "Device Independent" ('.dvi') file is
produced. This contains commands that can be translated into
commands for virtually any output device. You can view such
- `.dvi' output of LaTeX by using a program such as `xdvi'
- (display directly), `dvips' (convert to PostScript), or
- `dvipdfmx' (convert to PDF).
+ '.dvi' output of LaTeX by using a program such as 'xdvi'
+ (display directly), 'dvips' (convert to PostScript), or
+ 'dvipdfmx' (convert to PDF).
- `.pdf'
- If invoked as `pdflatex', a "Portable Document Format"
- (`.pdf') file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with
+ '.pdf'
+ If invoked as 'pdflatex', a "Portable Document Format"
+ ('.pdf') file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with
all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but
- it does make the output much larger than the `.dvi' produced
+ it does make the output much larger than the '.dvi' produced
from the same document.
- If invoked as `lualatex', a `.pdf' file is created using the
- LuaTeX engine (`http://luatex.org').
+ If invoked as 'lualatex', a '.pdf' file is created using the
+ LuaTeX engine ('http://luatex.org').
- If invoked as `xelatex', a `.pdf' file is created using the
- XeTeX engine (`http://tug.org/xetex').
+ If invoked as 'xelatex', a '.pdf' file is created using the
+ XeTeX engine ('http://tug.org/xetex').
Many other less-common variants of LaTeX (and TeX) exist, which can
produce HTML, XML, and other things.
- 2. The "transcript" or `.log' file that contains summary information
+ 2. The "transcript" or '.log' file that contains summary information
and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the input
file.
- 3. An "auxiliary" or `.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for
+ 3. An "auxiliary" or '.aux' file. This is used by LaTeX itself, for
things such as cross-references.
An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won't try to
list them all. Xxx components?
- In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a `\', followed
+ In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a '\', followed
by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single non-letter. Arguments
-contained in square brackets, `[]', are optional while arguments
-contained in braces, `{}', are required.
+contained in square brackets, '[]', are optional while arguments
+contained in braces, '{}', are required.
LaTeX is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless
explicitly directed to do otherwise.
@@ -93,8 +340,8 @@ where the CLASS is a valid document class for LaTeX. *Note Document
classes::, for details of the various document classes available
locally.
- You may include other LaTeX commands between the `\documentclass' and
-the `\begin{document}' commands (this area is called the "preamble").
+ You may include other LaTeX commands between the '\documentclass' and
+the '\begin{document}' commands (this area is called the "preamble").
4 Document classes
******************
@@ -103,7 +350,7 @@ The class of a given document is defined with the command:
\documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS}
-The `\documentclass' command must be the first command in a LaTeX source
+The '\documentclass' command must be the first command in a LaTeX source
file.
Built-in LaTeX document CLASS names are (many other document classes
@@ -117,71 +364,66 @@ are available as add-ons; *note Overview::):
==========================
You can specify so-called "global options" or "class options" to the
-`\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual.
+'\documentclass' command by enclosing them in square brackets as usual.
To specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma:
\documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS}
Here is the list of the standard class options.
- All of the standard classes except `slides' accept the following
-options for selecting the typeface size (default is `10pt'):
+ All of the standard classes except 'slides' accept the following
+options for selecting the typeface size (default is '10pt'):
10pt 11pt 12pt
All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the
-paper size (default is `letterpaper'):
+paper size (default is 'letterpaper'):
a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
Miscellaneous other options:
-`draft, final'
+'draft, final'
mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is
- `final'.
-
-`fleqn'
+ 'final'.
+'fleqn'
Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
-
-`landscape'
+'landscape'
Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
-
-`leqno'
+'leqno'
Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the
right side.
-
-`openbib'
+'openbib'
Use "open" bibliography format.
-
-`titlepage, notitlepage'
+'titlepage, notitlepage'
Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on
the class.
These options are not available with the slides class:
-`onecolumn'
-`twocolumn'
- Typeset in one or two columns; default is `onecolumn'.
+'onecolumn'
+'twocolumn'
+ Typeset in one or two columns; default is 'onecolumn'.
-`oneside'
-`twoside'
- Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is `oneside', except for
- the `book' class.
+'oneside'
+'twoside'
+ Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is 'oneside', except for
+ the 'book' class.
- The `\evensidemargin' (`\oddsidemargin' parameter determines the
+ The '\evensidemargin' ('\oddsidemargin' parameter determines the
distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the
page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper
size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For
one-sided printing the text is centered, for two-sided,
- `\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference between `\paperwidth' and
- `\textwidth', with `\evensidemargin' the remainder.
+ '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference between '\paperwidth' and
+ '\textwidth', with '\evensidemargin' the remainder.
-`openright'
-`openany'
+'openright'
+'openany'
Determines if a chapter should start on a right-hand page; default
- is `openright' for book.
+ is 'openright' for book.
- The `slides' class offers the option `clock' for printing the time at
+ The 'slides' class offers the option 'clock' for printing the time at
the bottom of each note.
Additional packages are loaded like this:
@@ -189,11 +431,11 @@ the bottom of each note.
\usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}
To specify more than one PKG, you can separate them with a comma, or
-use multiple `\usepackage' commands.
+use multiple '\usepackage' commands.
- Any options given in the `\documentclass' command that are unknown by
+ Any options given in the '\documentclass' command that are unknown by
the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
-`\usepackage'.
+'\usepackage'.
5 Typefaces
***********
@@ -206,106 +448,96 @@ style. The LaTeX commands for doing this are described here.
The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
- These commands are used like `\textit{italic text}'. The
-corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration form", which
-takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
-next type style command or the end of the current group.
+ This first group of commands is typically used like '\textit{italic
+text}'. The corresponding command in parenthesis is the "declaration
+form", which takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form
+lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group.
The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either
-`\sffamily\bfseries' or `\bfseries\sffamily' to get bold sans serif.
+'\sffamily\bfseries' or '\bfseries\sffamily' to get bold sans serif.
- You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for
-instance, `\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'.
+ You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations;
+for instance, '\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}'.
-`\textrm (\rmfamily)'
+ These commands automatically supply an italic correction if the
+'\textrm (\rmfamily)'
Roman.
-`\textit (\itshape)'
+'\textit (\itshape)'
Italics.
-`\emph'
- Emphasis (switches between `\textit' and `\textrm').
+'\emph'
+ Emphasis (switches between '\textit' and '\textrm').
-`\textmd (\mdseries)'
+'\textmd (\mdseries)'
Medium weight (default).
-`\textbf (\bfseries)'
+'\textbf (\bfseries)'
Boldface.
-
-`\textup (\upshape)'
- Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
-
-`\textsl (\slshape)'
+'\textup (\upshape)'
+ Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+'\textsl (\slshape)'
Slanted.
-
-`\textsf (\sffamily)'
+'\textsf (\sffamily)'
Sans serif.
-
-`\textsc (\scshape)'
+'\textsc (\scshape)'
Small caps.
-
-`\texttt (\ttfamily)'
+'\texttt (\ttfamily)'
Typewriter.
-
-`\textnormal (\normalfont)'
+'\textnormal (\normalfont)'
Main document font.
-
-`\mathrm'
+'\mathrm'
Roman, for use in math mode.
-
-`\mathbf'
+'\mathbf'
Boldface, for use in math mode.
-
-`\mathsf'
+'\mathsf'
Sans serif, for use in math mode.
-
-`\mathtt'
+'\mathtt'
Typewriter, for use in math mode.
-`\mathit'
-`(\mit)'
+'\mathit'
+'(\mit)'
Italics, for use in math mode.
-`\mathnormal'
- For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
-
-`\mathcal'
- `Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
+'\mathnormal'
+ For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
+'\mathcal'
+ 'Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
- In addition, the command `\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
+ In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
-`\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
+'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
LaTeX also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to
the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. They are used
-differently than the above commands, too: `{\CMD ...}' instead of
-`\CMD{...}'. These are two very different things.
+differently than the above commands, too: '{\CMD ...}' instead of
+'\CMD{...}'. These are two very different things.
-`\bf'
+'\bf'
Switch to bold face.
-`\cal'
+'\cal'
Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
-`\em'
+'\em'
Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics).
-`\it'
+'\it'
Italics.
-`\rm'
+'\rm'
Roman.
-`\sc'
+'\sc'
Small caps.
-`\sf'
+'\sf'
Sans serif.
-`\sl'
+'\sl'
Slanted (oblique).
-`\tt'
+'\tt'
Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
5.2 Font sizes
@@ -313,26 +545,26 @@ differently than the above commands, too: `{\CMD ...}' instead of
The following standard type size commands are supported by LaTeX. The
table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font size used
-(in points) with the `10pt', `11pt', and `12pt' document size options,
+(in points) with the '10pt', '11pt', and '12pt' document size options,
respectively (*note Document class options::).
-Command `10pt' `11pt' `12pt'
+Command '10pt' '11pt' '12pt'
--------------------------------------------------
-`\tiny' 5 6 6
-`\scriptsize' 7 8 8
-`\footnotesize' 8 9 10
-`\small' 9 10 10.95
-`\normalsize' (default) 10 10.95 12
-`\large' 12 12 14.4
-`\Large' 14.4 14.4 17.28
-`\LARGE' 17.28 17.28 20.74
-`\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88
-`\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88
-
- The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of the
-declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end of
-the current group. You can also use the environment form of these
-commands; for instance, `\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.
+'\tiny' 5 6 6
+'\scriptsize' 7 8 8
+'\footnotesize' 8 9 10
+'\small' 9 10 10.95
+'\normalsize' (default) 10 10.95 12
+'\large' 12 12 14.4
+'\Large' 14.4 14.4 17.28
+'\LARGE' 17.28 17.28 20.74
+'\huge' 20.74 20.74 24.88
+'\Huge' 24.88 24.88 24.88
+
+ The commands as listed here are "declaration forms". The scope of
+the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the end
+of the current group. You can also use the environment form of these
+commands; for instance, '\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}'.
5.3 Low-level font commands
===========================
@@ -341,238 +573,221 @@ These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
ones.
-`\fontencoding{enc}'
- Select font encoding. Valid encodings include `OT1' and `T1'.
-
-`\fontfamily{family}'
- Select font family. Valid families include:
+'\fontencoding{enc}'
+ Select font encoding. Valid encodings include 'OT1' and 'T1'.
- * `cmr' for Computer Modern Roman
+'\fontfamily{family}'
+ Select font family. Valid families include:
- * `cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif
-
- * `cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter
+ * 'cmr' for Computer Modern Roman
+ * 'cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif
+ * 'cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter
and numerous others.
-`\fontseries{series}'
- Select font series. Valid series include:
-
- * `m' Medium (normal)
+'\fontseries{series}'
+ Select font series. Valid series include:
- * `b' Bold
-
- * `c' Condensed
-
- * `bc' Bold condensed
-
- * `bx' Bold extended
+ * 'm' Medium (normal)
+ * 'b' Bold
+ * 'c' Condensed
+ * 'bc' Bold condensed
+ * 'bx' Bold extended
and various other combinations.
-`\fontshape{shape}'
- Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
-
- * `n' Upright (normal)
-
- * `it' Italic
-
- * `sl' Slanted (oblique)
+'\fontshape{shape}'
+ Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
- * `sc' Small caps
-
- * `ui' Upright italics
-
- * `ol' Outline
+ * 'n' Upright (normal)
+ * 'it' Italic
+ * 'sl' Slanted (oblique)
+ * 'sc' Small caps
+ * 'ui' Upright italics
+ * 'ol' Outline
The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
-`\fontsize{size}{skip}'
- Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to
+'\fontsize{size}{skip}'
+ Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to
and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a
- parameter named `\baselineskip'. The unit of both parameters
- defaults to pt. The default `\baselineskip' for the Computer
- Modern typeface is 1.2 times the `\fontsize'.
+ parameter named '\baselineskip'. The unit of both parameters
+ defaults to pt. The default '\baselineskip' for the Computer
+ Modern typeface is 1.2 times the '\fontsize'.
The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the
- `\baselinestretch' parameter when the type size changes; the
+ '\baselinestretch' parameter when the type size changes; the
default is 1. However, the best way to "double space" a document,
if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use
- the `setspace' package; see
- `http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace'.
+ the 'setspace' package; see
+ 'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace'.
-`\linespread{FACTOR}'
- Equivalent to `\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
- therefore must be followed by `\selectfont' to have any effect.
- Best specified in the preamble, or use the `setspace' package, as
+'\linespread{FACTOR}'
+ Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
+ therefore must be followed by '\selectfont' to have any effect.
+ Best specified in the preamble, or use the 'setspace' package, as
described just above.
The changes made by calling the font commands described above do
- not come into effect until `\selectfont' is called.
+ not come into effect until '\selectfont' is called.
-`\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}'
- The same as invoking `\fontencoding', `\fontfamily', `\fontseries'
- and `\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by
- `\selectfont'.
+'\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}'
+ The same as invoking '\fontencoding', '\fontfamily', '\fontseries'
+ and '\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by
+ '\selectfont'.
6 Layout
********
Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
-6.1 `\onecolumn'
+6.1 '\onecolumn'
================
-The `\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
+The '\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
single-column output. This is the default.
-6.2 `\twocolumn'
+6.2 '\twocolumn'
================
Synopsis:
\twocolumn[TEXT1COL]
- The `\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the optional TEXT1COL argument is present, it is
+ The '\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
+two-column output. If the optional TEXT1COL argument is present, it is
typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.
These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
-`\columnsep'
+'\columnsep'
The distance between columns (35pt by default).
-`\columnseprule'
+'\columnseprule'
The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there
is no rule.
-`\columnwidth'
- The width of the current column; this is equal to `\textwidth' in
+'\columnwidth'
+ The width of the current column; this is equal to '\textwidth' in
single-column text.
These parameters control float behavior in two-column output:
-`\dbltopfraction'
+'\dbltopfraction'
Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
- occupied by floats. Default `.7', can be usefully redefined to
- (say) `.9' to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+ occupied by floats. Default '.7', can be usefully redefined to
+ (say) '.9' to avoid going to float pages so soon.
-`\dblfloatpagefraction'
+'\dblfloatpagefraction'
The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
- floats, for a two-column float page. Default `.5'.
+ floats, for a two-column float page. Default '.5'.
-`\dblfloatsep'
+'\dblfloatsep'
Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float
- page. Default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt'
- documents, `14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for `12pt'.
+ page. Default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for '10pt' and '11pt'
+ documents, '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for '12pt'.
-`\dbltextfloatsep'
+'\dbltextfloatsep'
Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a
- page and the main text. Default `20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+ page and the main text. Default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
-6.3 `\flushbottom'
+6.3 '\flushbottom'
==================
-The `\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height,
+The '\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height,
adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page.
- This is the default if `twocolumn' mode is selected (*note Document
+ This is the default if 'twocolumn' mode is selected (*note Document
class options::).
-6.4 `\raggedbottom'
+6.4 '\raggedbottom'
===================
-The `\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the natural height of
+The '\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the natural height of
the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched.
6.5 Page layout parameters
==========================
-`\headheight'
+'\headheight'
Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is
- `30pt', except in the `book' class, where it varies with the type
+ '30pt', except in the 'book' class, where it varies with the type
size.
-`\headsep'
+'\headsep'
Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top
- of the main text. Default is `25pt', except in the `book' class,
+ of the main text. Default is '25pt', except in the 'book' class,
where it varies with the type size.
-`\footskip'
+'\footskip'
Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline
- of the page footer. Default is `30pt', except in the `book' class,
+ of the page footer. Default is '30pt', except in the 'book' class,
where it varies with the type size.
-`\linewidth'
- Width of the current line, decreased for each nested `list' (*note
- list::). Specifically, it is smaller than `\textwidth' by the sum
- of `\leftmargin' and `\rightmargin' (*note itemize::). The default
+'\linewidth'
+ Width of the current line, decreased for each nested 'list' (*note
+ list::). Specifically, it is smaller than '\textwidth' by the sum
+ of '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note itemize::). The default
varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, etc. For
- an `article' document in `10pt', it's set to `345pt'; in two-column
- mode, that becomes `229.5pt'.
+ an 'article' document in '10pt', it's set to '345pt'; in two-column
+ mode, that becomes '229.5pt'.
-`\textheight'
+'\textheight'
The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies
- with the font size, document class, etc. For an `article' or
- `report' document in `10pt', it's set to `43\baselineskip'; for
- `book', it's `41\baselineskip'. For `11pt', it's `38\baselineskip'
- and for `12pt', `36\baselineskip'.
+ with the font size, document class, etc. For an 'article' or
+ 'report' document in '10pt', it's set to '43\baselineskip'; for
+ 'book', it's '41\baselineskip'. For '11pt', it's '38\baselineskip'
+ and for '12pt', '36\baselineskip'.
-`\textwidth'
+'\textwidth'
The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default
- varies as usual. For an `article' or `report' document, it's
- `345pt' at `10pt', `360pt' at `11pt', and `390pt' at `12pt'. For a
- `book' document, it's `4.5in' at `10pt', and `5in' at `11pt' or
- `12pt'.
+ varies as usual. For an 'article' or 'report' document, it's
+ '345pt' at '10pt', '360pt' at '11pt', and '390pt' at '12pt'. For a
+ 'book' document, it's '4.5in' at '10pt', and '5in' at '11pt' or
+ '12pt'.
- In multi-column output, `\textwidth' remains the width of the
- entire page body, while `\columnwidth' is the width of one column
+ In multi-column output, '\textwidth' remains the width of the
+ entire page body, while '\columnwidth' is the width of one column
(*note \twocolumn::).
- In lists (*note list::), `\textwidth' remains the width of the
- entire page body (and `\columnwidth' the width of the entire
- column), while `\linewidth' may decrease for nested lists.
+ In lists (*note list::), '\textwidth' remains the width of the
+ entire page body (and '\columnwidth' the width of the entire
+ column), while '\linewidth' may decrease for nested lists.
- Inside a minipage (*note minipage::) or `\parbox' (*note
+ Inside a minipage (*note minipage::) or '\parbox' (*note
\parbox::), all the width-related parameters are set to the
specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of
- the `minipage' or `\parbox'.
+ the 'minipage' or '\parbox'.
- For completeness: `\hsize' is the TeX primitive parameter used when
+ For completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX primitive parameter used when
text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal LaTeX
documents.
-`\topmargin'
+'\topmargin'
Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is
- computed based on many other parameters: `\paperheight - 2in -
+ computed based on many other parameters: '\paperheight - 2in -
\headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then divided
by two.
-`\topskip'
+'\topskip'
Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline
of the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is
- the same as the font size, e.g., `10pt' at `10pt'.
+ the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at '10pt'.
7 Sectioning
************
Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units:
-`\part'
-
-`\chapter'
+'\part'
+'\chapter'
(report and book class only)
-
-`\section'
-
-`\subsection'
-
-`\subsubsection'
-
-`\paragraph'
-
-`\subparagraph'
+'\section'
+'\subsection'
+'\subsubsection'
+'\paragraph'
+'\subparagraph'
All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g.,
@@ -582,21 +797,20 @@ Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units:
section title can appear in two other places:
1. The table of contents.
-
2. The running head at the top of the page.
You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text.
To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument
TOCTITLE that, when given, specifies the text for these other places.
- Also, all sectioning commands have `*'-forms that print TITLE as
+ Also, all sectioning commands have '*'-forms that print TITLE as
usual, but do not include a number and do not make an entry in the table
of contents. For instance:
\section*{Preamble}
- The `\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units are
-numbered. The `\appendix' command itself generates no text and does not
+ The '\appendix' command changes the way following sectional units are
+numbered. The '\appendix' command itself generates no text and does not
affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this command is
something like
@@ -605,12 +819,12 @@ something like
\appendix
\chapter{The First Appendix}
- The `secnumdepth' counter controls printing of section numbers. The
+ The 'secnumdepth' counter controls printing of section numbers. The
setting
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{LEVEL}
-suppresses heading numbers at any depth > LEVEL, where `chapter' is
+suppresses heading numbers at any depth > LEVEL, where 'chapter' is
level zero. (*Note \setcounter::.)
8 Cross references
@@ -619,14 +833,14 @@ level zero. (*Note \setcounter::.)
One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
the reader to them, as in "See Figure 3 for more details."
-8.1 `\label'
+8.1 '\label'
============
Synopsis:
\label{KEY}
- A `\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to KEY the
+ A '\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to KEY the
number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered
environment assigns that number to KEY.
@@ -635,47 +849,43 @@ punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished.
To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is
common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
-colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes:
+colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes:
-`ch'
+'ch'
for chapters
-
-`sec'
+'sec'
for lower-level sectioning commands
-
-`fig'
+'fig'
for figures
-
-`tab'
+'tab'
for tables
-
-`eq'
+'eq'
for equations
- Thus, a label for a figure would look like `fig:snark' or
-`fig.snark'.
+ Thus, a label for a figure would look like 'fig:snark' or
+'fig.snark'.
-8.2 `\pageref{KEY}'
+8.2 '\pageref{KEY}'
===================
Synopsis:
\pageref{KEY}
- The `\pageref'{KEY} command produces the page number of the place in
-the text where the corresponding `\label'{KEY} command appears.
+ The '\pageref'{KEY} command produces the page number of the place in
+the text where the corresponding '\label'{KEY} command appears.
-8.3 `\ref{KEY}'
+8.3 '\ref{KEY}'
===============
Synopsis:
\ref{KEY}
- The `\ref' command produces the number of the sectional unit,
-equation, footnote, figure, ..., of the corresponding `\label' command
+ The '\ref' command produces the number of the sectional unit,
+equation, footnote, figure, ..., of the corresponding '\label' command
(*note \label::). It does not produce any text, such as the word
-`Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself.
+'Section' or 'Figure', just the bare number itself.
9 Environments
**************
@@ -687,7 +897,7 @@ environment begins and ends in the same manner:
...
\end{ENVNAME}
-9.1 `abstract'
+9.1 'abstract'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -698,7 +908,7 @@ Synopsis:
Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple
paragraphs.
-9.2 `array'
+9.2 'array'
===========
Synopsis:
@@ -708,25 +918,23 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{array}
- Math arrays are produced with the `array' environment, normally
-within an `equation' environment (*note equation::). It has a single
+ Math arrays are produced with the 'array' environment, normally
+within an 'equation' environment (*note equation::). It has a single
mandatory TEMPLATE argument describing the number of columns and the
alignment within them. Each column COL is specified by a single letter
that tells how items in that row should be formatted, as follows:
-`c'
+'c'
centered
-
-`l'
+'l'
flush left
-
-`r'
+'r'
flush right
- Column entries are separated by `&'. Column entries may include
-other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with `\\'.
+ Column entries are separated by '&'. Column entries may include
+other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with '\\'.
- In the template, the construct `@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns in
+ In the template, the construct '@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns in
each row.
Here's an example:
@@ -738,14 +946,14 @@ each row.
\end{array}
\end{equation}
- The `\arraycolsep' parameter defines half the width of the space
-separating columns; the default is `5pt'. *Note tabular::, for other
-parameters which affect formatting in `array' environments, namely
-`\arrayrulewidth' and `\arraystretch'.
+ The '\arraycolsep' parameter defines half the width of the space
+separating columns; the default is '5pt'. *Note tabular::, for other
+parameters which affect formatting in 'array' environments, namely
+'\arrayrulewidth' and '\arraystretch'.
- The `array' environment can only be used in math mode.
+ The 'array' environment can only be used in math mode.
-9.3 `center'
+9.3 'center'
============
Synopsis:
@@ -755,23 +963,23 @@ Synopsis:
LINE2 \\
\end{center}
- The `center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
+ The 'center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the
-current page. Each line is terminated with the string `\\'.
+current page. Each line is terminated with the string '\\'.
-9.3.1 `\centering'
+9.3.1 '\centering'
------------------
-The `\centering' declaration corresponds to the `center' environment.
-This declaration can be used inside an environment such as `quote' or in
-a `parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the
-page by putting a `\centering' command at the beginning of the figure or
+The '\centering' declaration corresponds to the 'center' environment.
+This declaration can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or in
+a 'parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the
+page by putting a '\centering' command at the beginning of the figure or
table environment.
- Unlike the `center' environment, the `\centering' command does not
+ Unlike the 'center' environment, the '\centering' command does not
start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command (of an
+declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command (of an
environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
Here's an example:
@@ -782,7 +990,7 @@ environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
second line \\
\end{quote}
-9.4 `description'
+9.4 'description'
=================
Synopsis:
@@ -793,19 +1001,19 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{description}
- The `description' environment is used to make labelled lists. Each
+ The 'description' environment is used to make labelled lists. Each
LABEL is typeset in bold, flush right. The ITEM text may contain
multiple paragraphs.
Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if
-you typeset a label in typewriter using `\texttt', you'll get bold
-typewriter: `\item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]'. This may be too
-bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use `\tt', which
-resets all other style variations: `\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'.
+you typeset a label in typewriter using '\texttt', you'll get bold
+typewriter: '\item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]'. This may be too
+bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use '\tt', which
+resets all other style variations: '\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'.
For details about list spacing, see *note itemize::.
-9.5 `displaymath'
+9.5 'displaymath'
=================
Synopsis:
@@ -818,20 +1026,20 @@ or
\[MATH\]
- The `displaymath' environment (`\[...\]' is a synonym) typesets the
-MATH text on its own line, centered by default. The global `fleqn'
+ The 'displaymath' environment ('\[...\]' is a synonym) typesets the
+MATH text on its own line, centered by default. The global 'fleqn'
option makes equations flush left; see *note Document class options::.
- No equation number is added to `displaymath' text; to get an equation
-number, use the `equation' environment (*note equation::).
+ No equation number is added to 'displaymath' text; to get an equation
+number, use the 'equation' environment (*note equation::).
-9.6 `document'
+9.6 'document'
==============
-The `document' environment encloses the body of a document. It is
+The 'document' environment encloses the body of a document. It is
required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting & ending::.
-9.7 `enumerate'
+9.7 'enumerate'
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -842,63 +1050,69 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{enumerate}
- The `enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations
+ The 'enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations
can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
-be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as `itemize'
-(*note itemize::) and `description' (*note description::).
+be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as 'itemize'
+(*note itemize::) and 'description' (*note description::).
- Each item of an enumerated list begins with an `\item' command.
-There must be at least one `\item' command within the environment.
+ Each item of an enumerated list begins with an '\item' command.
+There must be at least one '\item' command within the environment.
By default, the numbering at each level is done like this:
1. 1., 2., ...
-
2. (a), (b), ...
-
3. i., ii., ...
-
4. A., B., ...
- The `enumerate' environment uses the counters `\enumi' through
-`\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If the optional argument to
-`\item' is given, the counter is not incremented for that item.
+ The 'enumerate' environment uses the counters '\enumi' through
+'\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If the optional argument to
+'\item' is given, the counter is not incremented for that item.
- The `enumerate' environment uses the commands `\labelenumi' through
-`\labelenumiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use
-`\renewcommand' to change the labels (*note \newcommand &
+ The 'enumerate' environment uses the commands '\labelenumi' through
+'\labelenumiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use
+'\renewcommand' to change the labels (*note \newcommand &
\renewcommand::). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase
letters:
\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
-9.8 `eqnarray'
+9.8 'eqnarray'
==============
- \begin{eqnarray} (or `eqnarray*')
+First, a caveat: the 'eqnarray' environment has some infelicities which
+cannot be overcome; the article "Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
+describes them in detail
+('http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf'). The bottom line is
+that it is better to use the 'align' environment (and others) from the
+'amsmath' package.
+
+ Nevertheless, here is a description of 'eqnarray':
+
+ \begin{eqnarray} (or 'eqnarray*')
FORMULA1 \\
FORMULA2 \\
...
\end{eqnarray}
- The `eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of equations
-or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column `array'
-environment, with consecutive rows separated by `\\' and consecutive
-items within a row separated by an `&'.
+ The 'eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of equations
+or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column 'array'
+environment, with consecutive rows separated by '\\' and consecutive
+items within a row separated by an '&'.
- `\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning
+ '\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning
of not allowing a page break at that line.
An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
-`\nonumber' command. Alternatively, The `*'-form of the environment
-(`\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}') will omit equation numbering
-entirely, while otherwise being the same as `eqnarray'.
+'\nonumber' command. Alternatively, The '*'-form of the environment
+('\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}') will omit equation numbering
+entirely, while otherwise being the same as 'eqnarray'.
- The command `\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
-lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
+ The command '\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
+lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
zero width.
-9.9 `equation'
+9.9 'equation'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -907,11 +1121,11 @@ Synopsis:
MATH
\end{equation}
- The `equation' environment starts a `displaymath' environment (*note
+ The 'equation' environment starts a 'displaymath' environment (*note
displaymath::), e.g., centering the MATH text on the page, and also
places an equation number in the right margin.
-9.10 `figure'
+9.10 'figure'
=============
\begin{figure[*]}[PLACEMENT]
@@ -927,71 +1141,102 @@ Figures will not be split between two pages.
When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a
full-width figure (across both columns).
- The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
+ The optional argument '[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly
put a float:
-`t'
+'t'
(Top)--at the top of a text page.
-`b'
- (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. However, `b' is not
- allowed for full-width floats (`figure*') with double-column
- output. To ameliorate this, use the `stfloats' or `dblfloatfix'
+'b'
+ (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. However, 'b' is not
+ allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
+ output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
- `http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat'.
+ 'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat'.
-`h'
+'h'
(Here)--at the position in the text where the figure environment
- appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, `t' is
- automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear
- "here", use the `float' and use its `H' placement letter. (That
- package also provides other options.)
+ appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; 't' is
+ automatically added.
+
+ To absolutely force a figure to appear "here", you can
+ '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
+ For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+ 'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere'.
-`p'
+'p'
(Page of floats)--on a separate float page, which is a page
containing no text, only floats.
+'!'
+ Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
+ ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
+ appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
+ page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
+ above.
+
The standard report and article classes use the default placement
-`tbp'.
+'tbp'.
The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
-etc. you wish.
+etc. you wish.
- The `\caption' command specifies caption TEXT for the figure. The
+ The '\caption' command specifies caption TEXT for the figure. The
caption is numbered by default. If LOFTITLE is present, it is used in
the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::).
+ Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text:
+
The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at
- the bottom; default `.3'.
+ the bottom; default '.3'.
-`\floatpagefraction'
+'\floatpagefraction'
The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
- floats; default `.5'.
+ floats; default '.5'.
-`\floatsep'
- Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default `12pt
+'\textfraction'
+ Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+ much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+ different page. The default is '.2'.
+
+'\topfraction'
+ Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+ floats; default '.7'.
+
+ Parameters relating to vertical space around floats:
+
+'\floatsep'
+ Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
plus2pt minus2pt'.
-`\intextsep'
+'\intextsep'
Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
- default `12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for `10pt' and `11pt' styles, `14pt
- plus4pt minus4pt' for `12pt'.
+ default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for '10pt' and '11pt' styles, '14pt
+ plus4pt minus4pt' for '12pt'.
-`\textfloatsep'
+'\textfloatsep'
Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
- default `20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+ default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
-`\textfraction'
- Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
- much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
- different page. The default is `.2'.
+ Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page:
-`\topfraction'
- Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
- floats; default is `.7'.
+'\bottomnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
+ page; default 1.
-9.11 `flushleft'
+'\topnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+ default 2.
+
+'\totalnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+
+ The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats:
+'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats'.
+
+9.11 'flushleft'
================
\begin{flushleft}
@@ -1000,24 +1245,24 @@ the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::).
...
\end{flushleft}
- The `flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph
+ The 'flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
-right Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'.
+right Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.
-9.11.1 `\raggedright'
+9.11.1 '\raggedright'
---------------------
-The `\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the `flushleft'
+The '\raggedright' declaration corresponds to the 'flushleft'
environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
-`quote' or in a `parbox'.
+'quote' or in a 'parbox'.
- Unlike the `flushleft' environment, the `\raggedright' command does
+ Unlike the 'flushleft' environment, the '\raggedright' command does
not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command that ends the
+declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
paragraph unit.
-9.12 `flushright'
+9.12 'flushright'
=================
\begin{flushright}
@@ -1026,24 +1271,24 @@ paragraph unit.
...
\end{flushright}
- The `flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph
+ The 'flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
-left. Each line must be terminated with the string `\\'.
+left. Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.
-9.12.1 `\raggedleft'
+9.12.1 '\raggedleft'
--------------------
-The `\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the `flushright'
+The '\raggedleft' declaration corresponds to the 'flushright'
environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such as
-`quote' or in a `parbox'.
+'quote' or in a 'parbox'.
- Unlike the `flushright' environment, the `\raggedleft' command does
+ Unlike the 'flushright' environment, the '\raggedleft' command does
not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or `\end' command that ends the
+declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command that ends the
paragraph unit.
-9.13 `itemize'
+9.13 'itemize'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -1054,37 +1299,34 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{itemize}
- The `itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list.
+ The 'itemize' environment produces an "unordered", "bulleted" list.
Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep.
They can also be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such
-as `enumerate' (*note enumerate::).
+as 'enumerate' (*note enumerate::).
- Each item of an `itemize' list begins with an `\item' command. There
-must be at least one `\item' command within the environment.
+ Each item of an 'itemize' list begins with an '\item' command. There
+must be at least one '\item' command within the environment.
By default, the marks at each level look like this:
1. * (bullet)
-
2. -- (bold en-dash)
-
3. * (asterisk)
+ 4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period)
- 4. . (centered dot, rendered here as a period)
-
- The `itemize' environment uses the commands `\labelitemi' through
-`\labelitemiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use
-`\renewcommand' to change the labels. For instance, to have the first
+ The 'itemize' environment uses the commands '\labelitemi' through
+'\labelitemiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use
+'\renewcommand' to change the labels. For instance, to have the first
level use diamonds:
\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
- The `\leftmargini' through `\leftmarginvi' parameters define the
+ The '\leftmargini' through '\leftmarginvi' parameters define the
distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and the
-left margin of the list. By convention, `\leftmargin' is set to the
-appropriate `\leftmarginN' when a new level of nesting is entered.
+left margin of the list. By convention, '\leftmargin' is set to the
+appropriate '\leftmarginN' when a new level of nesting is entered.
- The defaults vary from `.5em' (highest levels of nesting) to `2.5em'
+ The defaults vary from '.5em' (highest levels of nesting) to '2.5em'
(first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode. This example
greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists:
@@ -1092,53 +1334,53 @@ greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists:
Some parameters that affect list formatting:
-`\itemindent'
+'\itemindent'
Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero.
-`\labelsep'
- Space between the label and text of an item; default `.5em'.
+'\labelsep'
+ Space between the label and text of an item; default '.5em'.
-`\labelwidth'
- Width of the label; default `2em', or `1.5em' in two-column mode.
+'\labelwidth'
+ Width of the label; default '2em', or '1.5em' in two-column mode.
-`\listparindent'
+'\listparindent'
Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within
- a list item; default `0pt'.
+ a list item; default '0pt'.
-`\rightmargin'
+'\rightmargin'
Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the
- enclosing environment; default `0pt', except in the `quote',
- `quotation', and `verse' environments, where it is set equal to
- `\leftmargin'.
+ enclosing environment; default '0pt', except in the 'quote',
+ 'quotation', and 'verse' environments, where it is set equal to
+ '\leftmargin'.
Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather
loose, by default).
-`\itemsep'
- Vertical space between items. The default is `2pt plus1pt
- minus1pt' for `10pt' documents, `3pt plus2pt minus1pt' for `11pt',
- and `4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt' for `12pt'.
+'\itemsep'
+ Vertical space between items. The default is '2pt plus1pt
+ minus1pt' for '10pt' documents, '3pt plus2pt minus1pt' for '11pt',
+ and '4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt' for '12pt'.
-`\parsep'
+'\parsep'
Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item.
- Defaults are the same as `\itemsep'.
+ Defaults are the same as '\itemsep'.
-`\topsep'
+'\topsep'
Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph.
- For top-level lists, the default is `8pt plus2pt minus4pt' for
- `10pt' documents, `9pt plus3pt minus5pt' for `11pt', and `10pt
- plus4pt minus6pt' for `12pt'. These are reduced for nested lists.
+ For top-level lists, the default is '8pt plus2pt minus4pt' for
+ '10pt' documents, '9pt plus3pt minus5pt' for '11pt', and '10pt
+ plus4pt minus6pt' for '12pt'. These are reduced for nested lists.
-`\partopsep'
- Extra space added to `\topsep' when the list environment starts a
- paragraph. The default is `2pt plus1pt minus1pt' for `10pt'
- documents, `3pt plus1pt minus1pt' for `11pt', and `3pt plus2pt
- minus2pt' for `12pt'.
+'\partopsep'
+ Extra space added to '\topsep' when the list environment starts a
+ paragraph. The default is '2pt plus1pt minus1pt' for '10pt'
+ documents, '3pt plus1pt minus1pt' for '11pt', and '3pt plus2pt
+ minus2pt' for '12pt'.
Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
-space between items. Here is an example defining an `itemize*'
+space between items. Here is an example defining an 'itemize*'
environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
-within a single item (`\parskip' is not list-specific, *note
+within a single item ('\parskip' is not list-specific, *note
\parskip::):
\newenvironment{itemize*}%
@@ -1148,16 +1390,16 @@ within a single item (`\parskip' is not list-specific, *note
\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
{\end{itemize}}
-9.14 `letter' environment: writing letters
+9.14 'letter' environment: writing letters
==========================================
This environment is used for creating letters. *Note Letters::.
-9.15 `list'
+9.15 'list'
===========
-The `list' environment is a generic environment which is used for
-defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in
+The 'list' environment is a generic environment which is used for
+defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in
documents, but often in macros.
\begin{list}{LABELING}{SPACING}
@@ -1167,18 +1409,18 @@ documents, but often in macros.
\end{list}
The mandatory LABELING argument specifies how items should be
-labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to `\item'). This
+labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to '\item'). This
argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the label.
It can and usually does contain other LaTeX commands.
The mandatory SPACING argument contains commands to change the
spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be
-empty, i.e., `{}', which leaves the default spacing.
+empty, i.e., '{}', which leaves the default spacing.
The width used for typesetting the list items is specified by
-`\linewidth' (*note Page layout parameters::).
+'\linewidth' (*note Page layout parameters::).
-9.16 `math'
+9.16 'math'
===========
Synopsis:
@@ -1187,73 +1429,73 @@ Synopsis:
MATH
\end{math}
- The `math' environment inserts the given MATH within the running
-text. `\(...\))' and `$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
+ The 'math' environment inserts the given MATH within the running
+text. '\(...\))' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
-9.17 `minipage'
+9.17 'minipage'
===============
\begin{minipage}[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}
TEXT
\end{minipage}
- The `minipage' environment typesets its body TEXT in a block that
-will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the `\parbox'
-command (*note \parbox::), but unlike `\parbox', other paragraph-making
+ The 'minipage' environment typesets its body TEXT in a block that
+will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the '\parbox'
+command (*note \parbox::), but unlike '\parbox', other paragraph-making
environments can be used inside a minipage.
- The arguments are the same as for `\parbox' (*note \parbox::).
+ The arguments are the same as for '\parbox' (*note \parbox::).
- By default, paragraphs are not indented in the `minipage'
+ By default, paragraphs are not indented in the 'minipage'
environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as
-`\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' command.
+'\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}' command.
- Footnotes in a `minipage' environment are handled in a way that is
+ Footnotes in a 'minipage' environment are handled in a way that is
particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
-`\footnote' or `\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom
+'\footnote' or '\footnotetext' command puts the footnote at the bottom
of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it uses the
-`\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary `footnote' counter (*note
+'\mpfootnote' counter instead of the ordinary 'footnote' counter (*note
Counters::).
However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
-9.18 `picture'
+9.18 'picture'
==============
\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
... PICTURE COMMANDS ...
\end{picture}
- The `picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind of
+ The 'picture' environment allows you to create just about any kind of
picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles. You tell
LaTeX where to put things in the picture by specifying their
coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal point and
-a minus sign--a number like `5', `0.3' or `-3.1416'. A coordinate
-specifies a length in multiples of the unit length `\unitlength', so if
-`\unitlength' has been set to `1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies
+a minus sign--a number like '5', '0.3' or '-3.1416'. A coordinate
+specifies a length in multiples of the unit length '\unitlength', so if
+'\unitlength' has been set to '1cm', then the coordinate 2.54 specifies
a length of 2.54 centimeters. You should only change the value of
-`\unitlength', using the `\setlength' command, outside of a `picture'
+'\unitlength', using the '\setlength' command, outside of a 'picture'
environment.
- A position is a pair of coordinates, such as `(2.4,-5)', specifying
-the point with x-coordinate `2.4' and y-coordinate `-5'. Coordinates
+ A position is a pair of coordinates, such as '(2.4,-5)', specifying
+the point with x-coordinate '2.4' and y-coordinate '-5'. Coordinates
are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a
position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the
parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
- The `picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
-`position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
+ The 'picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
+'position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
argument's x- and y-coordinates.
- The `picture' environment also has an optional `position' argument,
-following the `size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike
+ The 'picture' environment also has an optional 'position' argument,
+following the 'size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike
ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square
-brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at
+brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at
the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin).
-For example, if `\unitlength' has been set to `1mm', the command
+For example, if '\unitlength' has been set to '1mm', the command
\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
@@ -1270,216 +1512,211 @@ is; LaTeX will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or
even off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by LaTeX in
determining how much room to leave for it.
- Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the `\put' command.
+ Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the '\put' command.
The command
\put (11.3,-.3){...}
-puts the object specified by `...' in the picture, with its reference
+puts the object specified by '...' in the picture, with its reference
point at coordinates (11.3,-.3). The reference points for various
objects will be described below.
- The `\put' command creates an "LR box". You can put anything that
-can go in an `\mbox' (*note \mbox::) in the text argument of the `\put'
+ The '\put' command creates an "LR box". You can put anything that
+can go in an '\mbox' (*note \mbox::) in the text argument of the '\put'
command. When you do this, the reference point will be the lower left
corner of the box.
- The `picture' commands are described in the following sections.
+ The 'picture' commands are described in the following sections.
-9.18.1 `\circle'
+9.18.1 '\circle'
----------------
\circle[*]{DIAMETER}
- The `\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
-the specified one as possible. The `*'-form of the command draws a
+ The '\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
+the specified one as possible. The '*'-form of the command draws a
solid circle.
Circles up to 40 pt can be drawn.
-9.18.2 `\makebox'
+9.18.2 '\makebox'
-----------------
-`\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}'
+'\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}'
- The `\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the
-normal `\makebox' command except that you must specify a `width' and
-`height' in multiples of `\unitlength'.
+ The '\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the
+normal '\makebox' command except that you must specify a 'width' and
+'height' in multiples of '\unitlength'.
- The optional argument, `[position]', specifies the quadrant that your
+ The optional argument, '[position]', specifies the quadrant that your
text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:
-`t'
+'t'
Moves the item to the top of the rectangle.
-`b'
+'b'
Moves the item to the bottom.
-`l'
+'l'
Moves the item to the left.
-`r'
+'r'
Moves the item to the right.
*Note \makebox::.
-9.18.3 `\framebox'
+9.18.3 '\framebox'
------------------
Synopsis:
\framebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POS]{...}
- The `\framebox' command is like `\makebox' (see previous section),
+ The '\framebox' command is like '\makebox' (see previous section),
except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box that it
creates.
- The `\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness `\fboxrule', and
-leaves a space `\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box.
+ The '\framebox' command produces a rule of thickness '\fboxrule', and
+leaves a space '\fboxsep' between the rule and the contents of the box.
-9.18.4 `\dashbox'
+9.18.4 '\dashbox'
-----------------
Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis:
\dashbox{DLEN}(RWIDTH,RHEIGHT)[POS]{TEXT}
- `\dashbox' creates a dashed rectangle around TEXT in a `picture'
+ '\dashbox' creates a dashed rectangle around TEXT in a 'picture'
environment. Dashes are DLEN units long, and the rectangle has overall
width RWIDTH and height RHEIGHT. The TEXT is positioned at optional
POS.
- A dashed box looks best when the `rwidth' and `rheight' are multiples
-of the `dlen'.
+ A dashed box looks best when the 'rwidth' and 'rheight' are multiples
+of the 'dlen'.
-9.18.5 `\frame'
+9.18.5 '\frame'
---------------
Synopsis:
\frame{TEXT}
- The `\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around TEXT. The
+ The '\frame' command puts a rectangular frame around TEXT. The
reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra space
is put between the frame and the object.
-9.18.6 `\line'
+9.18.6 '\line'
--------------
Synopsis:
\line(XSLOPE,YSLOPE){LENGTH}
- The `\line' command draws a line with the given LENGTH and slope
+ The '\line' command draws a line with the given LENGTH and slope
XSLOPE/YSLOPE.
Standard LaTeX can only draw lines with SLOPE = x/y, where x and y
have integer values from -6 through 6. For lines of any slope, not to
-mention other shapes, see the `curve2e' and many many other packages on
+mention other shapes, see the 'curve2e' and many many other packages on
CTAN.
-9.18.7 `\linethickness'
+9.18.7 '\linethickness'
-----------------------
-The `\linethickness{DIM}' command declares the thickness of horizontal
+The '\linethickness{DIM}' command declares the thickness of horizontal
and vertical lines in a picture environment to be DIM, which must be a
positive length.
- `\linethickness' does not affect the thickness of slanted lines,
-circles, or the quarter circles drawn by `\oval'.
+ '\linethickness' does not affect the thickness of slanted lines,
+circles, or the quarter circles drawn by '\oval'.
-9.18.8 `\thicklines'
+9.18.8 '\thicklines'
--------------------
-The `\thicklines' command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal
+The '\thicklines' command is an alternate line thickness for horizontal
and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness::
and *note \thinlines::.
-9.18.9 `\thinlines'
+9.18.9 '\thinlines'
-------------------
-The `\thinlines' command is the default line thickness for horizontal
+The '\thinlines' command is the default line thickness for horizontal
and vertical lines in a picture environment; cf. *note \linethickness::
and *note \thicklines::.
-9.18.10 `\multiput'
+9.18.10 '\multiput'
-------------------
Synopsis:
\multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ}
- The `\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern
+ The '\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern
across a picture. OBJ is first placed at position (x,y), then at
(x+\delta x,y+\delta y), and so on, N times.
-9.18.11 `\oval'
+9.18.11 '\oval'
---------------
Synopsis:
\oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]
- The `\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
+ The '\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
optional argument PORTION allows you to select part of the oval via the
following:
-`t'
+'t'
selects the top portion;
-
-`b'
+'b'
selects the bottom portion;
-
-`r'
+'r'
selects the right portion;
-
-`l'
+'l'
selects the left portion.
The "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
maximum radius of 20pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes with
rounded corners.
-9.18.12 `\put'
+9.18.12 '\put'
--------------
-`\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }'
+'\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }'
- The `\put' command places the item specified by the mandatory
+ The '\put' command places the item specified by the mandatory
argument at the given coordinates.
-9.18.13 `\shortstack'
+9.18.13 '\shortstack'
---------------------
Synopsis:
\shortstack[POSITION]{...\\...\\...}
- The `\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects. The valid
+ The '\shortstack' command produces a stack of objects. The valid
positions are:
-`r'
+'r'
Move the objects to the right of the stack.
-
-`l'
+'l'
Move the objects to the left of the stack
-
-`c'
+'c'
Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
- Objects are separated with `\\'.
+ Objects are separated with '\\'.
-9.18.14 `\vector'
+9.18.14 '\vector'
-----------------
Synopsis:
\vector(X-SLOPE,Y-SLOPE){LENGTH}
- The `\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
+ The '\vector' command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
length and slope. The x and y values must lie between -4 and +4,
inclusive.
-9.19 `quotation'
+9.19 'quotation'
================
Synopsis:
@@ -1488,13 +1725,13 @@ Synopsis:
TEXT
\end{quotation}
- The margins of the `quotation' environment are indented on both the
+ The margins of the 'quotation' environment are indented on both the
left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a
blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
- Unlike the `quote' environment, each paragraph is indented normally.
+ Unlike the 'quote' environment, each paragraph is indented normally.
-9.20 `quote'
+9.20 'quote'
============
Snyopsis:
@@ -1503,13 +1740,13 @@ Snyopsis:
TEXT
\end{quote}
- The margins of the `quote' environment are indented on both the left
+ The margins of the 'quote' environment are indented on both the left
and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank
line between text produces a new paragraph.
- Unlike the `quotation' environment, paragraphs are not indented.
+ Unlike the 'quotation' environment, paragraphs are not indented.
-9.21 `tabbing'
+9.21 'tabbing'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -1520,73 +1757,73 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{tabbing}
- The `tabbing' environment provides a way to align text in columns.
+ The 'tabbing' environment provides a way to align text in columns.
It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as was done on an
ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where the width of
each column is constant and known in advance.
- This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the `tabular'
+ This environment can be broken across pages, unlike the 'tabular'
environment.
- The following commands can be used inside a `tabbing' enviroment:
+ The following commands can be used inside a 'tabbing' enviroment:
-`\\ (tabbing)'
+'\\ (tabbing)'
End a line.
-`\= (tabbing)'
+'\= (tabbing)'
Sets a tab stop at the current position.
-`\> (tabbing)'
+'\> (tabbing)'
Advances to the next tab stop.
-`\<'
+'\<'
Put following text to the left of the local margin (without
changing the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
-`\+'
+'\+'
Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
-`\-'
+'\-'
Moves the left margin of the next and all the following commands
one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if necessary.
-`\' (tabbing)'
+'\' (tabbing)'
Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
- i.e. everything from the most recent `\>', `\<', `\'', `\\', or
- `\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush against
+ i.e. everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or
+ '\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush against
the current column's tab stop.
-`\` (tabbing)'
+'\` (tabbing)'
Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including
tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last
- column because there's no tab stop there. The `\`' command moves
- all the text that follows it, up to the `\\' or `\end{tabbing}'
+ column because there's no tab stop there. The '\`' command moves
+ all the text that follows it, up to the '\\' or '\end{tabbing}'
command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing
- environment. There must be no `\>' or `\'' command between the
- `\`' and the command that ends the line.
+ environment. There must be no '\>' or '\'' command between the
+ '\`' and the command that ends the line.
-`\a (tabbing)'
- In a `tabbing' environment, the commands `\=', `\'' and `\`' do not
+'\a (tabbing)'
+ In a 'tabbing' environment, the commands '\=', '\'' and '\`' do not
produce accents as usual (*note Accents::). Instead, the commands
- `\a=', `\a'' and `\a`' are used.
+ '\a=', '\a'' and '\a`' are used.
-`\kill'
- Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like `\\' except
+'\kill'
+ Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like '\\' except
that it throws away the current line instead of producing output
- for it. The effect of any `\=', `\+' or `\-' commands in that line
+ for it. The effect of any '\=', '\+' or '\-' commands in that line
remain in effect.
-`\poptabs'
- Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last `\pushtabs'.
+'\poptabs'
+ Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last '\pushtabs'.
-`\pushtabs'
- Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
- changing tab stop positions in the middle of a `tabbing'
+'\pushtabs'
+ Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily
+ changing tab stop positions in the middle of a 'tabbing'
environment.
-`\tabbingsep'
- Distance to left of tab stop moved by `\''.
+'\tabbingsep'
+ Distance to left of tab stop moved by '\''.
This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format:
@@ -1600,7 +1837,7 @@ environment.
end;\\
\end{tabbing}
-9.22 `table'
+9.22 'table'
============
Synopsis:
@@ -1616,18 +1853,18 @@ Synopsis:
usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables
will not be split between two pages.
- The optional argument `[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
+ The optional argument '[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
-a float; these are the same as that used with the `figure' environment,
+a float; these are the same as that used with the 'figure' environment,
and described there (*note figure::).
- The standard `report' and `article' classes use the default placement
-`[tbp]'.
+ The standard 'report' and 'article' classes use the default placement
+'[tbp]'.
The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
-etc., you wish. The `\caption' command allows you to title your table.
+etc., you wish. The '\caption' command allows you to title your table.
-9.23 `tabular'
+9.23 'tabular'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -1637,7 +1874,7 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{tabular}
- or
+or
\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
@@ -1647,110 +1884,114 @@ Synopsis:
These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
items, aligned vertically in columns.
- `\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except
-for the last, where it is optional--unless an `\hline' command (to put a
+ '\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except
+for the last, where it is optional--unless an '\hline' command (to put a
rule below the table) follows.
The mandatory and optional arguments consist of:
-`width'
- Specifies the width of the `tabular*' environment. There must be
+'width'
+ Specifies the width of the 'tabular*' environment. There must be
rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the
specified width.
-`pos'
+'pos'
Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre
of the environment.
- `t'
+ 't'
align on top row
- `b'
+ 'b'
align on bottom row
-`cols'
+'cols'
Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the
following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and
intercolumn material.
- `l'
+ 'l'
A column of left-aligned items.
- `r'
+ 'r'
A column of right-aligned items.
- `c'
+ 'c'
A column of centered items.
- `|'
+ '|'
A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
- `@{TEXT}'
+ '@{TEXT}'
This inserts TEXT in every row. An @-expression suppresses
the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any
- desired space between the inserted text and the adjacent items
- must be included in TEXT. An `\extracolsep{wd}' command in an
- @-expression causes an extra space of width `wd' to appear to
- the left of all subsequent columns, until countermanded by
- another `\extracolsep' command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn
- space, this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression.
- An `\extracolsep' command can be used only in an @-expression
- in the `cols' argument.
-
- `p{WD}'
+ desired space before the adjacent item must be included in
+ TEXT.
+
+ To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
+ given column, you have to load the 'array' package and use the
+ '>{...}' specifier.
+
+ An '\extracolsep{wd}' command in an @-expression causes an
+ extra space of width 'wd' to appear to the left of all
+ subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
+ '\extracolsep' command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space,
+ this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An
+ '\extracolsep' command can be used only in an @-expression in
+ the 'cols' argument.
+
+ 'p{WD}'
Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width
- WD, as if it were the argument of a `\parbox[t]{WD}' command.
- However, a `\\' may not appear in the item, except in the
+ WD, as if it were the argument of a '\parbox[t]{WD}' command.
+ However, a '\\' may not appear in the item, except in the
following situations:
- 1. inside an environment like `minipage', `array', or
- `tabular'.
-
- 2. inside an explicit `\parbox'.
-
- 3. in the scope of a `\centering', `\raggedright', or
- `\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must
+ 1. inside an environment like 'minipage', 'array', or
+ 'tabular'.
+ 2. inside an explicit '\parbox'.
+ 3. in the scope of a '\centering', '\raggedright', or
+ '\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must
appear inside braces or an environment when used in a
- `p'-column element.
+ 'p'-column element.
- `*{NUM}{COLS}'
+ '*{NUM}{COLS}'
Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive
integer and COLS is any list of column-specifiers, which may
- contain another `*-expression'.
+ contain another '*-expression'.
Parameters that control formatting:
-`\arrayrulewidth'
- Thickness of the rule created by `|', `\hline', and `\vline' in the
- `tabular' and `array' environments; the default is `.4pt'.
+'\arrayrulewidth'
+ Thickness of the rule created by '|', '\hline', and '\vline' in the
+ 'tabular' and 'array' environments; the default is '.4pt'.
-`\arraystretch'
- Scaling of spacing between rows in the `tabular' and `array'
- environments; default is `1', for no scaling.
+'\arraystretch'
+ Scaling of spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and 'array'
+ environments; default is '1', for no scaling.
-`\doublerulesep'
- Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by `||' in
- the `tabular' and `array' environments; default is `2pt'.
+'\doublerulesep'
+ Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by '||' in
+ the 'tabular' and 'array' environments; default is '2pt'.
-`\tabcolsep'
- Half the width of the space between columns; default is `6pt'.
+'\tabcolsep'
+ Half the width of the space between columns; default is '6pt'.
- These commands can be used inside a `tabular' environment:
+ The following commands can be used inside a 'tabular' environment:
-9.23.1 `\multicolumn'
+9.23.1 '\multicolumn'
---------------------
Synopsis:
\multicolumn{COLS}{POS}{TEXT}
- The `\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several columns.
+ The '\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several columns.
The first mandatory argument, COLS, specifies the number of columns to
span. The second mandatory argument, POS, specifies the formatting of
-the entry; `c' for centered, `l' for flushleft, `r' for flushright. The
+the entry; 'c' for centered, 'l' for flushleft, 'r' for flushright. The
third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to put in the entry.
Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash;
-`\multicolumn' is used for the heading:
+'\multicolumn' is used for the heading:
\begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
@@ -1759,32 +2000,32 @@ third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to put in the entry.
0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
\end{tabular}
-9.23.2 `\cline'
+9.23.2 '\cline'
---------------
Synopsis:
\cline{I-J}
- The `\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns
+ The '\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns
specified, beginning in column I and ending in column J, which are
specified in the mandatory argument.
-9.23.3 `\hline'
+9.23.3 '\hline'
---------------
-The `\hline' command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing
-`tabular' or `array' environment. It's most commonly used to draw a
+The '\hline' command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing
+'tabular' or 'array' environment. It's most commonly used to draw a
line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
-9.23.4 `\vline'
+9.23.4 '\vline'
---------------
-The `\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full height
-and depth of its row. An `\hfill' command can be used to move the line
+The '\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full height
+and depth of its row. An '\hfill' command can be used to move the line
to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression.
-9.24 `thebibliography'
+9.24 'thebibliography'
======================
Synopsis:
@@ -1794,39 +2035,39 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{thebibliography}
- The `thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or
+ The 'thebibliography' environment produces a bibliography or
reference list.
- In the `article' class, this reference list is labelled "References";
-in the `report' class, it is labelled "Bibliography". You can change
+ In the 'article' class, this reference list is labelled "References";
+in the 'report' class, it is labelled "Bibliography". You can change
the label (in the standard classes) by redefining the command
-`\refname'. For instance, this eliminates it entirely:
+'\refname'. For instance, this eliminates it entirely:
\renewcommand{\refname}{}
The mandatory WIDEST-LABEL argument is text that, when typeset, is as
-wide as the widest item label produced by the `\bibitem' commands. It
-is typically given as `9' for bibliographies with less than 10
-references, `99' for ones with less than 100, etc.
+wide as the widest item label produced by the '\bibitem' commands. It
+is typically given as '9' for bibliographies with less than 10
+references, '99' for ones with less than 100, etc.
-9.24.1 `\bibitem'
+9.24.1 '\bibitem'
-----------------
Synopsis:
\bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
- The `\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the
+ The '\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the
LABEL argument is missing, a number is automatically generated using the
-`enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is any sequence of letters, numbers, and
+'enumi' counter. The CITE_KEY is any sequence of letters, numbers, and
punctuation symbols not containing a comma.
- This command writes an entry to the `.aux' file containing the item's
-CITE_KEY and label. When the `.aux' file is read by the
-`\begin{document}' command, the item's `label' is associated with
-`cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a `\cite' command (see
+ This command writes an entry to the '.aux' file containing the item's
+CITE_KEY and label. When the '.aux' file is read by the
+'\begin{document}' command, the item's 'label' is associated with
+'cite_key', causing references to CITE_KEY with a '\cite' command (see
next section) to produce the associated label.
-9.24.2 `\cite'
+9.24.2 '\cite'
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1835,60 +2076,57 @@ Synopsis:
The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated
by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references
-associated with KEYS by entries in the `.aux' file.
+associated with KEYS by entries in the '.aux' file.
The text of the optional SUBCITE argument appears after the citation.
-For example, `\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce `[Knuth, p. 314]'.
+For example, '\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce '[Knuth, p. 314]'.
-9.24.3 `\nocite'
+9.24.3 '\nocite'
----------------
-`\nocite{key_list}'
+'\nocite{key_list}'
- The `\nocite' command produces no text, but writes `key_list', which
-is a list of one or more citation keys, on the `.aux' file.
+ The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes 'key_list', which
+is a list of one or more citation keys, on the '.aux' file.
9.24.4 Using BibTeX
-------------------
If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if
you need a bibliography of more than a couple of titles) to maintain
-your bibliography, you don't use the `thebibliography' environment
-(*note thebibliography::). Instead, you include the lines
+your bibliography, you don't use the 'thebibliography' environment
+(*note thebibliography::). Instead, you include the lines
\bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE}
\bibliography{BIBFILE1,BIBFILE2}
- The `\bibliographystyle' command does not produce any output of its
+ The '\bibliographystyle' command does not produce any output of its
own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will be
-produced: BIBSTYLE refers to a file BIBSTYLE`.bst', which defines how
+produced: BIBSTYLE refers to a file BIBSTYLE'.bst', which defines how
your citations will look. The standard STYLE names distributed with
BibTeX are:
-`alpha'
- Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and
+'alpha'
+ Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and
year of publication.
-
-`plain'
- Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
-
-`unsrt'
- Like `plain', but entries are in order of citation.
-
-`abbrv'
- Like `plain', but more compact labels.
+'plain'
+ Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+'unsrt'
+ Like 'plain', but entries are in order of citation.
+'abbrv'
+ Like 'plain', but more compact labels.
In addition, numerous other BibTeX style files exist tailored to the
demands of various publications. See
-`http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib'.
+'http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib'.
- The `\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
-bibliography. The argument to `\bibliography' refers to files named
-`BIBFILE.bib', which should contain your database in BibTeX format.
-Only the entries referred to via `\cite' and `\nocite' will be listed in
+ The '\bibliography' command is what actually produces the
+bibliography. The argument to '\bibliography' refers to files named
+'BIBFILE.bib', which should contain your database in BibTeX format.
+Only the entries referred to via '\cite' and '\nocite' will be listed in
the bibliography.
-9.25 `theorem'
+9.25 'theorem'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -1897,11 +2135,11 @@ Synopsis:
THEOREM-TEXT
\end{theorem}
- The `theorem' environment produces "Theorem N" in boldface followed
+ The 'theorem' environment produces "Theorem N" in boldface followed
by THEOREM-TEXT, where the numbering possibilities for N are described
-under `\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::).
+under '\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::).
-9.26 `titlepage'
+9.26 'titlepage'
================
Synopsis:
@@ -1910,15 +2148,15 @@ Synopsis:
TEXT
\end{titlepage}
- The `titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with
+ The 'titlepage' environment creates a title page, i.e., a page with
no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following page to
be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to you. The
-`\today' command may be useful on title pages (*note \today::).
+'\today' command may be useful on title pages (*note \today::).
- You can use the `\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce
-a standard title page without a `titlepage' environment.
+ You can use the '\maketitle' command (*note \maketitle::) to produce
+a standard title page without a 'titlepage' environment.
-9.27 `verbatim'
+9.27 'verbatim'
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -1927,15 +2165,15 @@ Synopsis:
LITERAL-TEXT
\end{verbatim}
- The `verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in which
-LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the `\' character
-produces a printed `\'. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage
+ The 'verbatim' environment is a paragraph-making environment in which
+LaTeX produces exactly what you type in; for instance the '\' character
+produces a printed '\'. It turns LaTeX into a typewriter with carriage
returns and blanks having the same effect that they would on a
typewriter.
- The `verbatim' uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (`\tt').
+ The 'verbatim' uses a monospaced typewriter-like font ('\tt').
-9.27.1 `\verb'
+9.27.1 '\verb'
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -1943,16 +2181,16 @@ Synopsis:
\verbCHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR
\verb*CHARLITERAL-TEXTCHAR
- The `\verb' command typesets LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including
-special characters and spaces, using the typewriter (`\tt') font. No
-spaces are allowed between `\verb' or `\verb*' and the delimiter CHAR,
+ The '\verb' command typesets LITERAL-TEXT as it is input, including
+special characters and spaces, using the typewriter ('\tt') font. No
+spaces are allowed between '\verb' or '\verb*' and the delimiter CHAR,
which begins and ends the verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear
in LITERAL-TEXT.
- The `*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible
+ The '*'-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a "visible
space" character.
-9.28 `verse'
+9.28 'verse'
============
Synopsis:
@@ -1963,12 +2201,12 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{verse}
- The `verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
+ The 'verse' environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
other uses for it.
The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are
not indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each
-stanza with `\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the
+stanza with '\\', and use one or more blank lines to separate the
stanzas.
10 Line breaking
@@ -1980,82 +2218,82 @@ printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these
lines must be broken into pages).
LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some
-environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the `\\' command,
+environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the '\\' command,
and you can always manually force breaks.
-10.1 `\\'[*][MORESPACE]
+10.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE]
=======================
-The `\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional
+The '\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional
argument, MORESPACE, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to
be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount.
- The `\\*' command is the same as the ordinary `\\' command except
+ The '\\*' command is the same as the ordinary '\\' command except
that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
-10.2 `\obeycr' & `\restorecr'
+10.2 '\obeycr' & '\restorecr'
=============================
-The `\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file (`^^M',
-internally) the same as `\\' (followed by `\relax'). So each new line
+The '\obeycr' command makes a return in the input file ('^^M',
+internally) the same as '\\' (followed by '\relax'). So each new line
in the input will also be a new line in the output.
- `\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior.
+ '\restorecr' restores normal line-breaking behavior.
-10.3 `\newline'
+10.3 '\newline'
===============
-The `\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no
+The '\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no
stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph
mode.
-10.4 `\-' (discretionary hyphen)
+10.4 '\-' (discretionary hyphen)
================================
-The `\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
+The '\-' command tells LaTeX that it may hyphenate the word at that
point. LaTeX is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually find most
of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an incorrect
-one. The `\-' command is used for the exceptional cases.
+one. The '\-' command is used for the exceptional cases.
- When you insert `\-' commands in a word, the word will only be
+ When you insert '\-' commands in a word, the word will only be
hyphenated at those points and not at any of the hyphenation points that
LaTeX might otherwise have chosen.
-10.5 `\fussy'
+10.5 '\fussy'
=============
-The declaration `\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about
+The declaration '\fussy' (which is the default) makes TeX picky about
line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between words, at the
cost of an occasional overfull box.
- This command cancels the effect of a previous `\sloppy' command
+ This command cancels the effect of a previous '\sloppy' command
(*note \sloppy::.
-10.6 `\sloppy'
+10.6 '\sloppy'
==============
-The declaration `\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking. This
-will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing.
+The declaration '\sloppy' makes TeX less fussy about line breaking.
+This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose interword spacing.
- Lasts until a `\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::).
+ Lasts until a '\fussy' command is issued (*note \fussy::).
-10.7 `\hyphenation'
+10.7 '\hyphenation'
===================
Synopsis:
\hyphenation{WORD-ONE WORD-TWO}
- The `\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with a
-`-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces.
+ The '\hyphenation' command declares allowed hyphenation points with a
+'-' character in the given words. The words are separated by spaces.
TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no inflections are
-tried. Multiple `\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples (the
+tried. Multiple '\hyphenation' commands accumulate. Some examples (the
default TeX hyphenation patterns misses the hyphenations in these
words):
\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
-10.8 `\linebreak' & `\nolinebreak'
+10.8 '\linebreak' & '\nolinebreak'
==================================
Synopses:
@@ -2063,8 +2301,8 @@ Synopses:
\linebreak[PRIORITY]
\nolinebreak[PRIORITY]
- By default, the `\linebreak' (`\nolinebreak') command forces
-(prevents) a line break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the
+ By default, the '\linebreak' ('\nolinebreak') command forces
+(prevents) a line break at the current position. For '\linebreak', the
spaces in the line are stretched out so that it extends to the right
margin as usual.
@@ -2079,42 +2317,42 @@ LaTeX starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has
accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically, but
sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.
-11.1 `\cleardoublepage'
+11.1 '\cleardoublepage'
=======================
-The `\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all
+The '\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all
figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.
-11.2 `\clearpage'
+11.2 '\clearpage'
=================
-The `\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures
+The '\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures
and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-11.3 `\newpage'
+11.3 '\newpage'
===============
-The `\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats
-(see `\clearpage' above).
+The '\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats
+(see '\clearpage' above).
-11.4 `\enlargethispage'
+11.4 '\enlargethispage'
=======================
-`\enlargethispage{size}'
+'\enlargethispage{size}'
- `\enlargethispage*{size}'
+ '\enlargethispage*{size}'
- Enlarge the `\textheight' for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g. `\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one additional
-line.
+ Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page by the specified
+amount; e.g. '\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one
+additional line.
The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page
-as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
-`\pagebreak'.
+as much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
+'\pagebreak'.
-11.5 `\pagebreak' & `\nopagebreak'
+11.5 '\pagebreak' & '\nopagebreak'
==================================
Synopses:
@@ -2122,12 +2360,12 @@ Synopses:
\pagebreak[PRIORITY]
\nopagebreak[PRIORITY]
- By default, the `\pagebreak' (`\nopagebreak') command forces
-(prevents) a page break at the current position. For `\linebreak', the
+ By default, the '\pagebreak' ('\nopagebreak') command forces
+(prevents) a page break at the current position. With '\pagebreak', the
vertical space on the page is stretched out where possible so that it
extends to the normal bottom margin.
- With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the `\pagebreak'
+ With the optional argument PRIORITY, you can convert the '\pagebreak'
command from a demand to a request. The number must be a number from 0
to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
@@ -2135,49 +2373,49 @@ to 4. The higher the number, the more insistent the request is.
************
Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with
-one command, the `\footnote' command. They can also be produced with
-two commands, the `\footnotemark' and the `\footnotetext' commands.
+one command, the '\footnote' command. They can also be produced with
+two commands, the '\footnotemark' and the '\footnotetext' commands.
-12.1 `\footnote'
+12.1 '\footnote'
================
Synopsis:
\footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT}
- The `\footnote' command places the numbered footnote TEXT at the
+ The '\footnote' command places the numbered footnote TEXT at the
bottom of the current page. The optional argument NUMBER changes the
default footnote number.
This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you
-cannot use it in sectioning commands like `\chapter', in figures, tables
-or in a `tabular' environment. (See following sections.)
+cannot use it in sectioning commands like '\chapter', in figures, tables
+or in a 'tabular' environment. (See following sections.)
-12.2 `\footnotemark'
+12.2 '\footnotemark'
====================
-With no optional argument, the `\footnotemark' command puts the current
+With no optional argument, the '\footnotemark' command puts the current
footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner
paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, with the
-`\footnotetext' command.
+'\footnotetext' command.
This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote
markers referring to the same footnote with
\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
-after the first `\footnote' command.
+after the first '\footnote' command.
-12.3 `\footnotetext'
+12.3 '\footnotetext'
====================
Synopsis:
\footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT}
- The `\footnotetext' command places TEXT at the bottom of the page as
-a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the `\footnotemark'
-command. The `\footnotetext' command must appear in outer paragraph
+ The '\footnotetext' command places TEXT at the bottom of the page as
+a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the '\footnotemark'
+command. The '\footnotetext' command must appear in outer paragraph
mode.
The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number.
@@ -2186,40 +2424,40 @@ mode.
=======================
If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing
-numbers, redefine `\thefootnote' like this:
+numbers, redefine '\thefootnote' like this:
\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
- The `\fnsymbol' command produces a predefined series of symbols
+ The '\fnsymbol' command produces a predefined series of symbols
(*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::). If you want to
use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also
-redefine `\@fnsymbol'.
+redefine '\@fnsymbol'.
12.5 Footnote parameters
========================
-`\footnoterule'
+'\footnoterule'
Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the
- page's footnotes. Default dimensions: `0.4pt' thick (or wide), and
- `0.4\columnwidth' long in the standard document classes (except
+ page's footnotes. Default dimensions: '0.4pt' thick (or wide), and
+ '0.4\columnwidth' long in the standard document classes (except
slides, where it does not appear).
-`\footnotesep'
+'\footnotesep'
The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote.
- By default, this is set to the normal strut for `\footnotesize'
+ By default, this is set to the normal strut for '\footnotesize'
fonts (*note Font sizes::), therefore there is no extra space
- between footnotes. This is `6.65pt' for `10pt', `7.7pt' for
- `11pt', and `8.4pt' for `12pt'.
+ between footnotes. This is '6.65pt' for '10pt', '7.7pt' for
+ '11pt', and '8.4pt' for '12pt'.
13 Definitions
**************
LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
-13.1 `\newcommand' & `\renewcommand'
+13.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
====================================
-`\newcommand' and `\renewcommand' define and redefine a command,
+'\newcommand' and '\renewcommand' define and redefine a command,
respectively. Synopses:
\newcommand{CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
@@ -2228,9 +2466,9 @@ respectively. Synopses:
\renewcommand{CMD}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{DEFN}
CMD
- The command name beginning with `\'. For `\newcommand', it must
- not be already defined and must not begin with `\end'; for
- `\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
+ The command name beginning with '\'. For '\newcommand', it must
+ not be already defined and must not begin with '\end'; for
+ '\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
NARGS
An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments
@@ -2241,53 +2479,53 @@ DEFAULT
If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's
first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the
default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not
- specified in the call) is the string `def'.
+ specified in the call) is the string 'def'.
DEFN
- The text to be substituted for every occurrence of `cmd'; a
- construct of the form `#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the
+ The text to be substituted for every occurrence of 'cmd'; a
+ construct of the form '#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the
Nth argument.
-13.2 `\newcounter'
+13.2 '\newcounter'
==================
Synopsis:
\newcounter{CNT}[COUNTERNAME]
- The `\newcounter' command defines a new counter named CNT. The new
+ The '\newcounter' command defines a new counter named CNT. The new
counter is initialized to zero.
- Given the optional argument `[COUNTERNAME]', CNT will be reset
+ Given the optional argument '[COUNTERNAME]', CNT will be reset
whenever COUNTERNAME is incremented.
*Note Counters::, for more information about counters.
-13.3 `\newlength'
+13.3 '\newlength'
=================
Synopsis:
\newlength{\ARG}
- The `\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a `length'
-command with a value of `0in'. The argument must be a control sequence,
-as in `\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if `\foo' is already defined.
+ The '\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a 'length'
+command with a value of '0in'. The argument must be a control sequence,
+as in '\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if '\foo' is already defined.
*Note Lengths::, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value,
and for more information about lengths in general.
-13.4 `\newsavebox'
+13.4 '\newsavebox'
==================
Synopsis:
\newsavebox{CMD}
- Defines `\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to
+ Defines '\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to
refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
-13.5 `\newenvironment' & `\renewenvironment'
+13.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
============================================
Synopses:
@@ -2297,12 +2535,12 @@ Synopses:
\renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is,
-`\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'.
+'\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'.
ENV
- The name of the environment. For `\newenvironment', ENV must not
- be an existing environment, and the command `\ENV' must be
- undefined. For `\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an
+ The name of the environment. For '\newenvironment', ENV must not
+ be an existing environment, and the command '\ENV' must be
+ undefined. For '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an
existing environment.
NARGS
@@ -2314,15 +2552,15 @@ DEFAULT
gives the default value for that argument.
BEGDEF
- The text expanded at every occurrence of `\begin{ENV}'; a construct
- of the form `#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the Nth
+ The text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'; a construct
+ of the form '#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the Nth
argument.
ENDDEF
- The text expanded at every occurrence of `\end{ENV}'. It may not
+ The text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'. It may not
contain any argument parameters.
-13.6 `\newtheorem'
+13.6 '\newtheorem'
==================
\newtheorem{NEWENV}{LABEL}[WITHIN]
@@ -2336,7 +2574,7 @@ NEWENV
LABEL
The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
- number. For example, `Theorem'.
+ number. For example, 'Theorem'.
NUMBERED_LIKE
(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like
@@ -2350,47 +2588,47 @@ WITHIN
At most one of NUMBERED_LIKE and WITHIN can be specified, not both.
-13.7 `\newfont'
+13.7 '\newfont'
===============
Synopsis:
\newfont{CMD}{FONTNAME}
- Defines a control sequence `\CMD', which must not already be defined,
+ Defines a control sequence '\CMD', which must not already be defined,
to make FONTNAME be the current font. The file looked for on the system
-is named `FONTNAME.tfm'.
+is named 'FONTNAME.tfm'.
This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font.
-More commonly, fonts are defined in families through `.fd' files.
+More commonly, fonts are defined in families through '.fd' files.
-13.8 `\protect'
+13.8 '\protect'
===============
Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and
many more are so-called "fragile" commands. When a fragile command is
used in certain contexts, called "moving arguments", it must be preceded
-by `\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments
-must have their own `\protect'.
+by '\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments
+must have their own '\protect'.
- Some examples of moving arguments are `\caption' (*note figure::),
-`\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in `tabular' and `array'
+ Some examples of moving arguments are '\caption' (*note figure::),
+'\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in 'tabular' and 'array'
environments (*note tabular::).
Commands which are not fragile are called "robust". They must not be
-preceded by `\protect'.
+preceded by '\protect'.
See also:
-`http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html'
-`http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect'
+'http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html'
+'http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect'
14 Counters
***********
-Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
+Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or
-command that produces the number, except with no `\'. (`enumi'-`enumiv'
+command that produces the number, except with no '\'. ('enumi'-'enumiv'
are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the
counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
@@ -2400,193 +2638,193 @@ counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
subsubsection
-14.1 `\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
+14.1 '\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol': Printing counters
=====================================================================
All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
-instance, `\alph{enumi}'.
+instance, '\alph{enumi}'.
-`\alph'
- prints COUNTER using lowercase letters: `a', `b', ...
+'\alph'
+ prints COUNTER using lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ...
-`\Alph'
- uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', ...
+'\Alph'
+ uses uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ...
-`\arabic'
- uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', ...
+'\arabic'
+ uses Arabic numbers: '1', '2', ...
-`\roman'
- uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', ...
+'\roman'
+ uses lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ...
-`\roman'
- uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', ...
+'\roman'
+ uses uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ...
-`\fnsymbol'
+'\fnsymbol'
prints the value of COUNTER in a specific sequence of nine symbols
(conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of COUNTER
must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.
The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the
names:
-
asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel
double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
-14.2 `\usecounter{COUNTER}'
+14.2 '\usecounter{COUNTER}'
===========================
Synopsis:
\usecounter{COUNTER}
- The `\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the
-`list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list
+ The '\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the
+'list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list
items.
-14.3 `\value{COUNTER}'
+14.3 '\value{COUNTER}'
======================
Synopsis:
\value{COUNTER}
- The `\value' command produces the value of COUNTER. It can be used
+ The '\value' command produces the value of COUNTER. It can be used
anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example:
\setcounter{myctr}{3}
\addtocounter{myctr}{1}
\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
-14.4 `\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
+14.4 '\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
==================================
Synopsis:
\setcounter{\COUNTER}{VALUE}
- The `\setcounter' command sets the value of \COUNTER to the VALUE
+ The '\setcounter' command sets the value of \COUNTER to the VALUE
argument.
-14.5 `\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
+14.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
====================================
-The `\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified
+The '\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified
by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.
-14.6 `\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'
+14.6 '\refstepcounter{COUNTER}'
===============================
-The `\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as `\stepcounter'
-*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current `\ref' value to
-be the result of `\thecounter'.
+The '\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as '\stepcounter'
+*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current '\ref' value to
+be the result of '\thecounter'.
-14.7 `\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
+14.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
============================
-The `\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all subsidiary
+The '\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all subsidiary
counters.
-14.8 `\day \month \year': Predefined counters
+14.8 '\day \month \year': Predefined counters
=============================================
-LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month (`\day', 1-31), month of
-the year (`\month', 1-12), and year (`\year', Common Era). When TeX
+LaTeX defines counters for the day of the month ('\day', 1-31), month of
+the year ('\month', 1-12), and year ('\year', Common Era). When TeX
starts up, they are set to the current values on the system where TeX is
running. They are not updated as the job progresses.
- The related command `\today' produces a string representing the
+ The related command '\today' produces a string representing the
current day (*note \today::).
15 Lengths
**********
-A `length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
+A 'length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
as an argument.
-15.1 `\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
+15.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
==============================
-The `\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can
-be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches (`in'),
-millimeters (`mm'), points (`pt'), big points (`bp', etc.
+The '\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can
+be expressed in any units that LaTeX understands, i.e., inches ('in'),
+millimeters ('mm'), points ('pt'), big points ('bp', etc.
15.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
===============================
-The `\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the
+The '\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the
amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.
-15.3 `\settodepth'
+15.3 '\settodepth'
==================
-`\settodepth{\gnat}{text}'
+'\settodepth{\gnat}{text}'
- The `\settodepth' command sets the value of a `length' command equal
-to the depth of the `text' argument.
+ The '\settodepth' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal
+to the depth of the 'text' argument.
-15.4 `\settoheight'
+15.4 '\settoheight'
===================
-`\settoheight{\gnat}{text}'
+'\settoheight{\gnat}{text}'
- The `\settoheight' command sets the value of a `length' command equal
-to the height of the `text' argument.
+ The '\settoheight' command sets the value of a 'length' command equal
+to the height of the 'text' argument.
-15.5 `\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
+15.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
==============================
-The `\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the
+The '\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the
width of the TEXT argument.
15.6 Predefined lengths
=======================
-`\width'
+'\width'
- `\height'
+ '\height'
- `\depth'
+ '\depth'
- `\totalheight'
+ '\totalheight'
These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the
-box-making commands (*note Boxes::). They specify the natural width etc.
-of the text in the box. `\totalheight' equals `\height' + `\depth'. To
-make a box with the text stretched to double the natural size, e.g., say
+box-making commands (*note Boxes::). They specify the natural width,
+etc., of the text in the box. '\totalheight' equals '\height' +
+'\depth'. To make a box with the text stretched to double the natural
+size, e.g., say
- `\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}'
+ '\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}'
16 Making paragraphs
********************
A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines--lines not
-containing even a `%'. A blank line should not appear where a new
+containing even a '%'. A blank line should not appear where a new
paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
a sectioning command.
-16.1 `\indent'
+16.1 '\indent'
==============
-`\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of
-the `\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used
+'\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of
+the '\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used
to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
- The default value for `\parindent' is `1em' in two-column mode,
-otherwise `15pt' for `10pt' documents, `17pt' for `11pt', and `1.5em'
-for `12pt'.
+ The default value for '\parindent' is '1em' in two-column mode,
+otherwise '15pt' for '10pt' documents, '17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em'
+for '12pt'.
-16.2 `\noindent'
+16.2 '\noindent'
================
-When used at the beginning of the paragraph, `\noindent' suppresses any
+When used at the beginning of the paragraph, '\noindent' suppresses any
paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a
paragraph.
-16.3 `\parskip'
+16.3 '\parskip'
===============
-`\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before
-each paragraph. The default is `0pt plus1pt'.
+'\parskip' is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added before
+each paragraph. The default is '0pt plus1pt'.
16.4 Marginal notes
===================
@@ -2595,44 +2833,42 @@ Synopsis:
\marginpar[LEFT]{RIGHT}
- The `\marginpar' command creates a note in the margin. The first
+ The '\marginpar' command creates a note in the margin. The first
line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text
-where the `\marginpar' occurs.
+where the '\marginpar' occurs.
When you only specify the mandatory argument RIGHT, the text will be
placed
* in the right margin for one-sided layout;
-
* in the outside margin for two-sided layout;
-
* in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
- The command `\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in
-the opposite (inside) margin. `\normalmarginpar' places them in the
+ The command '\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in
+the opposite (inside) margin. '\normalmarginpar' places them in the
default position.
When you specify both arguments, LEFT is used for the left margin,
and RIGHT is used for the right margin.
The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
-hyphenation there by beginning the node with `\hspace{0pt}'.
+hyphenation there by beginning the node with '\hspace{0pt}'.
These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
-`\marginparpush'
- Minimum vertical space between notes; default `7pt' for `12pt'
- documents, `5pt' else.
+'\marginparpush'
+ Minimum vertical space between notes; default '7pt' for '12pt'
+ documents, '5pt' else.
-`\marginparsep'
- Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default `11pt'
- for `10pt' documents, `10pt' else.
+'\marginparsep'
+ Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default '11pt'
+ for '10pt' documents, '10pt' else.
-`\marginparwidth'
- Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided `10pt' document
- is `90pt', `83pt' for `11pt', and `68pt' for `12pt'; `17pt' more in
+'\marginparwidth'
+ Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided '10pt' document
+ is '90pt', '83pt' for '11pt', and '68pt' for '12pt'; '17pt' more in
each case for a two-sided document. In two column mode, the
- default is `48pt'.
+ default is '48pt'.
The standard LaTeX routine for marginal notes does not prevent notes
from falling off the bottom of the page.
@@ -2642,36 +2878,34 @@ from falling off the bottom of the page.
There are three environments that put LaTeX in math mode:
-`math'
+'math'
For formulas that appear right in the text.
-
-`displaymath'
+'displaymath'
For formulas that appear on their own line.
-
-`equation'
+'equation'
The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an
equation number in the right margin.
- The `math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but
-the `displaymath' and `equation' environments can be used only in
-paragraph mode. The `math' and `displaymath' environments are used so
+ The 'math' environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode, but
+the 'displaymath' and 'equation' environments can be used only in
+paragraph mode. The 'math' and 'displaymath' environments are used so
often that they have the following short forms:
\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
- In fact, the `math' environment is so common that it has an even
+ In fact, the 'math' environment is so common that it has an even
shorter form:
$ ... $ instead of \(...\)
- The `\boldmath' command changes math letters and symbols to be in a
+ The '\boldmath' command changes math letters and symbols to be in a
bold font. It is used _outside_ of math mode. Conversely, the
-`\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too
+'\unboldmath' command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font; it too
is used _outside_ of math mode.
- The `\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the
-formula to be that of `displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below
+ The '\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the
+formula to be that of 'displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below
summations. For example
$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
@@ -2679,7 +2913,7 @@ summations. For example
==============================
To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type
-`_{'exp`}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type `^{'exp`}'.
+'_{'exp'}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type '^{'exp'}'.
LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the
natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a
subscript and a superscript.
@@ -2687,637 +2921,637 @@ subscript and a superscript.
17.2 Math symbols
=================
-LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need. The
-commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For
-example, if you include `$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi
+LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need.
+The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For
+example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi
symbol (\pi) in your output.
-`\|'
+'\|'
\|
-`\aleph'
+'\aleph'
\aleph
-`\alpha'
+'\alpha'
\alpha
-`\amalg'
+'\amalg'
\amalg (binary operation)
-`\angle'
+'\angle'
\angle
-`\approx'
+'\approx'
\approx (relation)
-`\ast'
+'\ast'
\ast (binary operation)
-`\asymp'
+'\asymp'
\asymp (relation)
-`\backslash'
+'\backslash'
\ (delimiter)
-`\beta'
+'\beta'
\beta
-`\bigcap'
+'\bigcap'
\bigcap
-`\bigcirc'
+'\bigcirc'
\bigcirc (binary operation)
-`\bigcup'
+'\bigcup'
\bigcup
-`\bigodot'
+'\bigodot'
\bigodot
-`\bigoplus'
+'\bigoplus'
\bigoplus
-`\bigotimes'
+'\bigotimes'
\bigotimes
-`\bigtriangledown'
+'\bigtriangledown'
\bigtriangledown (binary operation)
-`\bigtriangleup'
+'\bigtriangleup'
\bigtriangleup (binary operation)
-`\bigsqcup'
+'\bigsqcup'
\bigsqcup
-`\biguplus'
+'\biguplus'
\biguplus
-`\bigcap'
+'\bigcap'
\bigvee
-`\bigwedge'
+'\bigwedge'
\bigwedge
-`\bot'
+'\bot'
\bot
-`\bowtie'
+'\bowtie'
\bowtie (relation)
-`\Box'
+'\Box'
(square open box symbol)
-`\bullet'
+'\bullet'
\bullet (binary operation)
-`\cap'
+'\cap'
\cap (binary operation)
-`\cdot'
+'\cdot'
\cdot (binary operation)
-`\chi'
+'\chi'
\chi
-`\circ'
+'\circ'
\circ (binary operation)
-`\clubsuit'
+'\clubsuit'
\clubsuit
-`\cong'
+'\cong'
\cong (relation)
-`\coprod'
+'\coprod'
\coprod
-`\cup'
+'\cup'
\cup (binary operation)
-`\dagger'
+'\dagger'
\dagger (binary operation)
-`\dashv'
+'\dashv'
\dashv (relation)
-`\ddagger'
+'\ddagger'
\dagger (binary operation)
-`\Delta'
+'\Delta'
\Delta
-`\delta'
+'\delta'
\delta
-`\Diamond'
+'\Diamond'
bigger \diamond
-`\diamond'
+'\diamond'
\diamond (binary operation)
-`\diamondsuit'
+'\diamondsuit'
\diamondsuit
-`\div'
+'\div'
\div (binary operation)
-`\doteq'
+'\doteq'
\doteq (relation)
-`\downarrow'
+'\downarrow'
\downarrow (delimiter)
-`\Downarrow'
+'\Downarrow'
\Downarrow (delimiter)
-`\ell'
+'\ell'
\ell
-`\emptyset'
+'\emptyset'
\emptyset
-`\epsilon'
+'\epsilon'
\epsilon
-`\equiv'
+'\equiv'
\equiv (relation)
-`\eta'
+'\eta'
\eta
-`\exists'
+'\exists'
\exists
-`\flat'
+'\flat'
\flat
-`\forall'
+'\forall'
\forall
-`\frown'
+'\frown'
\frown (relation)
-`\Gamma'
+'\Gamma'
\Gamma
-`\gamma'
+'\gamma'
\gamma
-`\ge'
+'\ge'
\ge
-`\geq'
+'\geq'
\geq (relation)
-`\gets'
+'\gets'
\gets
-`\gg'
+'\gg'
\gg (relation)
-`\hbar'
+'\hbar'
\hbar
-`\heartsuit'
+'\heartsuit'
\heartsuit
-`\hookleftarrow'
+'\hookleftarrow'
\hookleftarrow
-`\hookrightarrow'
+'\hookrightarrow'
\hookrightarrow
-`\iff'
+'\iff'
\iff
-`\Im'
+'\Im'
\Im
-`\in'
+'\in'
\in (relation)
-`\infty'
+'\infty'
\infty
-`\int'
+'\int'
\int
-`\iota'
+'\iota'
\iota
-`\Join'
+'\Join'
condensed bowtie symbol (relation)
-`\kappa'
+'\kappa'
\kappa
-`\Lambda'
+'\Lambda'
\Lambda
-`\lambda'
+'\lambda'
\lambda
-`\land'
+'\land'
\land
-`\langle'
+'\langle'
\langle (delimiter)
-`\lbrace'
+'\lbrace'
\lbrace (delimiter)
-`\lbrack'
+'\lbrack'
\lbrack (delimiter)
-`\lceil'
+'\lceil'
\lceil (delimiter)
-`\le'
+'\le'
\le
-`\leadsto'
+'\leadsto'
-`\Leftarrow'
+'\Leftarrow'
\Leftarrow
-`\leftarrow'
+'\leftarrow'
\leftarrow
-`\leftharpoondown'
+'\leftharpoondown'
\leftharpoondown
-`\leftharpoonup'
+'\leftharpoonup'
\leftharpoonup
-`\Leftrightarrow'
+'\Leftrightarrow'
\Leftrightarrow
-`\leftrightarrow'
+'\leftrightarrow'
\leftrightarrow
-`\leq'
+'\leq'
\leq (relation)
-`\lfloor'
+'\lfloor'
\lfloor (delimiter)
-`\lhd'
+'\lhd'
(left-pointing arrow head)
-`\ll'
+'\ll'
\ll (relation)
-`\lnot'
+'\lnot'
\lnot
-`\longleftarrow'
+'\longleftarrow'
\longleftarrow
-`\longleftrightarrow'
+'\longleftrightarrow'
\longleftrightarrow
-`\longmapsto'
+'\longmapsto'
\longmapsto
-`\longrightarrow'
+'\longrightarrow'
\longrightarrow
-`\lor'
+'\lor'
\lor
-`\mapsto'
+'\mapsto'
\mapsto
-`\mho'
+'\mho'
-`\mid'
+'\mid'
\mid (relation)
-`\models'
+'\models'
\models (relation)
-`\mp'
+'\mp'
\mp (binary operation)
-`\mu'
+'\mu'
\mu
-`\nabla'
+'\nabla'
\nabla
-`\natural'
+'\natural'
\natural
-`\ne'
+'\ne'
\ne
-`\nearrow'
+'\nearrow'
\nearrow
-`\neg'
+'\neg'
\neg
-`\neq'
+'\neq'
\neq (relation)
-`\ni'
+'\ni'
\ni (relation)
-`\not'
+'\not'
Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=.
-`\notin'
+'\notin'
\ni
-`\nu'
+'\nu'
\nu
-`\nwarrow'
+'\nwarrow'
\nwarrow
-`\odot'
+'\odot'
\odot (binary operation)
-`\oint'
+'\oint'
\oint
-`\Omega'
+'\Omega'
\Omega
-`\omega'
+'\omega'
\omega
-`\ominus'
+'\ominus'
\ominus (binary operation)
-`\oplus'
+'\oplus'
\oplus (binary operation)
-`\oslash'
+'\oslash'
\oslash (binary operation)
-`\otimes'
+'\otimes'
\otimes (binary operation)
-`\owns'
+'\owns'
\owns
-`\parallel'
+'\parallel'
\parallel (relation)
-`\partial'
+'\partial'
\partial
-`\perp'
+'\perp'
\perp (relation)
-`\phi'
+'\phi'
\phi
-`\Pi'
+'\Pi'
\Pi
-`\pi'
+'\pi'
\pi
-`\pm'
+'\pm'
\pm (binary operation)
-`\prec'
+'\prec'
\prec (relation)
-`\preceq'
+'\preceq'
\preceq (relation)
-`\prime'
+'\prime'
\prime
-`\prod'
+'\prod'
\prod
-`\propto'
+'\propto'
\propto (relation)
-`\Psi'
+'\Psi'
\Psi
-`\psi'
+'\psi'
\psi
-`\rangle'
+'\rangle'
\rangle (delimiter)
-`\rbrace'
+'\rbrace'
\rbrace (delimiter)
-`\rbrack'
+'\rbrack'
\rbrack (delimiter)
-`\rceil'
+'\rceil'
\rceil (delimiter)
-`\Re'
+'\Re'
\Re
-`\rfloor'
+'\rfloor'
\rfloor
-`\rhd'
+'\rhd'
(binary operation)
-`\rho'
+'\rho'
\rho
-`\Rightarrow'
+'\Rightarrow'
\Rightarrow
-`\rightarrow'
+'\rightarrow'
\rightarrow
-`\rightharpoondown'
+'\rightharpoondown'
\rightharpoondown
-`\rightharpoonup'
+'\rightharpoonup'
\rightharpoonup
-`\rightleftharpoons'
+'\rightleftharpoons'
\rightleftharpoons
-`\searrow'
+'\searrow'
\searrow
-`\setminus'
+'\setminus'
\setminus (binary operation)
-`\sharp'
+'\sharp'
\sharp
-`\Sigma'
+'\Sigma'
\Sigma
-`\sigma'
+'\sigma'
\sigma
-`\sim'
+'\sim'
\sim (relation)
-`\simeq'
+'\simeq'
\simeq (relation)
-`\smallint'
+'\smallint'
\smallint
-`\smile'
+'\smile'
\smile (relation)
-`\spadesuit'
+'\spadesuit'
\spadesuit
-`\sqcap'
+'\sqcap'
\sqcap (binary operation)
-`\sqcup'
+'\sqcup'
\sqcup (binary operation)
-`\sqsubset'
+'\sqsubset'
(relation)
-`\sqsubseteq'
+'\sqsubseteq'
\sqsubseteq (relation)
-`\sqsupset'
+'\sqsupset'
(relation)
-`\sqsupseteq'
+'\sqsupseteq'
\sqsupseteq (relation)
-`\star'
+'\star'
\star (binary operation)
-`\subset'
+'\subset'
\subset (relation)
-`\subseteq'
+'\subseteq'
\subseteq (relation)
-`\succ'
+'\succ'
\succ (relation)
-`\succeq'
+'\succeq'
\succeq (relation)
-`\sum'
+'\sum'
\sum
-`\supset'
+'\supset'
\supset (relation)
-`\supseteq'
+'\supseteq'
\supseteq (relation)
-`\surd'
+'\surd'
\surd
-`\swarrow'
+'\swarrow'
\swarrow
-`\tau'
+'\tau'
\tau
-`\theta'
+'\theta'
\theta
-`\times'
+'\times'
\times (binary operation)
-`\to'
+'\to'
\to
-`\top'
+'\top'
\top
-`\triangle'
+'\triangle'
\triangle
-`\triangleleft'
+'\triangleleft'
\triangleleft (binary operation)
-`\triangleright'
+'\triangleright'
\triangleright (binary operation)
-`\unlhd'
+'\unlhd'
left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
-`\unrhd'
+'\unrhd'
right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
-`\Uparrow'
+'\Uparrow'
\Uparrow (delimiter)
-`\uparrow'
+'\uparrow'
\uparrow (delimiter)
-`\Updownarrow'
+'\Updownarrow'
\Updownarrow (delimiter)
-`\updownarrow'
+'\updownarrow'
\updownarrow (delimiter)
-`\uplus'
+'\uplus'
\uplus (binary operation)
-`\Upsilon'
+'\Upsilon'
\Upsilon
-`\upsilon'
+'\upsilon'
\upsilon
-`\varepsilon'
+'\varepsilon'
\varepsilon
-`\varphi'
+'\varphi'
\varphi
-`\varpi'
+'\varpi'
\varpi
-`\varrho'
+'\varrho'
\varrho
-`\varsigma'
+'\varsigma'
\varsigma
-`\vartheta'
+'\vartheta'
\vartheta
-`\vdash'
+'\vdash'
\vdash (relation)
-`\vee'
+'\vee'
\vee (binary operation)
-`\Vert'
+'\Vert'
\Vert (delimiter)
-`\vert'
+'\vert'
\vert (delimiter)
-`\wedge'
+'\wedge'
\wedge (binary operation)
-`\wp'
+'\wp'
\wp
-`\wr'
+'\wr'
\wr (binary operation)
-`\Xi'
+'\Xi'
\Xi
-`\xi'
+'\xi'
\xi
-`\zeta'
+'\zeta'
\zeta
17.3 Math functions
@@ -3326,106 +3560,106 @@ symbol (\pi) in your output.
These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
spacing.
-`\arccos'
+'\arccos'
\arccos
-`\arcsin'
+'\arcsin'
\arcsin
-`\arctan'
+'\arctan'
\arctan
-`\arg'
+'\arg'
\arg
-`\bmod'
+'\bmod'
Binary modulo operator (x \bmod y)
-`\cos'
+'\cos'
\cos
-`\cosh'
+'\cosh'
\cosh
-`\cot'
+'\cot'
\cos
-`\coth'
+'\coth'
\cosh
-`\csc'
+'\csc'
\csc
-`\deg'
+'\deg'
\deg
-`\det'
+'\det'
\deg
-`\dim'
+'\dim'
\dim
-`\exp'
+'\exp'
\exp
-`\gcd'
+'\gcd'
\gcd
-`\hom'
+'\hom'
\hom
-`\inf'
+'\inf'
\inf
-`\ker'
+'\ker'
\ker
-`\lg'
+'\lg'
\lg
-`\lim'
+'\lim'
\lim
-`\liminf'
+'\liminf'
\liminf
-`\limsup'
+'\limsup'
\limsup
-`\ln'
+'\ln'
\ln
-`\log'
+'\log'
\log
-`\max'
+'\max'
\max
-`\min'
+'\min'
\min
-`\pmod'
+'\pmod'
parenthesized modulus, as in (\pmod 2^n - 1)
-`\Pr'
+'\Pr'
\Pr
-`\sec'
+'\sec'
\sec
-`\sin'
+'\sin'
\sin
-`\sinh'
+'\sinh'
\sinh
-`\sup'
+'\sup'
\sup
-`\tan'
+'\tan'
\tan
-`\tanh'
+'\tanh'
\tanh
17.4 Math accents
@@ -3435,117 +3669,117 @@ LaTeX provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters in
math. These are different from accents in normal text (*note
Accents::).
-`\acute'
+'\acute'
Math acute accent: \acute{x}.
-`\bar'
+'\bar'
Math bar-over accent: \bar{x}.
-`\breve'
+'\breve'
Math breve accent: \breve{x}.
-`\check'
+'\check'
Math ha'c'
+'\:'
+'\>'
Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad).
-
-`\,'
+'\,'
A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode.
-
-`\!'
+'\!'
A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad).
17.6 Math miscellany
====================
-`\*'
+'\*'
A "discretionary" multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
allowed.
-`\cdots'
+'\cdots'
A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the
line.
-`\ddots'
+'\ddots'
A diagonal ellipsis: \ddots.
-`\frac{num}{den}'
- Produces the fraction `num' divided by `den'.
+'\frac{num}{den}'
+ Produces the fraction 'num' divided by 'den'.
-`\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2'
- The two delimiters need not match; `.' acts as a null delimiter,
+'\left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2'
+ The two delimiters need not match; '.' acts as a null delimiter,
producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the
- math in between. Example: `\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]'.
+ math in between. Example: '\left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]'.
-`\overbrace{TEXT}'
+'\overbrace{TEXT}'
Generates a brace over TEXT. For example,
\overbrace{x+\cdots+x}^{k \rm\;times}.
-`\overline{TEXT}'
+'\overline{TEXT}'
Generates a horizontal line over TEX. For exampe, \overline{x+y}.
-`\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}'
+'\sqrt[ROOT]{arg}'
Produces the representation of the square root of ARG. The
optional argument ROOT determines what root to produce. For
- example, the cube root of `x+y' would be typed as
- `$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$'.
+ example, the cube root of 'x+y' would be typed as
+ '$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$'.
-`\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}'
+'\stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}'
Puts TEXT above RELATION. For example,
- `\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.
+ '\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}'.
-`\underbrace{math}'
+'\underbrace{math}'
Generates MATH with a brace underneath.
-`\underline{text}'
+'\underline{text}'
Causes TEXT, which may be either math mode or not, to be
underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of
descenders.
-`\vdots'
+'\vdots'
Produces a vertical ellipsis.
18 Modes
@@ -3555,9 +3789,7 @@ When LaTeX is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
modes:
* Paragraph mode
-
* Math mode
-
* Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
LaTeX changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
@@ -3572,16 +3804,16 @@ it's generating a mathematical formula. In "LR mode", as in paragraph
mode, LaTeX considers the output that it produces to be a string of
words with spaces between them. However, unlike paragraph mode, LaTeX
keeps going from left to right; it never starts a new line in LR mode.
-Even if you put a hundred words into an `\mbox', LaTeX would keep
+Even if you put a hundred words into an '\mbox', LaTeX would keep
typesetting them from left to right inside a single box, and then
complain because the resulting box was too wide to fit on the line.
- LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an `\mbox'
+ LaTeX is in LR mode when it starts making a box with an '\mbox'
command. You can get it to enter a different mode inside the box - for
example, you can make it enter math mode to put a formula in the box.
There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
making a box that put LaTeX in paragraph mode. The box make by one of
-these commands or environments will be called a `parbox'. When LaTeX is
+these commands or environments will be called a 'parbox'. When LaTeX is
in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in "inner
paragraph mode". Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out in, is
called "outer paragraph mode".
@@ -3589,36 +3821,36 @@ called "outer paragraph mode".
19 Page styles
**************
-The `\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the
+The '\documentclass' command determines the size and position of the
page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
-19.1 `\maketitle'
+19.1 '\maketitle'
=================
-The `\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title
-page--except in the `article' class, where the title is placed at the
+The '\maketitle' command generates a title on a separate title
+page--except in the 'article' class, where the title is placed at the
top of the first page. Information used to produce the title is
obtained from the following declarations:
-`\author{NAME \and NAME2}'
- The `\author' command declares the document author(s), where the
- argument is a list of authors separated by `\and' commands. Use
- `\\' to separate lines within a single author's entry--for example,
+'\author{NAME \and NAME2}'
+ The '\author' command declares the document author(s), where the
+ argument is a list of authors separated by '\and' commands. Use
+ '\\' to separate lines within a single author's entry--for example,
to give the author's institution or address.
-`\date{TEXT}'
- The `\date' command declares TEXT to be the document's date. With
- no `\date' command, the current date (*note \today::) is used.
+'\date{TEXT}'
+ The '\date' command declares TEXT to be the document's date. With
+ no '\date' command, the current date (*note \today::) is used.
-`\thanks{TEXT}'
- The `\thanks' command produces a `\footnote' to the title, usually
+'\thanks{TEXT}'
+ The '\thanks' command produces a '\footnote' to the title, usually
used for credit acknowledgements.
-`\title{TEXT}'
- The `\title' command declares TEXT to be the title of the document.
- Use `\\' to force a line break, as usual.
+'\title{TEXT}'
+ The '\title' command declares TEXT to be the title of the document.
+ Use '\\' to force a line break, as usual.
-19.2 `\pagenumbering'
+19.2 '\pagenumbering'
=====================
Synopsis:
@@ -3627,62 +3859,58 @@ Synopsis:
Specifies the style of page numbers, according to STYLE:
-`arabic'
+'arabic'
arabic numerals
-
-`roman'
+'roman'
lowercase Roman numerals
-
-`Roman'
+'Roman'
uppercase Roman numerals
-
-`alph'
+'alph'
lowercase letters
-
-`Alph'
+'Alph'
uppercase letters
-19.3 `\pagestyle'
+19.3 '\pagestyle'
=================
Synopsis:
\pagestyle{STYLE}
- The `\pagestyle' command specifies how the headers and footers are
+ The '\pagestyle' command specifies how the headers and footers are
typeset from the current page onwards. Values for STYLE:
-`plain'
+'plain'
Just a plain page number.
-`empty'
+'empty'
Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers.
-`headings'
+'headings'
Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies
what goes in the headers.
-`myheadings'
- Custom headers, specified via the `\markboth' or the `\markright'
+'myheadings'
+ Custom headers, specified via the '\markboth' or the '\markright'
commands.
- Here are the descriptions of `\markboth' and `\markright':
+ Here are the descriptions of '\markboth' and '\markright':
-`\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}'
+'\markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}'
Sets both the left and the right heading. A "left-hand heading"
- (LEFT) is generated by the last `\markboth' command before the end
+ (LEFT) is generated by the last '\markboth' command before the end
of the page, while a "right-hand heading" (RIGHT is generated by
- the first `\markboth' or `\markright' that comes on the page if
+ the first '\markboth' or '\markright' that comes on the page if
there is one, otherwise by the last one before the page.
-`\markright{RIGHT}'
+'\markright{RIGHT}'
Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.
-19.4 `\thispagestyle{STYLE}'
+19.4 '\thispagestyle{STYLE}'
============================
-The `\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the
-`\pagestyle' command (see previous section) except that it changes to
+The '\thispagestyle' command works in the same manner as the
+'\pagestyle' command (see previous section) except that it changes to
STYLE for the current page only.
20 Spaces
@@ -3690,70 +3918,70 @@ STYLE for the current page only.
LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
- Another space-producing command is `\,' to produce a "thin" space
+ Another space-producing command is '\,' to produce a "thin" space
(usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is more often
-useful in math mode (*note Spacing in math mode::).
+useful in math mode (*note Spacing in math mode::).
-20.1 `\hspace'
+20.1 '\hspace'
==============
Synopsis:
\hspace[*]{LENGTH}
- The `\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The LENGTH argument can
+ The '\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The LENGTH argument can
be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands: points, inches, etc.
It is a rubber length. You can add both negative and positive space
-with an `\hspace' command; adding negative space is like backspacing.
+with an '\hspace' command; adding negative space is like backspacing.
LaTeX normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning
-or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional `*' form.
+or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional '*' form.
-20.2 `\hfill'
+20.2 '\hfill'
=============
-The `\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which has no
+The '\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which has no
natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed.
- The `\fill' parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the
-glue value `0pt plus1fill'); thus, `\hspace\fill' is equivalent to
-`\hfill'.
+ The '\fill' parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the
+glue value '0pt plus1fill'); thus, '\hspace\fill' is equivalent to
+'\hfill'.
-20.3 `\SPACE'
+20.3 '\SPACE'
=============
-The `\ ' (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's useful
-after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example `Knuth's
+The '\ ' (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's useful
+after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example 'Knuth's
article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental'. It is also often
-used after control sequences, as in `\TeX\ is a nice system.'
+used after control sequences, as in '\TeX\ is a nice system.'
- In normal circumstances, `\' and `\' are equivalent to
-`\ '.
+ In normal circumstances, '\' and '\' are equivalent to
+'\ '.
-20.4 `\@'
+20.4 '\@'
=========
-The `\@' command makes the following punctuation character end a
+The '\@' command makes the following punctuation character end a
sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a
-capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without `\@':
+capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without '\@':
- ... in C\@. Pascal, though ...
- ... in C. Pascal, though ...
+ ... in C\@. Pascal, though ...
+ ... in C. Pascal, though ...
produces
- ... in C. Pascal, though ... ... in C. Pascal, though ...
+ ... in C. Pascal, though ... ... in C. Pascal, though ...
-20.5 `\thinspace'
+20.5 '\thinspace'
=================
-`\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6
+'\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6
of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as in '".
-20.6 `\/'
+20.6 '\/'
=========
-The `\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small space
+The '\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small space
defined by the font designer for a given character, to avoid the
character colliding with whatever follows. The italic f character
typically has a large italic correction value.
@@ -3761,75 +3989,75 @@ typically has a large italic correction value.
If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary
to insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a
very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as
-normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the `f's
+normal letters, it can help. Compare f: f; (in the TeX output, the 'f's
are nicely separated) with f: f;.
Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic
correction. Compare pdfTeX (in the TeX output, there is a small space
-after the `f') with pdfTeX.
+after the 'f') with pdfTeX.
-20.7 `\hrulefill'
+20.7 '\hrulefill'
=================
-The `\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
+The '\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
rule.
-20.8 `\dotfill'
+20.8 '\dotfill'
===============
-The `\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that fills with dots
+The '\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that fills with dots
instead of just white space.
-20.9 `\addvspace'
+20.9 '\addvspace'
=================
-`\addvspace{length}'
+'\addvspace{length}'
- The `\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height
+ The '\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height
length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
-point in the output by a previous `\addvspace' command, then this
+point in the output by a previous '\addvspace' command, then this
command will not add more space than needed to make the natural length
-of the total vertical space equal to `length'.
+of the total vertical space equal to 'length'.
-20.10 `\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
+20.10 '\bigskip \medskip \smallskip'
====================================
These commands produce a given amount of space.
-`\bigskip'
- The same as `\vspace{bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line
+'\bigskip'
+ The same as '\vspace{bigskipamount}', ordinarily about one line
space (with stretch and shrink).
-`\medskip'
- The same as `\vspace{medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a
+'\medskip'
+ The same as '\vspace{medskipamount}', ordinarily about half of a
line space (with stretch and shrink).
-`\smallskip'
- The same as `\vspace{smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter
+'\smallskip'
+ The same as '\vspace{smallskipamount}', ordinarily about a quarter
of a line space (with stretch and shrink).
- The `\...amount' parameters are determined by the document class.
+ The '\...amount' parameters are determined by the document class.
-20.11 `\vfill'
+20.11 '\vfill'
==============
-The `\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can
+The '\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can
stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to
-`\vspace{\fill}' (*note \hfill::).
+'\vspace{\fill}' (*note \hfill::).
-20.12 `\vspace[*]{LENGTH}'
+20.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}'
==========================
Synopsis:
\vspace[*]{LENGTH}
- The `\vspace' command adds the vertical space LENGTH, i.e., a rubber
+ The '\vspace' command adds the vertical space LENGTH, i.e., a rubber
length. LENGTH can be negative or positive.
- Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by `\vspace' at the
-top or bottom of a page. With the optional `*' argument, the space is
+ Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by '\vspace' at the
+top or bottom of a page. With the optional '*' argument, the space is
not removed.
21 Boxes
@@ -3838,14 +4066,14 @@ not removed.
All the predefined length parameters (*note Predefined lengths::) can be
used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
-21.1 `\mbox{TEXT}'
+21.1 '\mbox{TEXT}'
==================
-The `\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text
+The '\mbox' command creates a box just wide enough to hold the text
created by its argument. The TEXT is not broken into lines, so it can
be used to prevent hyphenation.
-21.2 `\fbox' and `\framebox'
+21.2 '\fbox' and '\framebox'
============================
Synopses:
@@ -3853,77 +4081,73 @@ Synopses:
\fbox{TEXT}
\framebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
- The `\fbox' and `\framebox' commands are like `\mbox', except that
+ The '\fbox' and '\framebox' commands are like '\mbox', except that
they put a frame around the outside of the box being created.
- In addition, the `\framebox' command allows for explicit
+ In addition, the '\framebox' command allows for explicit
specification of the box width with the optional WIDTH argument (a
dimension), and positioning with the optional POSITION argument.
- Both commands produce a rule of thickness `\fboxrule' (default
-`.4pt'), and leave a space of `\fboxsep' (default `3pt') between the
+ Both commands produce a rule of thickness '\fboxrule' (default
+'.4pt'), and leave a space of '\fboxsep' (default '3pt') between the
rule and the contents of the box.
- *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the `\framebox' command in the
-`picture' environment.
+ *Note \framebox (picture)::, for the '\framebox' command in the
+'picture' environment.
-21.3 `lrbox'
+21.3 'lrbox'
============
-`\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}'
+'\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}'
- This is the environment form of `\sbox'.
+ This is the environment form of '\sbox'.
- The text inside the environment is saved in the box `cmd', which must
-have been declared with `\newsavebox'.
+ The text inside the environment is saved in the box 'cmd', which must
+have been declared with '\newsavebox'.
-21.4 `\makebox'
+21.4 '\makebox'
===============
Synopsis:
\makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
- The `\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the
+ The '\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the
TEXT specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional WIDTH
argument. The position of the text within the box is determined by the
optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:
-`c'
+'c'
Centered (default).
-
-`l'
+'l'
Flush left.
-
-`r'
+'r'
Flush right.
-
-`s'
+'s'
Stretch (justify) across entire WIDTH; TEXT must contain
stretchable space for this to work.
- `\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note \makebox
+ '\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note \makebox
(picture)::.
-21.5 `\parbox'
+21.5 '\parbox'
==============
Synopsis:
\parbox[POSITION][HEIGHT][INNER-POS]{WIDTH}{TEXT}
- The `\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in
-`paragraph' mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text,
+ The '\parbox' command produces a box whose contents are created in
+'paragraph' mode. It should be used to make a box small pieces of text,
with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you shouldn't use any
-paragraph-making environments inside a `\parbox' argument. For larger
+paragraph-making environments inside a '\parbox' argument. For larger
pieces of text, including ones containing a paragraph-making
-environment, you should use a `minipage' environment (*note minipage::).
+environment, you should use a 'minipage' environment (*note minipage::).
- `\parbox' has two mandatory arguments:
+ '\parbox' has two mandatory arguments:
WIDTH
the width of the parbox;
-
TEXT
the text that goes inside the parbox.
@@ -3936,27 +4160,24 @@ bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding text
The INNER-POS argument controls the placement of the text inside the
box, as follows; if it is not specified, POSITION is used.
-`t'
+'t'
text is placed at the top of the box.
-
-`c'
+'c'
text is centered in the box.
-
-`b'
+'b'
text is placed at the bottom of the box.
-
-`s'
+'s'
stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable
space for this to work.
-21.6 `\raisebox'
+21.6 '\raisebox'
================
Synopsis:
\raisebox{distance}[HEIGHT][DEPTH]{text}
- The `\raisebox' command raises or lowers TEXT. The first mandatory
+ The '\raisebox' command raises or lowers TEXT. The first mandatory
argument specifies how high TEXT is to be raised (or lowered if it is a
negative amount). TEXT itself is processed in LR mode.
@@ -3965,39 +4186,39 @@ specified, LaTeX treats TEXT as extending a certain distance above the
baseline (height) or below (depth), ignoring its natural height and
depth.
-21.7 `\savebox'
+21.7 '\savebox'
===============
Synopsis:
\savebox{\BOXCMD}[WIDTH][POS]{TEXT}
- This command typeset TEXT in a box just as with `\makebox' (*note
+ This command typeset TEXT in a box just as with '\makebox' (*note
\makebox::), except that instead of printing the resulting box, it saves
it in the box labeled \BOXCMD, which must have been declared with
-`\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).
+'\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).
-21.8 `\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}'
+21.8 '\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}'
===========================
Synopsis:
\sbox{\BOXCMD}{TEXT}
- `\sbox' types TEXT in a box just as with `\mbox' (*note \mbox::)
+ '\sbox' types TEXT in a box just as with '\mbox' (*note \mbox::)
except that instead of the resulting box being included in the normal
output, it is saved in the box labeled \BOXCMD. \BOXCMD must have been
-previously declared with `\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).
+previously declared with '\newsavebox' (*note \newsavebox::).
-21.9 `\usebox{\BOXCMD'
+21.9 '\usebox{\BOXCMD'
======================
Synopsis:
\usebox{\BOXCMD}
- `\usebox' producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by a
-`\savebox' command (*note \savebox::).
+ '\usebox' producesthe box most recently saved in the bin \BOXCMD by a
+'\savebox' command (*note \savebox::).
22 Special insertions
*********************
@@ -4015,294 +4236,294 @@ The following characters play a special role in LaTeX and are called
Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, LaTeX will
do something special. If you simply want the character to be printed as
-itself, include a `\' in front of the character. For example, `\$' will
-produce `$' in your output.
+itself, include a '\' in front of the character. For example, '\$' will
+produce '$' in your output.
- One exception to this rule is `\' itself, because `\\' has its own
+ One exception to this rule is '\' itself, because '\\' has its own
special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by typing
-`$\backslash$' in your file, and a typewriter `\' is produced by using
-`\' in a verbatim command (*note verbatim::).
+'$\backslash$' in your file, and a typewriter '\' is produced by using
+'\' in a verbatim command (*note verbatim::).
- Also, `\~' and `\^' place tilde and circumflex accents over the
+ Also, '\~' and '\^' place tilde and circumflex accents over the
following letter, as in o~ and o^ (*note Accents::); to get a standalone
-`~' or `^', you can again use a verbatim command.
+'~' or '^', you can again use a verbatim command.
Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you
-know its number by using the `\symbol' command. For example, the visible
-space character used in the `\verb*' command has the code decimal 32, so
-it can be typed as `\symbol{32}'.
+know its number by using the '\symbol' command. For example, the
+visible space character used in the '\verb*' command has the code
+decimal 32, so it can be typed as '\symbol{32}'.
- You can also specify octal numbers with `'' or hexadecimal numbers
-with `"', so the previous example could also be written as
-`\symbol{'40}' or `\symbol{"20}'.
+ You can also specify octal numbers with ''' or hexadecimal numbers
+with '"', so the previous example could also be written as
+'\symbol{'40}' or '\symbol{"20}'.
22.2 Text symbols
=================
LaTeX provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols in
running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are not
-available in OT1; you may need to load the `textcomp' package.
+available in OT1; you may need to load the 'textcomp' package.
-`\copyright'
-`\textcopyright'
+'\copyright'
+'\textcopyright'
The copyright symbol, (C).
-`\dag'
+'\dag'
The dagger symbol (in text).
-`\ddag'
+'\ddag'
The double dagger symbol (in text).
-`\LaTeX'
+'\LaTeX'
The LaTeX logo.
-`\guillemotleft (<<)'
-`\guillemotright (>>)'
-`\guilsinglleft (<)'
-`\guilsinglright (>)'
+'\guillemotleft (<<)'
+'\guillemotright (>>)'
+'\guilsinglleft (<)'
+'\guilsinglright (>)'
Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French:
<<, >>, <, >.
-`\ldots'
-`\dots'
-`\textellipsis'
- An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `...'. `\ldots' and
- `\dots' also work in math mode.
+'\ldots'
+'\dots'
+'\textellipsis'
+ An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): '...'. '\ldots' and
+ '\dots' also work in math mode.
-`\lq'
- Left (opening) quote: `.
+'\lq'
+ Left (opening) quote: '.
-`\P'
-`\textparagraph'
+'\P'
+'\textparagraph'
Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
-`\pounds'
-`\textsterling'
+'\pounds'
+'\textsterling'
English pounds sterling: #.
-`\quotedblbase (,,)'
-`\quotesinglbase (,)'
+'\quotedblbase (,,)'
+'\quotesinglbase (,)'
Double and single quotation marks on the baseline: ,, and ,.
-`\rq'
+'\rq'
Right (closing) quote: '.
-`\S'
+'\S'
Section symbol.
-`\TeX'
+'\TeX'
The TeX logo.
-`\textasciicircum'
+'\textasciicircum'
ASCII circumflex: ^.
-`\textasciitilde'
+'\textasciitilde'
ASCII tilde: ~.
-`\textasteriskcentered'
+'\textasteriskcentered'
Centered asterisk: *.
-`\textbackslash'
+'\textbackslash'
Backslash: \.
-`\textbar'
+'\textbar'
Vertical bar: |.
-`\textbardbl'
+'\textbardbl'
Double vertical bar.
-`\textbigcircle'
+'\textbigcircle'
Big circle symbol.
-`\textbraceleft'
+'\textbraceleft'
Left brace: {.
-`\textbraceright'
+'\textbraceright'
Right brace: }.
-`\textbullet'
+'\textbullet'
Bullet: *.
-`\textcircled{LETTER}'
+'\textcircled{LETTER}'
LETTER in a circle, as in (R).
-`\textcompwordmark'
-`\textcapitalwordmark'
-`\textascenderwordmark'
- Composite word mark (invisible). The `\textcapital...' form has
- the cap height of the font, while the `\textascender...' form has
+'\textcompwordmark'
+'\textcapitalwordmark'
+'\textascenderwordmark'
+ Composite word mark (invisible). The '\textcapital...' form has
+ the cap height of the font, while the '\textascender...' form has
the ascender height.
-`\textdagger'
+'\textdagger'
Dagger: \dag.
-`\textdaggerdbl'
+'\textdaggerdbl'
Double dagger: \ddag.
-`\textdollar (or `$')'
+'\textdollar (or '$')'
Dollar sign: $.
-`\textemdash (or `---')'
+'\textemdash (or '---')'
Em-dash: -- (for punctuation).
-`\textendash (or `--')'
+'\textendash (or '--')'
En-dash: -- (for ranges).
-`\texteuro'
+'\texteuro'
The Euro symbol: Euro.
-`\textexclamdown (or `!`')'
+'\textexclamdown (or '!`')'
Upside down exclamation point: !.
-`\textgreater'
+'\textgreater'
Greater than: >.
-`\textless'
+'\textless'
Less than: <.
-`\textleftarrow'
+'\textleftarrow'
Left arrow.
-`\textordfeminine'
-`\textordmasculine'
+'\textordfeminine'
+'\textordmasculine'
Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: a, o.
-`\textperiodcentered'
+'\textperiodcentered'
Centered period: \cdot.
-`\textquestiondown (or `?`')'
+'\textquestiondown (or '?`')'
Upside down questionation point: ?.
-`\textquotedblleft (or ```')'
+'\textquotedblleft (or '``')'
Double left quote: ".
-`\textquotedblright (or `'')'
+'\textquotedblright (or ''')'
Double right quote: ".
-`\textquoteleft (or ``')'
- Single left quote: `.
+'\textquoteleft (or '`')'
+ Single left quote: '.
-`\textquoteright (or `'')'
+'\textquoteright (or ''')'
Single right quote: '.
-`\textquotestraightbase'
-`\textquotestraightdblbase'
+'\textquotestraightbase'
+'\textquotestraightdblbase'
Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
-`\textregistered'
+'\textregistered'
Registered symbol: (R).
-`\textrightarrow'
+'\textrightarrow'
Right arrow.
-`\textthreequartersemdash'
+'\textthreequartersemdash'
"Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
-`\texttrademark'
+'\texttrademark'
Trademark symbol: ^{\hbox{TM}}.
-`\texttwelveudash'
+'\texttwelveudash'
"Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
-`\textunderscore'
+'\textunderscore'
Underscore: _.
-`\textvisiblespace'
+'\textvisiblespace'
Visible space symbol.
22.3 Accents
============
LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
-through the `babel' package and related support. This section does not
+through the 'babel' package and related support. This section does not
attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists the core LaTeX
commands for creating accented characters.
- The `\capital...' commands produce alternative forms for use with
+ The '\capital...' commands produce alternative forms for use with
capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
-`\"'
-`\capitaldieresis'
+'\"'
+'\capitaldieresis'
Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in o".
-`\''
-`\capitalacute'
- Produces an acute accent, as in o'. In the `tabbing' environment,
+'\''
+'\capitalacute'
+ Produces an acute accent, as in o'. In the 'tabbing' environment,
pushes current column to the right of the previous column (*note
tabbing::).
-`\.'
+'\.'
Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o..
-`\='
-`\capitalmacron'
+'\='
+'\capitalmacron'
Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o=.
-`\^'
-`\capitalcircumflex'
+'\^'
+'\capitalcircumflex'
Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o^.
-`\`'
-`\capitalgrave'
+'\`'
+'\capitalgrave'
Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o`. In the
- `tabbing' environment, move following text to the right margin
+ 'tabbing' environment, move following text to the right margin
(*note tabbing::).
-`\~'
-`\capitaltilde'
+'\~'
+'\capitaltilde'
Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n~.
-`\b'
+'\b'
Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_.
-`\c'
-`\capitalcedilla'
+'\c'
+'\capitalcedilla'
Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in c,.
-`\d'
-`\capitaldotaccent'
+'\d'
+'\capitaldotaccent'
Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o.
-`\H'
-`\capitalhungarumlaut'
+'\H'
+'\capitalhungarumlaut'
Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in
o''.
-`\i'
- Produces a dotless i, as in `i'.
+'\i'
+ Produces a dotless i, as in 'i'.
-`\j'
- Produces a dotless j, as in `j'.
+'\j'
+ Produces a dotless j, as in 'j'.
-`\k'
-`\capitalogonek'
- Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o;'. Not available in the
+'\k'
+'\capitalogonek'
+ Produces a letter with ogonek, as in 'o;'. Not available in the
OT1 encoding.
-`\r'
-`\capitalring'
- Produces a ring accent, as in `o*'.
+'\r'
+'\capitalring'
+ Produces a ring accent, as in 'o*'.
-`\t'
-`\capitaltie'
-`\newtie'
-`\capitalnewtie'
- Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The `\newtie' form is
+'\t'
+'\capitaltie'
+'\newtie'
+'\capitalnewtie'
+ Produces a tie-after accent, as in 'oo['. The '\newtie' form is
centered in its box.
-`\u'
-`\capitalbreve'
- Produces a breve accent, as in `o('.
+'\u'
+'\capitalbreve'
+ Produces a breve accent, as in 'o('.
-`\underbar'
+'\underbar'
Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text.
The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is
always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through
- descenders. See also `\underline' in *note Math miscellany::.
+ descenders. See also '\underline' in *note Math miscellany::.
-`\v'
-`\capitalcaron'
- Produces a ha'c {\small fred} % please use!
+\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
\cs{fred} -> \fred
\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
\meta{fred} ->
@@ -4879,14 +5100,13 @@ The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others:
\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
\booktitle{Book of Fred}
\end{verbatim}
-}
For more information, see the ltubguid document at:
\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references).
Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
-
\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml
index fe4c53219ce..0a6df3c8ace 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.xml
@@ -1,34 +1,37 @@
-
-latex2e.xml
-May 2011
-&latex;2e reference manual (May 2011)
+
+\input texinfo
+
+
+latex2e.info
+May 2012
+&latex;2e reference manual (May 2012)
-
+
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of May 2011.
+document preparation system, version of May 2012.
-This was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS
-Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
+This manual was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in
+the VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The
&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The
&latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl
@@ -39,7 +42,7 @@ and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as
&tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no text was
directly copied).
-Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Karl Berry.&linebreak;
+Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012 Karl Berry.&linebreak;
Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak;
Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
@@ -47,6 +50,13 @@ Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
are preserved on all copies.
+
+Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
+results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
+notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
+(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+
+
Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
@@ -55,832 +65,758 @@ notice identical to this one.
Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
-
+
+
TeX
-
-(latex2e)
- LaTeX2e
- Unofficial LaTeX reference manual.
-
-
+LaTeX2e (latex2e) Unofficial LaTeX reference manual.
+
+
+\global\hbadness=4444 % don&textrsquo;t complain much
+
-&latex;: Structured documents for &tex;
-unofficial &latex; reference manual
-May 2011
-http://home.gna.org/latexrefman
+&latex;: Structured documents for &tex;
+unofficial &latex; reference manual
+May 2012
+http://home.gna.org/latexrefman
-This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version of May 2011.
-
-This was originally translated from LATEX.HLP v1.0a in the VMS
-Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by
-George D. Greenwade of Sam Houston State University. The
-&latex; 2.09 version was written by Stephen Gilmore. The
-&latex;2e version was adapted from this by Torsten Martinsen. Karl
-Berry made further updates and additions, and gratefully acknowledges
-using Hypertext Help with &latex;, by Sheldon Green, and the
-&latex; Command Summary (for &latex; 2.09) by L. Botway
-and C. Biemesderfer (published by the &tex; Users Group as
-&tex;niques number 10), as reference material (no text was
-directly copied).
-
-Copyright ©right; 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 Karl Berry.&linebreak;
-Copyright ©right; 1988, 1994, 2007 Stephen Gilmore.&linebreak;
-Copyright ©right; 1994, 1995, 1996 Torsten Martinsen.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
-resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
-notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
-into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
-
+ 0pt plus 1filll
+
+
+
-
-Top
-About this document
-(dir)
-
-
-&latex;2e
+Top About this document (dir)
+&latex;2e
This document is an unofficial reference manual for &latex;, a
-document preparation system, version as of May 2011. It is
+document preparation system, version as of May 2012. It is
intended to cover &latex;2e, which has been the standard version of
&latex; for many years.
+About this document Bug reporting, etc.
+
Overview What is &latex;?
+
Starting & ending The standard beginning and end of a document.
+
Document classes Some of the various classes available.
+
Typefaces And fonts, such as bold, italics etc.
+
Layout Controlling the page layout.
+
Sectioning How to section properly.
+
Cross references Automatic referencing.
+
Environments Such as enumerate & itemize.
+
Line breaking Influencing line breaks.
+
Page breaking Influencing page breaks.
+
Footnotes How to produce footnotes.
+
Definitions Define your own commands etc.
+
Counters Internal counters used by &latex;.
+
Lengths The length commands.
+
Making paragraphs Paragraph commands.
+
Math formulas How to create mathematical formulas.
+
Modes Paragraph, Math or LR modes.
+
Page styles Various styles of page layout.
+
Spaces Horizontal and vertical space.
+
Boxes Making boxes.
+
Special insertions Inserting reserved and special characters.
+
Splitting the input Dealing with big files by splitting.
+
Front/back matter Tables of contents, glossaries, indexes.
+
Letters The letter class.
+
Terminal input/output User interaction.
+
Command line System-independent command-line behavior.
+
Document templates Starter templates for various document classes.
+
Concept Index General index.
+
Command Index Alphabetical list of &latex; commands.
+
-
-About this document
-Overview
-Top
-Top
-
-
-Overview of &latex;
-
-Knuth, Donald E. Lamport, Leslie &latex; Project team The &latex; document preparation system is implemented as a macro
-package for Donald E. Knuth's &tex; typesetting program.
+About this document Overview Top Top
+About this document
+
+Knuth, Donald E.
+Lamport, Leslie
+&latex; Project team
+The &latex; document preparation system is implemented as a macro
+package for Donald E. Knuth&textrsquo;s &tex; typesetting program.
&latex; was originally created by Leslie Lamport; it is now
-maintained by a group of volunteers (http://latex-project.org ).
+maintained by a group of volunteers (http://latex-project.org ).
The official documentation written by the &latex; project is
available from their web site.
-bug reporting reporting bugs latexrefman-discuss@gna.org email address The present document is completely unofficial and has not been
+bug reporting
+reporting bugs
+latexrefman-discuss&arobase;gna.org email address
+The present document is completely unofficial and has not been
reviewed by the &latex; maintainers. Do not send bug reports or
anything else about this document to them. Instead, please send all
-comments to latexrefman-discuss@gna.org .
+comments to latexrefman-discuss&arobase;gna.org .
The home page for this document is
-http://home.gna.org/latexrefman . That page has links to the
+http://home.gna.org/latexrefman . That page has links to the
current output in various formats, sources, mailing lists, and other
infrastructure.
+Of course, there are many, many other sources of information about
+&latex;. Here are a few:
+
+
+http://www.ctan.org/pkg/latex-doc-ptr
+Two pages of recommended references to &latex; documentation.
+
+http://www.ctan.org/pkg/first-latex-doc
+Writing your first document, with a bit of both text and math.
+
+http://www.ctan.org/pkg/usrguide
+The guide for document authors maintained as part of &latex;; there
+are several others.
+
+http://tug.org/begin.html
+Introduction to the &tex; system, including &latex;.
+
+
-
-Overview
-Starting & ending
-About this document
-Top
-
-
-Overview of &latex;
+Overview Starting & ending About this document Top
+Overview of &latex;
What is &latex;?
-overview of &latex; basics of &latex; &latex; overview &latex; typesets a file of text using the &tex; program and the
-&latex; “macro package” for &tex;. That is, it processes an input
+overview of &latex;
+basics of &latex;
+&latex; overview
+&latex; typesets a file of text using the &tex; program and the
+&latex; &textldquo;macro package&textrdquo; for &tex;. That is, it processes an input
file containing the text of a document with interspersed commands that
describe how the text should be formatted. &latex; files are plain
text that can be written in any reasonable editor. It produces at
least three files as output:
--
+
+
The main output file, which is one of:
-.dvi
-.dvi file latex command If invoked as latex , a “Device Independent” (.dvi )
+
+.dvi
+.dvi file
+latex command
+If invoked as latex , a &textldquo;Device Independent&textrdquo; (.dvi )
file is produced. This contains commands that can be translated into
commands for virtually any output device. You can view such
.dvi output of &latex; by using a program such as
xdvi (display directly), dvips (convert to
PostScript), or dvipdfmx (convert to PDF).
-.pdf
-.pdf file pdf&tex; pdflatex command If invoked as pdflatex , a “Portable Document Format”
+.pdf
+.pdf file
+pdf&tex;
+pdflatex command
+If invoked as pdflatex , a &textldquo;Portable Document Format&textrdquo;
(.pdf ) file. Typically, this is a self-contained file, with
all fonts and images embedded. This can be very useful, but it does
make the output much larger than the .dvi produced from the
same document.
-lualatex command Lua&tex; If invoked as lualatex , a .pdf file is created using
-the Lua&tex; engine (http://luatex.org ).
+lualatex command
+Lua&tex;
+If invoked as lualatex , a .pdf file is created using
+the Lua&tex; engine (http://luatex.org ).
-xelatex command Xe&tex; If invoked as xelatex , a .pdf file is created using
-the Xe&tex; engine (http://tug.org/xetex ).
+xelatex command
+Xe&tex;
+If invoked as xelatex , a .pdf file is created using
+the Xe&tex; engine (http://tug.org/xetex ).
-
+
Many other less-common variants of &latex; (and &tex;) exist, which
can produce HTML, XML, and other things.
-
--
-
transcript file log file .log file The “transcript” or .log file that contains summary
+
+transcript file
+log file
+.log file
+The &textldquo;transcript&textrdquo; or .log file that contains summary
information and diagnostic messages for any errors discovered in the
input file.
-
--
-
auxiliary file .aux file An “auxiliary” or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself,
+
+auxiliary file
+.aux file
+An &textldquo;auxiliary&textrdquo; or .aux file. This is used by &latex; itself,
for things such as cross-references.
-
-
+
-An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won't try to
+An open-ended list of other files might be created. We won&textrsquo;t try to
list them all. Xxx components?
-\ character starting commands [...] for optional arguments {...} for required arguments In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a \
,
+\ character starting commands
+[...] for optional arguments
+{...} for required arguments
+In the &latex; input file, a command name starts with a \
,
followed by either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single
non-letter. Arguments contained in square brackets, []
, are
-optional while arguments contained in braces, {}
, are
+optional while arguments contained in braces, {}
, are
required.
-case sensitivity of &latex; &latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless
+case sensitivity of &latex;
+&latex; is case sensitive. Enter all commands in lower case unless
explicitly directed to do otherwise.
-
-Starting & ending
-Document classes
-Overview
-Top
-
-
-Starting & ending
-
-starting & ending ending & starting
+Starting & ending Document classes Overview Top
+Starting & ending
+
+starting & ending
+ending & starting
+
A minimal input file looks like the following:
-\documentclass{class}
-\begin{document}
+
+\documentclass{class}
+\begin{document}
your text
-\end{document}
-
+\end{document}
+
+
+
where the class is a valid document class for &latex;.
-See Document classes , for details of the various document classes
+Document classes , for details of the various document classes
available locally.
-preamble, defined You may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass
-and the \begin{document}
commands (this area is called the
+preamble, defined
+You may include other &latex; commands between the \documentclass
+and the \begin{document}
commands (this area is called the
preamble).
-
-Document classes
-Typefaces
-Starting & ending
-Top
-
-
-Document classes
-
-document classes classes of documents \documentclass
+Document classes Typefaces Starting & ending Top
+Document classes
+
+document classes
+classes of documents
+\documentclass
+
The class of a given document is defined with the command:
-\documentclass[options]{class}
-
+
+\documentclass[options]{class}
+
+
+
The \documentclass
command must be the first command in a
&latex; source file.
-article class report class book class letter class slides class Built-in &latex; document class names are (many other document
-classes are available as add-ons; see Overview ):
+article class
+report class
+book class
+letter class
+slides class
+Built-in &latex; document class names are (many other document
+classes are available as add-ons; Overview ):
-article report book letter slides
-
+
+article report book letter slides
+
+
Standard options are described below.
-
-
-
-Document class options
-Document classes
-
-
-Document class options
-
-document class options options, document class class options global options
+Document class options Global options.
+
+
+
+Document class options Document classes
+Document class options
+
+document class options
+options, document class
+class options
+global options
+
You can specify so-called global options or class options
to the \documentclass
command by enclosing them in square
brackets as usual. To specify more than one option, separate
them with a comma:
-\documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class}
-
+
+\documentclass[option1,option2,...]{class}
+
+
Here is the list of the standard class options.
-10pt option 11pt option 12pt option All of the standard classes except slides
accept the following
+10pt option
+11pt option
+12pt option
+All of the standard classes except slides
accept the following
options for selecting the typeface size (default is 10pt
):
-10pt 11pt 12pt
-
-a4paper option a5paper option b5paper option executivepaper option legalpaper option letterpaper option All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper
+
+10pt 11pt 12pt
+
+
+a4paper option
+a5paper option
+b5paper option
+executivepaper option
+legalpaper option
+letterpaper option
+All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the paper
size (default is letterpaper
):
-a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
-
-draft option final option fleqn option landscape option leqno option openbib option titlepage option notitlepage option Miscellaneous other options:
-
-draft, final
-black boxes, omitting mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final
.
-fleqn
-Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
- landscape
-Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
- leqno
-Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.
- openbib
-Use “open” bibliography format.
- titlepage, notitlepage
-Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class.
-
+
+a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+
+
+draft option
+final option
+fleqn option
+landscape option
+leqno option
+openbib option
+titlepage option
+notitlepage option
+Miscellaneous other options:
+
+
+draft, final
+black boxes, omitting
+mark/do not mark overfull boxes with a big black box; default is final
.
+ fleqn
+Put displayed formulas flush left; default is centered.
+ landscape
+Selects landscape format; default is portrait.
+ leqno
+Put equation numbers on the left side of equations; default is the right side.
+ openbib
+Use &textldquo;open&textrdquo; bibliography format.
+ titlepage, notitlepage
+Specifies whether the title page is separate; default depends on the class.
+
These options are not available with the slides class:
-onecolumn option twocolumn option oneside option twoside option openright option openany option onecolumn
-twocolumn
-Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn
.
-
-oneside
-twoside
-\evensidemargin \oddsidemargin Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside
, except
+onecolumn option
+twocolumn option
+oneside option
+twoside option
+openright option
+openany option
+
+onecolumn
+twocolumn
+Typeset in one or two columns; default is onecolumn
.
+
+oneside
+twoside
+\evensidemargin
+\oddsidemargin
+Selects one- or two-sided layout; default is oneside
, except
for the book
class.
The \evensidemargin
(\oddsidemargin
parameter determines
the distance on even (odd) numbered pages between the left side of the
-page and the text's left margin. The defaults vary with the paper
+page and the text&textrsquo;s left margin. The defaults vary with the paper
size and whether one- or two-side layout is selected. For one-sided
printing the text is centered, for two-sided, \oddsidemargin
is
40% of the difference between \paperwidth
and \textwidth
,
with \evensidemargin
the remainder.
-openright
-openany
-Determines if a chapter should start on a
+ openright
+openany
+Determines if a chapter should start on a
right-hand page; default is openright
for book.
-
+
The slides
class offers the option clock
for printing
the time at the bottom of each note.
-packages, loading loading additional packages \usepackage Additional packages are loaded like this:
+packages, loading
+loading additional packages
+\usepackage
+Additional packages are loaded like this:
-\usepackage[options]{pkg}
-
+
+\usepackage[options]{pkg}
+
+
To specify more than one pkg, you can separate them with a
comma, or use multiple \usepackage
commands.
-global options options, global Any options given in the \documentclass
command that are unknown
+global options
+options, global
+Any options given in the \documentclass
command that are unknown
by the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
\usepackage
.
-
-Typefaces
-Layout
-Document classes
-Top
-
-
-Typefaces
-
-typefaces fonts
+Typefaces Layout Document classes Top
+Typefaces
+
+typefaces
+fonts
+
Two important aspects of selecting a font are specifying a size
and a style. The &latex; commands for doing this are described here.
-
-
-
-Font styles
-Font sizes
-Typefaces
-
-
-Font styles
-
-font styles typeface styles styles of text
+Font styles Select roman, italics etc.
+
Font sizes Select point size.
+
Low-level font commands Select encoding, family, series, shape.
+
+
+
+Font styles Font sizes Typefaces
+Font styles
+
+font styles
+typeface styles
+styles of text
+
The following type style commands are supported by &latex;.
-These commands are used like \textit{italic text}
. The
-corresponding command in parenthesis is the “declaration form”, which
-takes no arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
-next type style command or the end of the current group.
+This first group of commands is typically used like
+\textit{italic text}
. The corresponding command in
+parenthesis is the &textldquo;declaration form&textrdquo;, which takes no arguments. The
+scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type style command
+or the end of the current group.
The declaration forms are cumulative; i.e., you can say either
\sffamily\bfseries
or \bfseries\sffamily
to get bold
sans serif.
-You can also use the environment form of the declaration forms; for instance,
-\begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}
.
-
-\textrm (\rmfamily)
-\textrm \rmfamily Roman.
-
-\textit (\itshape)
-\textit \itshape Italics.
-
-\emph
-\emph emphasis Emphasis (switches between \textit
and \textrm
).
-
-\textmd (\mdseries)
-\textmd \mdseries Medium weight (default).
-
-\textbf (\bfseries)
-\textbf \bfseries Boldface.
-\textup (\upshape)
-\textup \upshape Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
-\textsl (\slshape)
-\textsl \slshape Slanted.
-\textsf (\sffamily)
-\textsf \sffamily Sans serif.
-\textsc (\scshape)
-\textsc \scshape Small caps.
-\texttt (\ttfamily)
-\texttt \ttfamily Typewriter.
-\textnormal (\normalfont)
-\textnormal \normalfont Main document font.
-\mathrm
-\mathrm Roman, for use in math mode.
-\mathbf
-\mathbf Boldface, for use in math mode.
-\mathsf
-\mathsf Sans serif, for use in math mode.
-\mathtt
-\mathtt Typewriter, for use in math mode.
-
-\mathit
-(\mit)
-Italics, for use in math mode.
-
-\mathnormal
-\mathnormal For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
-\mathcal
-\mathcal `Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
-
+You can alternatively use an environment form of the declarations; for
+instance, \begin{ttfamily}...\end{ttfamily}
.
+
+These commands automatically supply an italic correction if the
+
+\textrm (\rmfamily)
+\textrm
+\rmfamily
+Roman.
+
+\textit (\itshape)
+\textit
+\itshape
+Italics.
+
+\emph
+\emph
+emphasis
+Emphasis (switches between \textit
and \textrm
).
+
+\textmd (\mdseries)
+\textmd
+\mdseries
+Medium weight (default).
+
+\textbf (\bfseries)
+\textbf
+\bfseries
+Boldface.
+ \textup (\upshape)
+\textup
+\upshape
+Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+ \textsl (\slshape)
+\textsl
+\slshape
+Slanted.
+ \textsf (\sffamily)
+\textsf
+\sffamily
+Sans serif.
+ \textsc (\scshape)
+\textsc
+\scshape
+Small caps.
+ \texttt (\ttfamily)
+\texttt
+\ttfamily
+Typewriter.
+ \textnormal (\normalfont)
+\textnormal
+\normalfont
+Main document font.
+ \mathrm
+\mathrm
+Roman, for use in math mode.
+ \mathbf
+\mathbf
+Boldface, for use in math mode.
+ \mathsf
+\mathsf
+Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+ \mathtt
+\mathtt
+Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+
+\mathit
+(\mit)
+Italics, for use in math mode.
+
+\mathnormal
+\mathnormal
+For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
+ \mathcal
+\mathcal
+&textlsquo;Calligraphic&textrsquo; letters, for use in math mode.
+
In addition, the command
-\mathversion{bold}
-\mathversion can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in
-formulas. \mathversion{normal}
restores the default.
+\mathversion{bold}
+\mathversion
+can be used for switching to bold letters and symbols in
+formulas. \mathversion{normal}
restores the default.
&latex; also provides these commands, which unconditionally switch to
the given style, that is, are not cumulative. They are used
-differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd ...}
-instead of \cmd{...}
. These are two very different
+differently than the above commands, too: {\cmd ...}
+instead of \cmd{...}
. These are two very different
things.
-\bf \bf
-bold font Switch to bold face.
+
+\bf \bf
+bold font
+Switch to bold face.
- \cal \cal
-script letters for math calligraphic letters for math Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
+\cal \cal
+script letters for math
+calligraphic letters for math
+Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
-\em \em
-emphasis Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics).
+\em \em
+emphasis
+Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics).
-\it \it
-italic font Italics.
+\it \it
+italic font
+Italics.
-\rm \rm
-roman font Roman.
+\rm \rm
+roman font
+Roman.
-\sc \sc
-small caps font Small caps.
+\sc \sc
+small caps font
+Small caps.
-\sf \sf
-sans serif font Sans serif.
+\sf \sf
+sans serif font
+Sans serif.
-\sl \sl
-slanted font oblique font Slanted (oblique).
+\sl \sl
+slanted font
+oblique font
+Slanted (oblique).
-\tt \tt
-typewriter font monospace font fixed-width font Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
+\tt \tt
+typewriter font
+monospace font
+fixed-width font
+Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
-
+
-
-Font sizes
-Low-level font commands
-Font styles
-Typefaces
-
-
-Font sizes
-font sizes typeface sizes sizes of text
+Font sizes Low-level font commands Font styles Typefaces
+Font sizes
+font sizes
+typeface sizes
+sizes of text
+
The following standard type size commands are supported by &latex;.
The table shows the command name and the corresponding actual font
size used (in points) with the 10pt, 11pt, and
-12pt document size options, respectively (see Document class options ).
-
-\tiny \scriptsize \footnotesize \small \normalsize \large \Large \LARGE \huge \Huge
-36
-7
-7
-7
- Command 10pt
11pt
12pt
- |
\tiny
- 5 6 6
- |
\scriptsize
- 7 8 8
- |
\footnotesize
- 8 9 10
- |
\small
- 9 10 10.95
- |
\normalsize
(default)
- 10 10.95 12
- |
\large
- 12 12 14.4
- |
\Large
- 14.4 14.4 17.28
- |
\LARGE
- 17.28 17.28 20.74
- |
\huge
- 20.74 20.74 24.88
- |
\Huge
- 24.88 24.88 24.88
- |
-
-The commands as listed here are “declaration forms”. The scope of
+12pt document size options, respectively (Document class
+options ).
+
+\tiny
+\scriptsize
+\footnotesize
+\small
+\normalsize
+\large
+\Large
+\LARGE
+\huge
+\Huge
+
+\normalsize
(default)24.88 24.88 24.88
+Command 10pt
11pt
12pt
+|
\tiny
+5 6 6
+ |
\scriptsize
+7 8 8
+ |
\footnotesize
+8 9 10
+ |
\small
+9 10 10.95
+ |
\normalsize
(default)
+10 10.95 12
+ |
\large
+12 12 14.4
+ |
\Large
+14.4 14.4 17.28
+ |
\LARGE
+17.28 17.28 20.74
+ |
\huge
+20.74 20.74 24.88
+ |
\Huge
+24.88 24.88 24.88
+ |
+
+The commands as listed here are &textldquo;declaration forms&textrdquo;. The scope of
the declaration form lasts until the next type style command or the
end of the current group. You can also use the environment form of
-these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}
.
+these commands; for instance, \begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}
.
-
-Low-level font commands
-Font sizes
-Typefaces
-
-
-Low-level font commands
-low-level font commands font commands, low-level
+Low-level font commands Font sizes Typefaces
+Low-level font commands
+low-level font commands
+font commands, low-level
+
These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
ones.
-\fontencoding{enc}
-\fontencoding Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1
and T1
.
+
+\fontencoding{enc}
+\fontencoding
+Select font encoding. Valid encodings include OT1
and T1
.
-\fontfamily{family}
-\fontfamily Select font family. Valid families include:
+\fontfamily{family}
+\fontfamily
+Select font family. Valid families include:
-• cmr
for Computer Modern Roman
-
- cmss
for Computer Modern Sans Serif
-
- cmtt
for Computer Modern Typewriter
-
-
+•
+• cmr
for Computer Modern Roman
+• cmss
for Computer Modern Sans Serif
+• cmtt
for Computer Modern Typewriter
+
and numerous others.
-\fontseries{series}
-\fontseries Select font series. Valid series include:
-
-• m
Medium (normal)
-
- b
Bold
-
- c
Condensed
-
- bc
Bold condensed
-
- bx
Bold extended
-
-
+\fontseries{series}
+\fontseries
+Select font series. Valid series include:
+
+•
+• m
Medium (normal)
+• b
Bold
+• c
Condensed
+• bc
Bold condensed
+• bx
Bold extended
+
and various other combinations.
-\fontshape{shape}
-\fontshape Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
-
-• n
Upright (normal)
-
- it
Italic
-
- sl
Slanted (oblique)
-
- sc
Small caps
-
- ui
Upright italics
-
- ol
Outline
-
-
+\fontshape{shape}
+\fontshape
+Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
+
+•
+• n
Upright (normal)
+• it
Italic
+• sl
Slanted (oblique)
+• sc
Small caps
+• ui
Upright italics
+• ol
Outline
+
The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
-\fontsize{size}{skip}
-\fontsize \baselineskip Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and
+\fontsize{size}{skip}
+\fontsize
+\baselineskip
+Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to and
the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a parameter
named \baselineskip
. The unit of both parameters defaults to
pt. The default \baselineskip
for the Computer Modern typeface
is 1.2 times the \fontsize
.
-\baselinestretch setspace
packagedouble spacing The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the
+\baselinestretch
+setspace
package
+double spacing
+The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the
\baselinestretch
parameter when the type size changes; the
-default is 1. However, the best way to “double space” a document,
+default is 1. However, the best way to &textldquo;double space&textrdquo; a document,
if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use the
setspace
package; see
-http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace .
+http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace .
-\linespread \linespread{factor}
-Equivalent to
-\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}
, and
+\linespread
+ \linespread{factor}
+Equivalent to
+\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{factor}
, and
therefore must be followed by \selectfont
to have any effect.
Best specified in the preamble, or use the setspace
package, as
described just above.
-\selectfont The changes made by calling the font commands described above do
+\selectfont
+The changes made by calling the font commands described above do
not come into effect until \selectfont
is called.
-\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}
-\usefont The same as invoking \fontencoding
, \fontfamily
,
+\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}
+\usefont
+The same as invoking \fontencoding
, \fontfamily
,
\fontseries
and \fontshape
with the given parameters,
followed by \selectfont
.
-
+
-
-Layout
-Sectioning
-Typefaces
-Top
-
-
-Layout
-layout commands
+Layout Sectioning Typefaces Top
+Layout
+layout commands
+
Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
-
-
-
-\onecolumn
-\twocolumn
-Layout
-
-
-\onecolumn
-\onecolumn one-column output
+\onecolumn Use one-column layout.
+
\twocolumn Use two-column layout.
+
\flushbottom Make all text pages the same height.
+
\raggedbottom Allow text pages of differing height.
+
Page layout parameters \headheight \footskip.
+
+
+
+\onecolumn \twocolumn Layout
+\onecolumn
+\onecolumn
+one-column output
+
The \onecolumn
declaration starts a new page and produces
single-column output. This is the default.
-
-\twocolumn
-\flushbottom
-\onecolumn
-Layout
-
-
-\twocolumn
-\twocolumn multicolumn text two-column output
+\twocolumn \flushbottom \onecolumn Layout
+\twocolumn
+\twocolumn
+multicolumn text
+two-column output
+
Synopsis:
-\twocolumn[text1col]
-
+
+\twocolumn[text1col]
+
+
The \twocolumn
declaration starts a new page and produces
two-column output. If the optional text1col argument is present,
it is typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting
@@ -888,269 +824,255 @@ starts.
These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
-\columnsep \columnsep
-The distance between columns (35pt by default).
+
+\columnsep \columnsep
+The distance between columns (35pt by default).
- \columnseprule \columnseprule
-The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule.
+ \columnseprule \columnseprule
+The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there is no rule.
-\columnwidth \columnwidth
-The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth
in
+ \columnwidth \columnwidth
+The width of the current column; this is equal to \textwidth
in
single-column text.
-
+
These parameters control float behavior in two-column output:
-\dbltopfraction \dbltopfraction
-Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied
+
+\dbltopfraction \dbltopfraction
+Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be occupied
by floats. Default .7, can be usefully redefined to (say)
.9 to avoid going to float pages so soon.
- \dblfloatpagefraction \dblfloatpagefraction
-The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats,
+ \dblfloatpagefraction \dblfloatpagefraction
+The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats,
for a two-column float page. Default .5.
-\dblfloatsep \dblfloatsep
-Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float
+ \dblfloatsep \dblfloatsep
+Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float
page. Default 12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and
11pt documents, 14pt plus2pt minus4pt for 12pt.
-\dbltextfloatsep \dbltextfloatsep
-Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page
+ \dbltextfloatsep \dbltextfloatsep
+Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a page
and the main text. Default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt.
-
+
-
-\flushbottom
-\raggedbottom
-\twocolumn
-Layout
-
-
-\flushbottom
+\flushbottom \raggedbottom \twocolumn Layout
+\flushbottom
+
+\flushbottom
-\flushbottom
The \flushbottom
declaration makes all text pages the same
height, adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the
page.
This is the default if twocolumn
mode is selected
-(see Document class options ).
+(Document class options ).
-
-\raggedbottom
-Page layout parameters
-\flushbottom
-Layout
-
-
-\raggedbottom
-\raggedbottom stretch, omitting vertical
+\raggedbottom Page layout parameters \flushbottom Layout
+\raggedbottom
+\raggedbottom
+stretch, omitting vertical
+
The \raggedbottom
declaration makes all pages the natural
height of the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be
stretched.
-
-Page layout parameters
-\raggedbottom
-Layout
-
-
-Page layout parameters
+Page layout parameters \raggedbottom Layout
+Page layout parameters
+
+page layout parameters
+parameters, page layout
+layout, page parameters for
+header, parameters for
+footer, parameters for
+running header and footer
-page layout parameters parameters, page layout layout, page parameters for header, parameters for footer, parameters for running header and footer
-\headheight \headheight
-Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is
+
+\headheight \headheight
+Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is
30pt, except in the book
class, where it varies with the
type size.
- \headsep \headsep
-Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
+ \headsep \headsep
+Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top of
the main text. Default is 25pt, except in the book
class, where it varies with the type size.
-\footskip \footskip
-Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
+ \footskip \footskip
+Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline of
the page footer. Default is 30pt, except in the book
class, where it varies with the type size.
-\linewidth \linewidth
-Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list
-(see list ). Specifically, it is smaller than \textwidth
by
+ \linewidth \linewidth
+Width of the current line, decreased for each nested list
+(list ). Specifically, it is smaller than \textwidth
by
the sum of \leftmargin
and \rightmargin
-(see itemize ). The default varies with the font size, paper
+(itemize ). The default varies with the font size, paper
width, two-column mode, etc. For an article
document in
-10pt, it's set to 345pt; in two-column mode, that
+10pt, it&textrsquo;s set to 345pt; in two-column mode, that
becomes 229.5pt.
-\textheight \textheight
-The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with
+ \textheight \textheight
+The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies with
the font size, document class, etc. For an article
or
-report
document in 10pt, it's set to
-43\baselineskip; for book
, it's 41\baselineskip.
-For 11pt, it's 38\baselineskip and for 12pt,
+report
document in 10pt, it&textrsquo;s set to
+43\baselineskip; for book
, it&textrsquo;s 41\baselineskip.
+For 11pt, it&textrsquo;s 38\baselineskip and for 12pt,
36\baselineskip.
-\textwidth \textwidth
-The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default varies
-as usual. For an article
or report
document, it's
+ \textwidth \textwidth
+The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default varies
+as usual. For an article
or report
document, it&textrsquo;s
345pt at 10pt, 360pt at 11pt, and
-390pt at 12pt. For a book
document, it's
+390pt at 12pt. For a book
document, it&textrsquo;s
4.5in at 10pt, and 5in at 11pt or
12pt.
In multi-column output, \textwidth
remains the width of the
entire page body, while \columnwidth
is the width of one column
-(see \twocolumn ).
+(\twocolumn ).
-In lists (see list ), \textwidth
remains the width of the
+In lists (list ), \textwidth
remains the width of the
entire page body (and \columnwidth
the width of the entire
column), while \linewidth
may decrease for nested lists.
-Inside a minipage (see minipage ) or \parbox
-(see \parbox ), all the width-related parameters are set to the
+Inside a minipage (minipage ) or \parbox
+(\parbox ), all the width-related parameters are set to the
specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of the
minipage
or \parbox
.
-\hsize For completeness: \hsize
is the &tex; primitive parameter used
+\hsize
+For completeness: \hsize
is the &tex; primitive parameter used
when text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal
&latex; documents.
- \topmargin \topmargin
-Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the
+ \topmargin \topmargin
+Space between the top of the &tex; page (one inch from the top of the
paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is computed
based on many other parameters: \paperheight − 2in −
\headheight − \headsep − \textheight − \footskip
, and
then divided by two.
-\topskip \topskip
-Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
+ \topskip \topskip
+Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline of
the first line of text. For the standard clases, the default is the
same as the font size, e.g., 10pt at 10pt.
-
+
-
-Sectioning
-Cross references
-Layout
-Top
-
-
-Sectioning
-sectioning
+Sectioning Cross references Layout Top
+Sectioning
+sectioning
+
Sectioning commands provide the means to structure your text into units:
-\part \part
-\chapter \chapter
-(report and book class only)
- \section \section
-\subsection \subsection
-\subsubsection \subsubsection
-\paragraph \paragraph
-\subparagraph \subparagraph
-
+
+\part \part
+\chapter \chapter
+(report and book class only)
+ \section \section
+\subsection \subsection
+\subsubsection \subsubsection
+\paragraph \paragraph
+\subparagraph \subparagraph
+
All sectioning commands take the same general form, e.g.,
-\chapter[toctitle]{title}
-
+
+\chapter[toctitle]{title}
+
+
In addition to providing the heading title in the main text, the
section title can appear in two other places:
--
+
+
The table of contents.
-
--
+
The running head at the top of the page.
-
-
+
You may not want the same text in these places as in the main text.
To handle this, the sectioning commands have an optional argument
toctitle that, when given, specifies the text for these other
places.
-*-form of sectioning commands Also, all sectioning commands have *
-forms that print
+*-form of sectioning commands
+Also, all sectioning commands have *
-forms that print
title as usual, but do not include a number and do not make an
entry in the table of contents. For instance:
-\section*{Preamble}
-
-\appendix appendix, creating The \appendix
command changes the way following sectional units
+
+\section*{Preamble}
+
+
+\appendix
+appendix, creating
+The \appendix
command changes the way following sectional units
are numbered. The \appendix
command itself generates no text
and does not affect the numbering of parts. The normal use of this
command is something like
-\chapter{A Chapter}
+
+\chapter{A Chapter}
&dots;
\appendix
-\chapter{The First Appendix}
-
-secnumdepth counter section numbers, printing The secnumdepth
counter controls printing of section numbers.
+\chapter{The First Appendix}
+
+
+secnumdepth counter
+section numbers, printing
+The secnumdepth
counter controls printing of section numbers.
The setting
-\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level}
-
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{level}
+
+
+
suppresses heading numbers at any depth , where
-chapter
is level zero. (See \setcounter .)
+chapter
is level zero. (\setcounter .)
-
-Cross references
-Environments
-Sectioning
-Top
-
-
-Cross references
-cross references
+Cross references Environments Sectioning Top
+Cross references
+cross references
+
One reason for numbering things like figures and equations is to refer
-the reader to them, as in “See Figure 3 for more details.”
+the reader to them, as in &textldquo;See Figure 3 for more details.&textrdquo;
-
-
-
-\label
-\pageref
-Cross references
-
-
-\label
-\label
+\label Assign a symbolic name to a piece of text.
+
\pageref Refer to a page number.
+
\ref Refer to a section, figure or similar.
+
+
+
+\label \pageref Cross references
+\label
+\label
+
Synopsis:
-\label{key}
-
+
+\label{key}
+
+
A \label
command appearing in ordinary text assigns to
key the number of the current sectional unit; one appearing
inside a numbered environment assigns that number to key.
@@ -1162,290 +1084,183 @@ punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished.
common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by
a colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes:
-ch
-for chapters
- sec
-for lower-level sectioning commands
- fig
-for figures
- tab
-for tables
- eq
-for equations
-
+
+ch
+for chapters
+ sec
+for lower-level sectioning commands
+ fig
+for figures
+ tab
+for tables
+ eq
+for equations
+
Thus, a label for a figure would look like fig:snark
or
fig.snark
.
-
-\pageref
-\ref
-\label
-Cross references
-
-
-\pageref{key}
-\pageref cross referencing with page number page number, cross referencing
+\pageref \ref \label Cross references
+\pageref{key}
+\pageref
+cross referencing with page number
+page number, cross referencing
+
Synopsis:
-\pageref{key}
-
-The \pageref
{key} command produces the page number of
+
+\pageref{key}
+
+
+The \pageref
{key} command produces the page number of
the place in the text where the corresponding
-\label
{key} command appears.
+\label
{key} command appears.
-
-\ref
-\pageref
-Cross references
-
-
-\ref{key}
-\ref cross referencing, symbolic section number, cross referencing equation number, cross referencing figure number, cross referencing footnote number, cross referencing
+\ref \pageref Cross references
+\ref{key}
+\ref
+cross referencing, symbolic
+section number, cross referencing
+equation number, cross referencing
+figure number, cross referencing
+footnote number, cross referencing
+
Synopsis:
-\ref{key}
-
+
+\ref{key}
+
+
The \ref
command produces the number of the sectional unit,
equation, footnote, figure, &dots;, of the corresponding
-\label
command (see \label ). It does not produce any text,
-such as the word `Section' or `Figure', just the bare number itself.
+\label
command (\label ). It does not produce any text,
+such as the word &textlsquo;Section&textrsquo; or &textlsquo;Figure&textrsquo;, just the bare number itself.
-
-Environments
-Line breaking
-Cross references
-Top
-
-
-Environments
-environments
-\begin \end
+Environments Line breaking Cross references Top
+Environments
+environments
+
+\begin
+\end
+
&latex; provides many environments for marking off certain text.
Each environment begins and ends in the same manner:
-\begin{envname}
+
+\begin{envname}
...
-\end{envname}
-
+\end{envname}
+
+
-
-
-
-abstract
-array
-Environments
-
-
-abstract
-
-abstract environment abstracts
+abstract Produce an abstract.
+
array Math arrays.
+
center Centered lines.
+
description Labelled lists.
+
displaymath Formulas that appear on their own line.
+
document Enclose the whole document.
+
enumerate Numbered lists.
+
eqnarray Sequences of aligned equations.
+
equation Displayed equation.
+
figure Floating figures.
+
flushleft Flushed left lines.
+
flushright Flushed right lines.
+
itemize Bulleted lists.
+
letter Letters.
+
list Generic list environment.
+
math In-line math.
+
minipage Miniature page.
+
picture Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
+
quotation Indented environment with paragraph indentation.
+
quote Indented environment with no paragraph indentation.
+
tabbing Align text arbitrarily.
+
table Floating tables.
+
tabular Align text in columns.
+
thebibliography Bibliography or reference list.
+
theorem Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+
titlepage For hand crafted title pages.
+
verbatim Simulating typed input.
+
verse For poetry and other things.
+
+
+
+abstract array Environments
+abstract
+
+abstract environment
+abstracts
+
Synopsis:
- \begin{abstract}
+
+\begin{abstract}
...
-\end{abstract}
-
+\end{abstract}
+
+
Environment for producing an abstract, possibly of multiple paragraphs.
-
-array
-center
-abstract
-Environments
-
-
-array
-array environment arrays, math
+array center abstract Environments
+array
+array environment
+arrays, math
+
Synopsis:
-\begin{array}{template}
-col1 text&col1 text&coln}\\
+
+\begin{array}{template}
+col1 text&col1 text&coln}\\
...
-\end{array}
-
+\end{array}
+
+
Math arrays are produced with the array
environment, normally
-within an equation
environment (see equation ). It has a
+within an equation
environment (equation ). It has a
single mandatory template argument describing the number of
columns and the alignment within them. Each column col is
specified by a single letter that tells how items in that row should
be formatted, as follows:
-c
-centered
- l
-flush left
- r
-flush right
-
-
-\\ (for array
) Column entries are separated by &
. Column entries may include
+
+c
+centered
+ l
+flush left
+ r
+flush right
+
+
+\\ (for array
)
+Column entries are separated by &
. Column entries may include
other &latex; commands. Each row of the array is terminated with
\\
.
-@{...} In the template, the construct @{text}
puts text
+&arobase;{...}
+In the template, the construct &arobase;{text}
puts text
between columns in each row.
-Here's an example:
+Here&textrsquo;s an example:
-\begin{equation}
- \begin{array}{lrc}
+
+\begin{equation}
+ \begin{array}{lrc}
left1 & right1 & centered1 \\
left2 & right2 & centered2 \\
- \end{array}
-\end{equation}
-
-\arraycolsep The \arraycolsep
parameter defines half the width of the space
-separating columns; the default is 5pt. See tabular , for other
+ \end{array}
+\end{equation}
+
+
+\arraycolsep
+The \arraycolsep
parameter defines half the width of the space
+separating columns; the default is 5pt. tabular , for other
parameters which affect formatting in array
environments,
namely \arrayrulewidth
and \arraystretch
.
@@ -1453,45 +1268,38 @@ namely \arrayrulewidth
and \arraystretch
.
-
-center
-description
-array
-Environments
-
-
-center
+center description array Environments
+center
+
+center environment
+centering text, environment for
-center environment centering text, environment for
Synopsis:
-\begin{center}
+
+\begin{center}
line1 \\
line2 \\
-\end{center}
-
-\\ (for center
) The center
environment allows you to create a paragraph
+\end{center}
+
+
+\\ (for center
)
+The center
environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are centered within the left and right
margins on the current page. Each line is terminated with the
string \\
.
-
-
-
-\centering
-center
-
-
-\centering
-
-\centering centering text, declaration for
+\centering Declaration form of the center
environment.
+
+
+
+\centering center
+\centering
+
+\centering
+centering text, declaration for
+
The \centering
declaration corresponds to the center
environment. This declaration can be used inside an environment such
as quote
or in a parbox
. Thus, the text of a figure or
@@ -1500,446 +1308,511 @@ command at the beginning of the figure or table environment.
Unlike the center
environment, the \centering
command
does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how &latex; formats
-paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of
+paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the scope of
the declaration must contain the blank line or \end
command (of
an environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-Here's an example:
+Here&textrsquo;s an example:
-\begin{quote}
+
+\begin{quote}
\centering
first line \\
second line \\
-\end{quote}
-
+\end{quote}
+
+
-
-description
-displaymath
-center
-Environments
-
-
-description
+description displaymath center Environments
+description
+
+description environment
+labelled lists, creating
+description lists, creating
-description environment labelled lists, creating description lists, creating
Synopsis:
-\begin{description}
+
+\begin{description}
\item [label1] item1
\item [label2] item2
...
-\end{description}
-
-\item The description
environment is used to make labelled lists. Each
+\end{description}
+
+
+\item
+The description
environment is used to make labelled lists. Each
label is typeset in bold, flush right. The item text may
contain multiple paragraphs.
-bold typewriter, avoiding typewriter labels in lists Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if
-you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt
, you'll get
-bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]
. This
+bold typewriter, avoiding
+typewriter labels in lists
+Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if
+you typeset a label in typewriter using \texttt
, you&textrsquo;ll get
+bold typewriter: \item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]
. This
may be too bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use
-\tt
, which resets all other style variations: \item[{\tt
-plain typewriter}]
.
+\tt
, which resets all other style variations: \item[{\tt
+plain typewriter}]
.
-For details about list spacing, see itemize .
+For details about list spacing, see itemize .
-
-displaymath
-document
-description
-Environments
-
-
-displaymath
+displaymath document description Environments
+displaymath
+
+displaymath environment
-displaymath environment
Synopsis:
-\begin{displaymath}
+
+\begin{displaymath}
math
-\end{displaymath}
-
-or
+\end{displaymath}
+
+
+or
-\[math\]
-
+
+\[math\]
+
+
The displaymath
environment (\[...\]
is a synonym)
typesets the math text on its own line, centered by default.
The global fleqn
option makes equations flush left; see
-Document class options .
+Document class options .
No equation number is added to displaymath
text; to get an
-equation number, use the equation
environment (see equation ).
+equation number, use the equation
environment (equation ).
-
-document
-enumerate
-displaymath
-Environments
-
-
-document
+document enumerate displaymath Environments
+document
+
+document environment
-document environment
The document
environment encloses the body of a document.
-It is required in every &latex; document. See Starting & ending .
+It is required in every &latex; document. Starting & ending .
-
-enumerate
-eqnarray
-document
-Environments
-
-
-enumerate
+enumerate eqnarray document Environments
+enumerate
+
+enumerate environment
+lists of items, numbered
-enumerate environment lists of items, numbered
Synopsis:
-\begin{enumerate}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
\item item1
\item item2
...
-\end{enumerate}
-
+\end{enumerate}
+
+
The enumerate
environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations
can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as
-itemize
(see itemize ) and description
-(see description ).
+itemize
(itemize ) and description
+(description ).
-\item Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item
command.
+\item
+Each item of an enumerated list begins with an \item
command.
There must be at least one \item
command within the environment.
By default, the numbering at each level is done like this:
- 1., 2., &dots;
-
- (a), (b), &dots;
-
- i., ii., &dots;
-
- A., B., &dots;
-
-
-
-\enumi \enumii \enumiii \enumiv The enumerate
environment uses the counters \enumi
-through \enumiv
counters (see Counters ). If the optional
+
+1., 2., &dots;
+ (a), (b), &dots;
+ i., ii., &dots;
+ A., B., &dots;
+
+
+\enumi
+\enumii
+\enumiii
+\enumiv
+The enumerate
environment uses the counters \enumi
+through \enumiv
counters (Counters ). If the optional
argument to \item
is given, the counter is not incremented for
that item.
-\labelenumi \labelenumii \labelenumiii \labelenumiv The enumerate
environment uses the commands \labelenumi
+\labelenumi
+\labelenumii
+\labelenumiii
+\labelenumiv
+The enumerate
environment uses the commands \labelenumi
through \labelenumiv
to produce the default label. So, you can
-use \renewcommand
to change the labels (see \newcommand & \renewcommand ). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase
+use \renewcommand
to change the labels (\newcommand &
+\renewcommand ). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase
letters:
-\Alph example \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
-
+\Alph example
+
+\renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
+
+
-
-eqnarray
-equation
-enumerate
-Environments
-
-
-eqnarray
+eqnarray equation enumerate Environments
+eqnarray
+
+eqnarray environment
+equations, aligning
+aligning equations
-eqnarray environment equations, aligning aligning Equations
-\begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*
)
+align environment, from amsmath
+amsmath package, replacing eqnarray
+Madsen, Lars
+First, a caveat: the eqnarray
environment has some infelicities
+which cannot be overcome; the article &textldquo;Avoid eqnarray!&textrdquo;&noeos; by Lars
+Madsen describes them in detail
+(http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf ). The bottom
+line is that it is better to use the align
environment (and
+others) from the amsmath
package.
+
+Nevertheless, here is a description of eqnarray
:
+
+
+\begin{eqnarray} (or eqnarray*
)
formula1 \\
formula2 \\
...
-\end{eqnarray}
-
-\\ (for eqnarray
) The eqnarray
environment is used to display a sequence of
+\end{eqnarray}
+
+
+\\ (for eqnarray
)
+The eqnarray
environment is used to display a sequence of
equations or inequalities. It is very much like a three-column
array
environment, with consecutive rows separated by \\
and consecutive items within a row separated by an &
.
-\\* (for eqnarray
) \\*
can also be used to separate equations, with its normal
+\\* (for eqnarray
)
+\\*
can also be used to separate equations, with its normal
meaning of not allowing a page break at that line.
-\nonumber equation numbers, omitting An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
+\nonumber
+equation numbers, omitting
+An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
\nonumber
command. Alternatively, The *
-form of the
-environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}
) will
+environment (\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}
) will
omit equation numbering entirely, while otherwise being the same as
eqnarray
.
-\lefteqn The command \lefteqn
is used for splitting long formulas across
+\lefteqn
+The command \lefteqn
is used for splitting long formulas across
lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
zero width.
-
-equation
-figure
-eqnarray
-Environments
-
-
-equation
+equation figure eqnarray Environments
+equation
+
+equation environment
+equations, environment for
+formulas, environment for
-equation environment equations, environment for formulas, environment for
Synopsis:
-\begin{equation}
+
+\begin{equation}
math
-\end{equation}
-
+\end{equation}
+
+
The equation
environment starts a displaymath
-environment (see displaymath ), e.g., centering the math text
+environment (displaymath ), e.g., centering the math text
on the page, and also places an equation number in the right margin.
-
-figure
-flushleft
-equation
-Environments
-
-
-figure
-figure inserting figures figures, inserting
-\begin{figure[*]}[placement]
+figure flushleft equation Environments
+figure
+figure
+inserting figures
+figures, inserting
+
+
+\begin{figure[*]}[placement]
figbody
-\label{label}
-\caption[loftitle]{text}
-\end{figure}
-
+\label{label}
+\caption[loftitle]{text}
+\end{figure}
+
+
Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-instead “floated” to a convenient place, such as the top of a page.
+instead &textldquo;floated&textrdquo; to a convenient place, such as the top of a page.
Figures will not be split between two pages.
When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a
full-width figure (across both columns).
+placement of floats
+specifier, float placement
The optional argument [placement]
determines where &latex; will try
to place your figure. There are four places where &latex; can possibly
put a float:
-t
-(Top)—at the top of a text page.
+
+t
+(Top)&textmdash;at the top of a text page.
-b
-(Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. However, b
is not
+ b
+(Bottom)&textmdash;at the bottom of a text page. However, b
is not
allowed for full-width floats (figure*
) with double-column
output. To ameliorate this, use the stfloats
or
dblfloatfix
package, but see the discussion at caveats in the
-FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat .
-
-h
-float
package (Here)—at the position in the text where the figure environment
-appears. However, this is not allowed by itself, t
is
-automatically added. To absolutely force a figure to appear “here”,
-use the float
and use its H
placement letter. (That
-package also provides other options.)
-
-p
-(Page of floats)—on a separate float page, which is a page
+FAQ: http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat .
+
+h
+float
package
+(Here)&textmdash;at the position in the text where the figure environment
+appears. However, this is not allowed by itself; t
is
+automatically added.
+
+here, putting floats
+float
package
+To absolutely force a figure to appear &textldquo;here&textrdquo;, you can
+\usepackage{float}
and use the H
specifier which it
+defines. For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere .
+
+p
+(Page of floats)&textmdash;on a separate float page, which is a page
containing no text, only floats.
-
+ !
+Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, &latex;
+ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can appear
+and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the page.
+The !
specifier does not mean &textldquo;put the float here&textrdquo;;
+see above.
+
+
The standard report and article classes use the default placement
tbp
.
-The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands, etc.
-you wish.
+The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, &latex; commands,
+etc.&noeos; you wish.
-\caption The \caption
command specifies caption text for the
+\caption
+The \caption
command specifies caption text for the
figure. The caption is numbered by default. If loftitle is
present, it is used in the list of figures instead of text
-(see Tables of contents ).
+(Tables of contents ).
-
-\bottomfraction The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at
+Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text:
+
+
+\bottomfraction
+The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occuped by floats at
the bottom; default .3.
- \floatpagefraction \floatpagefraction
-The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
+\floatpagefraction \floatpagefraction
+The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by floats;
default .5.
- \floatsep \floatsep
-Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
+ \textfraction \textfraction
+Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+different page. The default is .2.
+
+\topfraction \topfraction
+Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+floats; default .7.
+
+
+Parameters relating to vertical space around floats:
+
+
+\floatsep \floatsep
+Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default
12pt plus2pt minus2pt.
-\intextsep \intextsep
-Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
+ \intextsep \intextsep
+Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text; default
12pt plus2pt minus2pt for 10pt and 11pt styles,
14pt plus4pt minus4pt for 12pt.
-\textfloatsep \textfloatsep
-Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+ \textfloatsep \textfloatsep
+Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
default 20pt plus2pt minus4pt.
+
+
+Parameters relating to the number of floats on a page:
-\textfraction \textfraction
-Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
-much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
-different page. The default is .2.
+
+\bottomnumber \bottomnumber
+Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text page;
+default 1.
- \topfraction \topfraction
-Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
-floats; default is .7.
+ \topnumber \topnumber
+Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+default 2.
-
+\totalnumber \totalnumber
+Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+
+The principal &tex; FAQ entry relating to floats:
+http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats .
+
-
-flushleft
-flushright
-figure
-Environments
-
-
-flushleft
-flushleft environment left-justifying text, environment for ragged right text, environment for
-\begin{flushleft}
+flushleft flushright figure Environments
+flushleft
+flushleft environment
+left-justifying text, environment for
+ragged right text, environment for
+
+
+\begin{flushleft}
line1 \\
line2 \\
...
-\end{flushleft}
-
-\\ for flushleft
The flushleft
environment allows you to create a paragraph
+\end{flushleft}
+
+
+\\ for flushleft
+The flushleft
environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
right Each line must be terminated with the string \\
.
-
-
-
-\raggedright
-flushleft
-
-
-\raggedright
-\raggedright ragged right text left-justifying text justification, ragged right
+\raggedright Declaration form of the flushleft
environment.
+
+
+
+\raggedright flushleft
+\raggedright
+\raggedright
+ragged right text
+left-justifying text
+justification, ragged right
+
The \raggedright
declaration corresponds to the
flushleft
environment. This declaration can be used inside an
environment such as quote
or in a parbox
.
Unlike the flushleft
environment, the \raggedright
command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
-formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the
scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end
command that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-flushright
-itemize
-flushleft
-Environments
-
-
-flushright
-flushright environment ragged left text, environment for right-justifying text, environment for
-\begin{flushright}
+flushright itemize flushleft Environments
+flushright
+flushright environment
+ragged left text, environment for
+right-justifying text, environment for
+
+
+\begin{flushright}
line1 \\
line2 \\
...
-\end{flushright}
-
-\\ (for flushright
) The flushright
environment allows you to create a paragraph
+\end{flushright}
+
+
+\\ (for flushright
)
+The flushright
environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
left. Each line must be terminated with the string \\
.
-
-
-
-\raggedleft
-flushright
-
-
-\raggedleft
-\raggedleft ragged left text justification, ragged left right-justifying text
+\raggedleft Declaration form of the flushright
environment.
+
+
+
+\raggedleft flushright
+\raggedleft
+\raggedleft
+ragged left text
+justification, ragged left
+right-justifying text
+
The \raggedleft
declaration corresponds to the
flushright
environment. This declaration can be used inside an
environment such as quote
or in a parbox
.
Unlike the flushright
environment, the \raggedleft
command does not start a new paragraph; it only changes how &latex;
-formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the
+formats paragraph units. To affect a paragraph unit&textrsquo;s format, the
scope of the declaration must contain the blank line or \end
command that ends the paragraph unit.
-
-itemize
-letter
-flushright
-Environments
-
-
-itemize
-itemize environment \item lists of items unordered lists bulleted lists
+itemize letter flushright Environments
+itemize
+itemize environment
+\item
+lists of items
+unordered lists
+bulleted lists
+
Synopsis:
-\begin{itemize}
+
+\begin{itemize}
\item item1
\item item2
...
-\end{itemize}
-
-The itemize
environment produces an “unordered”, “bulleted”
+\end{itemize}
+
+
+The itemize
environment produces an &textldquo;unordered&textrdquo;, &textldquo;bulleted&textrdquo;
list. Itemizations can be nested within one another, up to four
levels deep. They can also be nested within other paragraph-making
-environments, such as enumerate
(see enumerate ).
+environments, such as enumerate
(enumerate ).
Each item of an itemize
list begins with an \item
command.
There must be at least one \item
command within the environment.
By default, the marks at each level look like this:
- • (bullet)
-
- -- (bold en-dash)
-
- * (asterisk)
-
- . (centered dot, rendered here as a period)
-
-
-
-\labelitemi \labelitemii \labelitemiii \labelitemiv The itemize
environment uses the commands \labelitemi
+
+• (bullet)
+ -- (bold en-dash)
+ * (asterisk)
+ . (centered dot, rendered here as a period)
+
+
+\labelitemi
+\labelitemii
+\labelitemiii
+\labelitemiv
+The itemize
environment uses the commands \labelitemi
through \labelitemiv
to produce the default label. So, you can
use \renewcommand
to change the labels. For instance, to have
the first level use diamonds:
-\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
-
-\leftmargin \leftmargini \leftmarginii \leftmarginiii \leftmarginiv \leftmarginv \leftmarginvi The \leftmargini
through \leftmarginvi
parameters define
+
+\renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\diamond$}
+
+
+\leftmargin
+\leftmargini
+\leftmarginii
+\leftmarginiii
+\leftmarginiv
+\leftmarginv
+\leftmarginvi
+The \leftmargini
through \leftmarginvi
parameters define
the distance between the left margin of the enclosing environment and
the left margin of the list. By convention, \leftmargin
is set
to the appropriate \leftmarginN
when a new level of
@@ -1949,106 +1822,106 @@ nesting is entered.
2.5em (first level), and are a bit reduced in two-column mode.
This example greatly reduces the margin space for outermost lists:
-\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
-
+
+\setlength{\leftmargini}{1.25em} % default 2.5em
+
+
Some parameters that affect list formatting:
-\itemindent \itemindent
-Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero.
+
+\itemindent \itemindent
+Extra indentation before each item in a list; default zero.
- \labelsep \labelsep
-Space between the label and text of an item; default .5em.
+ \labelsep \labelsep
+Space between the label and text of an item; default .5em.
-\labelwidth \labelwidth
-Width of the label; default 2em, or 1.5em in two-column mode.
+ \labelwidth \labelwidth
+Width of the label; default 2em, or 1.5em in two-column mode.
-\listparindent \listparindent
-Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a
+ \listparindent \listparindent
+Extra indentation added to second and subsequent paragraphs within a
list item; default 0pt.
-\rightmargin \rightmargin
-Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the
+ \rightmargin \rightmargin
+Horizontal distance between the right margin of the list and the
enclosing environment; default 0pt, except in the quote
,
quotation
, and verse
environments, where it is set equal
to \leftmargin
.
-
+
Parameters affecting vertical spacing between list items (rather
loose, by default).
-\itemsep \itemsep
-Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt
+
+\itemsep \itemsep
+Vertical space between items. The default is 2pt plus1pt
minus1pt
for 10pt
documents, 3pt plus2pt minus1pt
for
11pt
, and 4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt
for 12pt
.
-
\parsep \parsep
-Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults
+ \parsep \parsep
+Extra vertical space between paragraphs within a list item. Defaults
are the same as \itemsep
.
-\topsep \topsep
-Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph.
+ \topsep \topsep
+Vertical space between the first item and the preceding paragraph.
For top-level lists, the default is 8pt plus2pt minus4pt
for
10pt
documents, 9pt plus3pt minus5pt
for 11pt
,
and 10pt plus4pt minus6pt
for 12pt
. These are reduced
for nested lists.
-\partopsep \partopsep
-Extra space added to \topsep
when the list environment starts a
+ \partopsep \partopsep
+Extra space added to \topsep
when the list environment starts a
paragraph. The default is 2pt plus1pt minus1pt
for 10pt
documents, 3pt plus1pt minus1pt
for 11pt
, and 3pt
plus2pt minus2pt
for 12pt
.
-
+
-\parskip example Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
+\parskip example
+Especially for lists with short items, it may be desirable to elide
space between items. Here is an example defining an itemize*
environment with no extra spacing between items, or between paragraphs
within a single item (\parskip
is not list-specific,
-see \parskip ):
-
-\newenvironment{itemize*}%
- {\begin{itemize}%
- \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
- \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
- {\end{itemize}}
-
-
-
-
-letter
-list
-itemize
-Environments
-
-
-letter
environment: writing letters
-letter
-This environment is used for creating letters. See Letters .
-
-
-
-
-list
-math
-letter
-Environments
-
-
-list
-list lists of items, generic
+\parskip ):
+
+
+\newenvironment{itemize*}%
+ {\begin{itemize}%
+ \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ {\end{itemize}}
+
+
+
+
+letter list itemize Environments
+letter
environment: writing letters
+letter
+
+This environment is used for creating letters. Letters .
+
+
+
+list math letter Environments
+list
+list
+lists of items, generic
+
The list
environment is a generic environment which is used for
defining many of the more specific environments. It is seldom used in
documents, but often in macros.
-\begin{list}{labeling}{spacing}
+
+\begin{list}{labeling}{spacing}
\item item1
\item item2
...
-\end{list}
-
+\end{list}
+
+
The mandatory labeling argument specifies how items should be
labelled (unless the optional argument is supplied to \item
).
This argument is a piece of text that is inserted in a box to form the
@@ -2056,92 +1929,93 @@ label. It can and usually does contain other &latex; commands.
The mandatory spacing argument contains commands to change the
spacing parameters for the list. This argument will most often be
-empty, i.e., {}
, which leaves the default spacing.
+empty, i.e., {}
, which leaves the default spacing.
The width used for typesetting the list items is specified by
-\linewidth
(see Page layout parameters ).
+\linewidth
(Page layout parameters ).
-
-math
-minipage
-list
-Environments
-
-
-math
+math minipage list Environments
+math
+
+math environment
+in-line formulas
-math environment in-line formulas
Synopsis:
-\begin{math}
+
+\begin{math}
math
-\end{math}
-
+\end{math}
+
+
The math
environment inserts the given math within the
running text. \(...\))
and $...$
are synonyms.
-See Math formulas .
+Math formulas .
-
-minipage
-picture
-math
-Environments
-
-
-minipage
+minipage picture math Environments
+minipage
+
+minipage environment
+minipage, creating a
-minipage environment minipage, creating a
-\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width}
+
+\begin{minipage}[position][height][inner-pos]{width}
text
-\end{minipage}
-
+\end{minipage}
+
+
The minipage
environment typesets its body text in a
block that will not be broken across pages. This is similar to the
-\parbox
command (see \parbox ), but unlike \parbox
,
+\parbox
command (\parbox ), but unlike \parbox
,
other paragraph-making environments can be used inside a minipage.
-The arguments are the same as for \parbox
(see \parbox ).
+The arguments are the same as for \parbox
(\parbox ).
-indentation of paragraphs, in minipage paragraph indentation, in minipage \parindent By default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage
+indentation of paragraphs, in minipage
+paragraph indentation, in minipage
+\parindent
+By default, paragraphs are not indented in the minipage
environment. You can restore indentation with a command such as
-\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}
command.
+\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}
command.
-footnotes in figures figures, footnotes in Footnotes in a minipage
environment are handled in a way that is
+footnotes in figures
+figures, footnotes in
+Footnotes in a minipage
environment are handled in a way that is
particularly useful for putting footnotes in figures or tables. A
\footnote
or \footnotetext
command puts the footnote at
the bottom of the minipage instead of at the bottom of the page, and it
uses the \mpfootnote
counter instead of the ordinary
-footnote
counter (see Counters ).
+footnote
counter (Counters ).
-However, don't put one minipage inside another if you are using
+However, don&textrsquo;t put one minipage inside another if you are using
footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.
-
-picture
-quotation
-minipage
-Environments
-
-
-picture
+picture quotation minipage Environments
+picture
+
+picture
+creating pictures
+pictures, creating
-picture creating pictures pictures, creating
-\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+
+\begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
&dots; picture commands &dots;
-\end{picture}
-
-\unitlength The picture
environment allows you to create just about any
+\end{picture}
+
+
+\unitlength
+The picture
environment allows you to create just about any
kind of picture you want containing text, lines, arrows and circles.
You tell &latex; where to put things in the picture by specifying
their coordinates. A coordinate is a number that may have a decimal
-point and a minus sign—a number like 5
, 0.3
or
+point and a minus sign&textmdash;a number like 5
, 0.3
or
-3.1416
. A coordinate specifies a length in multiples of the
unit length \unitlength
, so if \unitlength
has been set
to 1cm
, then the coordinate 2.54 specifies a length of 2.54
@@ -2159,7 +2033,7 @@ the parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
The picture
environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
position
. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
-argument's x- and y-coordinates.
+argument&textrsquo;s x- and y-coordinates.
The picture
environment also has an optional position
argument, following the size
argument, that can change the
@@ -2169,9 +2043,11 @@ coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
(thereby determining the origin). For example, if \unitlength
has been set to 1mm
, the command
-\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
-
-produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200
+
+\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
+
+
+produces a picture of width 100 millimeters and height 200
millimeters, whose lower-left corner is the point (10,20) and whose
upper-right corner is therefore the point (110,220). When you first
draw a picture, you typically omit the optional argument, leaving the
@@ -2179,112 +2055,57 @@ origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
picture by shifting everything, you can just add the appropriate
optional argument.
-The environment's mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the
+The environment&textrsquo;s mandatory argument determines the nominal size of the
picture. This need bear no relation to how large the picture really is;
&latex; will happily allow you to put things outside the picture, or even
-off the page. The picture's nominal size is used by &latex; in determining
+off the page. The picture&textrsquo;s nominal size is used by &latex; in determining
how much room to leave for it.
Everything that appears in a picture is drawn by the \put
command. The command
-\put (11.3,-.3){...}
-
-puts the object specified by ...
in the
+
+\put (11.3,-.3){...}
+
+
+puts the object specified by ...
in the
picture, with its reference point at coordinates .
The reference points for various objects will be described below.
-lR box The \put
command creates an LR box. You can put anything
-that can go in an \mbox
(see \mbox ) in the text argument of
+lR box
+The \put
command creates an LR box. You can put anything
+that can go in an \mbox
(\mbox ) in the text argument of
the \put
command. When you do this, the reference point will
be the lower left corner of the box.
The picture
commands are described in the following sections.
-
-
-
-\circle
-\makebox (picture)
-picture
-
-
-\circle
-\circle
-\circle[*]{diameter}
-
+\circle Draw a circle.
+
\makebox (picture) Draw a box of the specified size.
+
\framebox (picture) Draw a box with a frame around it.
+
\dashbox Draw a dashed box.
+
\frame Draw a frame around an object.
+
\line Draw a straight line.
+
\linethickness Set the line thickness.
+
\thicklines A heavier line thickness.
+
\thinlines The default line thickness.
+
\multiput Draw multiple instances of an object.
+
\oval Draw an ellipse.
+
\put Place an object at a specified place.
+
\shortstack Make a pile of objects.
+
\vector Draw a line with an arrow.
+
+
+
+\circle \makebox (picture) picture
+\circle
+\circle
+
+
+\circle[*]{diameter}
+
+
The \circle
command produces a circle with a diameter as close
to the specified one as possible. The *
-form of the command
draws a solid circle.
@@ -2293,16 +2114,11 @@ draws a solid circle.
-
-\makebox (picture)
-\framebox (picture)
-\circle
-picture
-
-
-\makebox
-\makebox (picture)
-\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}
+\makebox (picture) \framebox (picture) \circle picture
+\makebox
+\makebox (picture)
+
+\makebox(width,height)[position]{...}
The \makebox
command for the picture environment is similar to
the normal \makebox
command except that you must specify a
@@ -2311,61 +2127,58 @@ the normal \makebox
command except that you must specify a
The optional argument, [position]
, specifies the quadrant that
your text appears in. You may select up to two of the following:
-t
-Moves the item to the top of the rectangle.
+
+t
+Moves the item to the top of the rectangle.
-b
-Moves the item to the bottom.
+ b
+Moves the item to the bottom.
-l
-Moves the item to the left.
+ l
+Moves the item to the left.
-r
-Moves the item to the right.
+ r
+Moves the item to the right.
-
+
-See \makebox .
+\makebox .
-
-\framebox (picture)
-\dashbox
-\makebox (picture)
-picture
-
-
-\framebox
-\framebox
+\framebox (picture) \dashbox \makebox (picture) picture
+\framebox
+\framebox
+
Synopsis:
-\framebox(width,height)[pos]{...}
-
+
+\framebox(width,height)[pos]{...}
+
+
The \framebox
command is like \makebox
(see previous
section), except that it puts a frame around the outside of the box
that it creates.
-\fboxrule \fboxsep The \framebox
command produces a rule of thickness
+\fboxrule
+\fboxsep
+The \framebox
command produces a rule of thickness
\fboxrule
, and leaves a space \fboxsep
between the rule
and the contents of the box.
-
-\dashbox
-\frame
-\framebox (picture)
-picture
-
-
-\dashbox
-
-\dashbox
+\dashbox \frame \framebox (picture) picture
+\dashbox
+
+\dashbox
+
Draws a box with a dashed line. Synopsis:
-\dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text}
-
+
+\dashbox{dlen}(rwidth,rheight)[pos]{text}
+
+
\dashbox
creates a dashed rectangle around text in a
picture
environment. Dashes are dlen units long, and the
rectangle has overall width rwidth and height rheight.
@@ -2376,38 +2189,32 @@ multiples of the dlen
.
-
-\frame
-\line
-\dashbox
-picture
-
-
-\frame
-\frame
+\frame \line \dashbox picture
+\frame
+\frame
+
Synopsis:
-\frame{text}
-
+
+\frame{text}
+
+
The \frame
command puts a rectangular frame around text.
The reference point is the bottom left corner of the frame. No extra
space is put between the frame and the object.
-
-\line
-\linethickness
-\frame
-picture
-
-
-\line
-\line
+\line \linethickness \frame picture
+\line
+\line
+
Synopsis:
-\line(xslope,yslope){length}
-
+
+\line(xslope,yslope){length}
+
+
The \line
command draws a line with the given length and
slope xslope/yslope.
@@ -2418,16 +2225,11 @@ see the curve2e
and many many other packages on CTAN.
-
-\linethickness
-\thicklines
-\line
-picture
-
-
-\linethickness
-\linethickness
-The \linethickness{dim}
command declares the thickness
+\linethickness \thicklines \line picture
+\linethickness
+\linethickness
+
+The \linethickness{dim}
command declares the thickness
of horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment to be
dim, which must be a positive length.
@@ -2436,48 +2238,35 @@ circles, or the quarter circles drawn by \oval
.
-
-\thicklines
-\thinlines
-\linethickness
-picture
-
-
-\thicklines
-\thicklines
+\thicklines \thinlines \linethickness picture
+\thicklines
+\thicklines
+
The \thicklines
command is an alternate line thickness for
horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment;
-cf. \linethickness and \thinlines .
+cf. \linethickness and \thinlines .
-
-\thinlines
-\multiput
-\thicklines
-picture
-
-
-\thinlines
-\thinlines
+\thinlines \multiput \thicklines picture
+\thinlines
+\thinlines
+
The \thinlines
command is the default line thickness for
horizontal and vertical lines in a picture environment;
-cf. \linethickness and \thicklines .
+cf. \linethickness and \thicklines .
-
-\multiput
-\oval
-\thinlines
-picture
-
-
-\multiput
-\multiput
+\multiput \oval \thinlines picture
+\multiput
+\multiput
+
Synopsis:
- \multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj}
-
+
+\multiput(x,y)(delta_x,delta_y){n}{obj}
+
+
The \multiput
command copies the object obj in a regular
pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position
, then at , and so on,
@@ -2485,96 +2274,86 @@ pattern across a picture. obj is first placed at position
-
-\oval
-\put
-\multiput
-picture
-
-
-\oval
-\oval
+\oval \put \multiput picture
+\oval
+\oval
+
Synopsis:
-\oval(width,height)[portion]
-
+
+\oval(width,height)[portion]
+
+
The \oval
command produces a rectangle with rounded corners.
The optional argument portion allows you to select part of the
oval via the following:
-t
-selects the top portion;
- b
-selects the bottom portion;
- r
-selects the right portion;
- l
-selects the left portion.
-
-
-The “corners” of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
-maximum radius of 20pt , so large “ovals” will look more like
+
+t
+selects the top portion;
+ b
+selects the bottom portion;
+ r
+selects the right portion;
+ l
+selects the left portion.
+
+
+The &textldquo;corners&textrdquo; of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
+maximum radius of 20pt , so large &textldquo;ovals&textrdquo; will look more like
boxes with rounded corners.
-
-\put
-\shortstack
-\oval
-picture
-
-
-\put
-
-\put
-\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }
+\put \shortstack \oval picture
+\put
+
+\put
+
+\put(x coord,y coord){ ... }
The \put
command places the item specified by the mandatory
argument at the given coordinates.
-
-\shortstack
-\vector
-\put
-picture
-
-
-\shortstack
-\shortstack
+\shortstack \vector \put picture
+\shortstack
+\shortstack
+
Synopsis:
-\shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...}
-
+
+\shortstack[position]{...\\...\\...}
+
+
The \shortstack
command produces a stack of objects. The valid
positions are:
-r
-Move the objects to the right of the stack.
- l
-Move the objects to the left of the stack
- c
-Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
-
+
+r
+Move the objects to the right of the stack.
+ l
+Move the objects to the left of the stack
+ c
+Move the objects to the centre of the stack (default)
+
-\\ (for \shortstack
objects) Objects are separated with \\
.
+\\ (for \shortstack
objects)
+Objects are separated with \\
.
-
-\vector
-\shortstack
-picture
-
-
-\vector
-\vector
+\vector \shortstack picture
+\vector
+\vector
+
Synopsis:
-\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}
-
+
+\vector(x-slope,y-slope){length}
+
+
The \vector
command draws a line with an arrow of the specified
length and slope. The and values must lie between
−4 and +4, inclusive.
@@ -2582,22 +2361,22 @@ length and slope. The and values must lie between
-
-quotation
-quote
-picture
-Environments
-
-
-quotation
+quotation quote picture Environments
+quotation
+
+quotation
+quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying
+displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation
+paragraph indentations in quoted text
-quotation quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation paragraph indentations in quoted text
Synopsis:
-\begin{quotation}
+
+\begin{quotation}
text
-\end{quotation}
-
+\end{quotation}
+
+
The margins of the quotation
environment are indented on both
the left and the right. The text is justified at both margins.
Leaving a blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
@@ -2607,22 +2386,22 @@ normally.
-
-quote
-tabbing
-quotation
-Environments
-
-
-quote
+quote tabbing quotation Environments
+quote
+
+quote
+quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying
+displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation
+paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting
-quote quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting
Snyopsis:
-\begin{quote}
+
+\begin{quote}
text
-\end{quote}
-
+\end{quote}
+
+
The margins of the quote
environment are indented on both the
left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a
blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
@@ -2631,24 +2410,24 @@ blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
-
-tabbing
-table
-quote
-Environments
-
-
-tabbing
+tabbing table quote Environments
+tabbing
+
+tabbing environment
+tab stops, using
+lining text up using tab stops
+alignment via tabbing
-tabbing environment tab stops, using lining text up in columns using tab stops alignment via tabbing
Synopsis:
-\begin{tabbing}
+
+\begin{tabbing}
row1col1 \= row1col2 \= row1col3 \= row1col4 \\
row2col1 \> \> row2col3 \\
...
-\end{tabbing}
-
+\end{tabbing}
+
+
The tabbing
environment provides a way to align text in
columns. It works by setting tab stops and tabbing to them much as
was done on an ordinary typewriter. It is best suited for cases where
@@ -2659,70 +2438,77 @@ environment.
The following commands can be used inside a tabbing
enviroment:
-\\ (tabbing) \\ (tabbing)
-End a line.
+
+\\ (tabbing) \\ (tabbing)
+End a line.
- \= (tabbing) \= (tabbing)
-Sets a tab stop at the current position.
+ \= (tabbing) \= (tabbing)
+Sets a tab stop at the current position.
-\> (tabbing) \> (tabbing)
-\> Advances to the next tab stop.
+\> (tabbing) \> (tabbing)
+\>
+Advances to the next tab stop.
-\< \<
-Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing
+ \< \<
+Put following text to the left of the local margin (without changing
the margin). Can only be used at the start of the line.
-\+ \+
-Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+ \+ \+
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the
following commands one tab stop to the right, beginning tabbed line if
necessary.
-\- \-
-Moves the left margin of the next and all the
+ \- \-
+Moves the left margin of the next and all the
following commands one tab stop to the left, beginning tabbed line if
necessary.
-\' (tabbing) \' (tabbing)
-Moves everything that you have typed so far in the
+ \&textrsquo; (tabbing) \' (tabbing)
+Moves everything that you have typed so far in the
current column, i.e. everything from the most recent \>
,
\<
, \'
, \\
, or \kill
command, to the right
-of the previous column, flush against the current column's tab stop.
+of the previous column, flush against the current column&textrsquo;s tab stop.
-\` (tabbing) \` (tabbing)
-Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
-stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last column
-because there's no tab stop there. The \`
command moves all the
-text that follows it, up to the \\
or \end{tabbing}
+ \&textlsquo; (tabbing) \` (tabbing)
+Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including tab
+stop 0. However, it can&textrsquo;t move text to the right of the last column
+because there&textrsquo;s no tab stop there. The \`
command moves all the
+text that follows it, up to the \\
or \end{tabbing}
command that ends the line, to the right margin of the tabbing
environment. There must be no \>
or \'
command between
the \`
and the command that ends the line.
-\a (tabbing) \a (tabbing)
-\a' (acute accent in tabbing) \a` (grave accent in tabbing) \a= (macron accent in tabbing) In a tabbing
environment, the commands \=
, \'
and
-\`
do not produce accents as usual (see Accents ). Instead,
+\a (tabbing) \a (tabbing)
+\a&textrsquo; (acute accent in tabbing)
+\a&textlsquo; (grave accent in tabbing)
+\a= (macron accent in tabbing)
+In a tabbing
environment, the commands \=
, \'
and
+\`
do not produce accents as usual (Accents ). Instead,
the commands \a=
, \a'
and \a`
are used.
-\kill \kill
-Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\
+ \kill \kill
+Sets tab stops without producing text. Works just like \\
except that it throws away the current line instead of producing
output for it. The effect of any \=
, \+
or \-
commands in that line remain in effect.
-\poptabs \poptabs
-\poptabs Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs
.
+\poptabs \poptabs
+\poptabs
+Restores the tab stop positions saved by the last \pushtabs
.
-\pushtabs \pushtabs
-Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing
+ \pushtabs \pushtabs
+Saves all current tab stop positions. Useful for temporarily changing
tab stop positions in the middle of a tabbing
environment.
-\tabbingsep \tabbingsep
-Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'
.
+ \tabbingsep \tabbingsep
+Distance to left of tab stop moved by \'
.
-
+
This example typesets a Pascal function in a traditional format:
-\begin{tabbing}
+
+\begin{tabbing}
function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
\> begin \= \+ \\
\> if \= n $>$ 1 then \+ \\
@@ -2730,37 +2516,37 @@ function \= fact(n : integer) : integer;\\
else \+ \\
fact := 1; \-\- \\
end;\\
-\end{tabbing}
-
+\end{tabbing}
+
+
-
-table
-tabular
-tabbing
-Environments
-
-
-table
+table tabular tabbing Environments
+table
+
+table
+tables, creating
+creating tables
-table tables, creating creating tables
Synopsis:
- \begin{table}[placement]
+
+ \begin{table}[placement]
body of the table
- \caption{table title}
- \end{table}
-
+ \caption{table title}
+ \end{table}
+
+
Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-usually “floated” to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
+usually &textldquo;floated&textrdquo; to a convenient place, like the top of a page.
Tables will not be split between two pages.
The optional argument [placement]
determines where &latex; will try
to place your table. There are four places where &latex; can possibly put
a float; these are the same as that used with the figure
-environment, and described there (see figure ).
+environment, and described there (figure ).
The standard report
and article
classes use the default
placement [tbp]
.
@@ -2770,166 +2556,162 @@ you wish. The \caption
command allows you to title your table.
-
-tabular
-thebibliography
-table
-Environments
-
-
-tabular
-tabular environment lines in tables lining text up in tables
+tabular thebibliography table Environments
+tabular
+tabular environment
+lines in tables
+lining text up in tables
+
Synopsis:
-\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
+
+\begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
...
-\end{tabular}
-
- or
+\end{tabular}
+
+
+
+or
-\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
+
+\begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
...
-\end{tabular*}
-
+\end{tabular*}
+
+
These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
items, aligned vertically in columns.
-\\ for tabular
\\
must be used to specify the end of each row of the table,
-except for the last, where it is optional—unless an \hline
+\\ for tabular
+\\
must be used to specify the end of each row of the table,
+except for the last, where it is optional&textmdash;unless an \hline
command (to put a rule below the table) follows.
The mandatory and optional arguments consist of:
-width
-Specifies the width of the tabular*
environment. There must be
+
+width
+Specifies the width of the tabular*
environment. There must be
rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the specified
width.
-pos
-Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of
+ pos
+Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre of
the environment.
-t
-align on top row
- b
-align on bottom row
-
+
+t
+align on top row
+
+b
+align on bottom row
+
-cols
-Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the
+ cols
+Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the
following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and
intercolumn material.
-l
-A column of left-aligned items.
+
+l
+A column of left-aligned items.
-r
-A column of right-aligned items.
+ r
+A column of right-aligned items.
-c
-A column of centered items.
+ c
+A column of centered items.
-|
-A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
+ |
+A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
-@{text}
-This inserts text in every row. An @-expression suppresses the
+ &arobase;{text}
+This inserts text in every row. An &arobase;-expression suppresses the
intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any desired space
-between the inserted text and the adjacent items must be included in
-text. An \extracolsep{wd}
command in an @-expression
-causes an extra space of width wd
to appear to the left of all
-subsequent columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
-command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not
-suppressed by an @-expression. An \extracolsep
command can be
-used only in an @-expression in the cols
argument.
-
-p{wd}
-Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width
+before the adjacent item must be included in text.
+
+To insert commands that are automatically executed before a given
+column, you have to load the array
package and use the
+>{...}
specifier.
+
+
+\extracolsep
+An \extracolsep{wd}
command in an &arobase;-expression causes an
+extra space of width wd
to appear to the left of all subsequent
+columns, until countermanded by another \extracolsep
command.
+Unlike ordinary intercolumn space, this extra space is not suppressed
+by an &arobase;-expression. An \extracolsep
command can be used only
+in an &arobase;-expression in the cols
argument.
+
+p{wd}
+Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width
wd, as if it were the argument of a
-\parbox[t]{wd}
command. However, a \\
may not
+\parbox[t]{wd}
command. However, a \\
may not
appear in the item, except in the following situations:
--
+
+
inside an environment like minipage
, array
, or tabular
.
-
--
+
inside an explicit \parbox
.
-
--
+
in the scope of a \centering
, \raggedright
, or \raggedleft
declaration. The latter declarations must appear inside braces or an
environment when used in a p
-column element.
-
-
+
-*{num}{cols}
-Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a
+ *{num}{cols}
+Equivalent to num copies of cols, where num is a
positive integer and cols is any list of column-specifiers,
which may contain another *-expression
.
-
-
+
+
Parameters that control formatting:
-\arrayrulewidth \arrayrulewidth
-Thickness of the rule created by |
, \hline
, and
+
+\arrayrulewidth \arrayrulewidth
+Thickness of the rule created by |
, \hline
, and
\vline
in the tabular
and array
environments; the
default is .4pt.
- \arraystretch \arraystretch
-Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular
and array
+ \arraystretch \arraystretch
+Scaling of spacing between rows in the tabular
and array
environments; default is 1, for no scaling.
-\doublerulesep \doublerulesep
-Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by ||
+ \doublerulesep \doublerulesep
+Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by ||
in the tabular
and array
environments; default is 2pt.
-\tabcolsep \tabcolsep
-Half the width of the space between columns; default is 6pt.
+ \tabcolsep \tabcolsep
+Half the width of the space between columns; default is 6pt.
-
+
-These commands can be used inside a tabular
environment:
+The following commands can be used inside a tabular
+environment:
-
-
-
-\multicolumn
-\cline
-tabular
-
-
-\multicolumn
-\multicolumn
+\multicolumn Make an item spanning several columns.
+
\cline Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
+
\hline Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
+
\vline Draw a vertical line.
+
+
+
+\multicolumn \cline tabular
+\multicolumn
+\multicolumn
+
Synopsis:
- \multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
-
+
+\multicolumn{cols}{pos}{text}
+
+
The \multicolumn
command makes an entry that spans several
columns. The first mandatory argument, cols, specifies the
number of columns to span. The second mandatory argument, pos,
@@ -2937,138 +2719,110 @@ specifies the formatting of the entry; c
for centered, lr
for flushright. The third mandatory argument,
text, specifies what text to put in the entry.
-Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash;
+Here&textrsquo;s an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash;
\multicolumn
is used for the heading:
-\begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
-\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
+
+\begin{tabular}{r&arobase;{--}l}
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
0x80&0x7FF \cr
0x800&0xFFFF \cr
0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
-\end{tabular}
-
+\end{tabular}
+
+
-
-\cline
-\hline
-\multicolumn
-tabular
-
-
-\cline
-\cline
+\cline \hline \multicolumn tabular
+\cline
+\cline
+
Synopsis:
-\cline{i-j}
-
+
+\cline{i-j}
+
+
The \cline
command draws horizontal lines across the columns
specified, beginning in column i and ending in column j,
which are specified in the mandatory argument.
-
-\hline
-\vline
-\cline
-tabular
-
-
-\hline
-\hline
+\hline \vline \cline tabular
+\hline
+\hline
+
The \hline
command draws a horizontal line the width of the
-enclosing tabular
or array
environment. It's most
+enclosing tabular
or array
environment. It&textrsquo;s most
commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom, and between the rows
of a table.
-
-\vline
-\hline
-tabular
-
-
-\vline
-\vline
+\vline \hline tabular
+\vline
+\vline
+
The \vline
command will draw a vertical line extending the full
height and depth of its row. An \hfill
command can be used to
move the line to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an
-@-expression.
+&arobase;-expression.
-
-thebibliography
-theorem
-tabular
-Environments
-
-
-thebibliography
+thebibliography theorem tabular Environments
+thebibliography
+
+thebibliography
+bibliography, creating (manually)
-thebibliography bibliography, creating (manually)
Synopsis:
-\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
-\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{widest-label}
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
...
-\end{thebibliography}
-
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+
The thebibliography
environment produces a bibliography or
reference list.
In the article
class, this reference list is labelled
-“References”; in the report
class, it is labelled
-“Bibliography”. You can change the label (in the standard classes)
+&textldquo;References&textrdquo;; in the report
class, it is labelled
+&textldquo;Bibliography&textrdquo;. You can change the label (in the standard classes)
by redefining the command \refname
. For instance, this
eliminates it entirely:
-\renewcommand{\refname}{}
-
+
+\renewcommand{\refname}{}
+
+
The mandatory widest-label argument is text that, when typeset,
is as wide as the widest item label produced by the \bibitem
commands. It is typically given as 9
for bibliographies with
less than 10 references, 99
for ones with less than 100, etc.
-
-
-
-\bibitem
-\cite
-thebibliography
-
-
-\bibitem
-
-\bibitem
+\bibitem Specify a bibliography item.
+
\cite Refer to a bibliography item.
+
\nocite Include an item in the bibliography.
+
Using BibTeX Automatic generation of bibliographies.
+
+
+
+\bibitem \cite thebibliography
+\bibitem
+
+\bibitem
+
Synopsis:
- \bibitem[label]{cite_key}
-
+
+\bibitem[label]{cite_key}
+
+
The \bibitem
command generates an entry labelled by
label. If the label argument is missing, a number is
automatically generated using the enumi
counter. The
@@ -3076,93 +2830,88 @@ automatically generated using the enumi
counter. The
symbols not containing a comma.
This command writes an entry to the .aux file containing the
-item's cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by
-the \begin{document}
command, the item's label
is
+item&textrsquo;s cite_key and label. When the .aux file is read by
+the \begin{document}
command, the item&textrsquo;s label
is
associated with cite_key
, causing references to cite_key
with a \cite
command (see next section) to produce the
associated label.
-
-\cite
-\nocite
-\bibitem
-thebibliography
-
-
-\cite
-
-\cite
+\cite \nocite \bibitem thebibliography
+\cite
+
+\cite
+
Synopsis:
-\cite[subcite]{keys
-
+
+\cite[subcite]{keys
+
+
The keys argument is a list of one or more citation keys,
separated by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to
the references associated with keys by entries in the
.aux file.
The text of the optional subcite argument appears after the
-citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth}
might produce
-`[Knuth, p. 314]'.
+citation. For example, \cite[p.~314]{knuth}
might produce
+&textlsquo;[Knuth, p. 314]&textrsquo;.
-
-\nocite
-Using BibTeX
-\cite
-thebibliography
-
-
-\nocite
-\nocite
-\nocite{key_list}
+\nocite Using BibTeX \cite thebibliography
+\nocite
+\nocite
+
+\nocite{key_list}
The \nocite
command produces no text, but writes key_list
,
which is a list of one or more citation keys, on the .aux file.
-
-Using BibTeX
-\nocite
-thebibliography
-
-
-Using Bib&tex;
-
-using Bib&tex; bib&tex;, using bibliography, creating (automatically) \bibliographystyle \bibliography
+Using BibTeX \nocite thebibliography
+Using Bib&tex;
+
+using Bib&tex;
+bib&tex;, using
+bibliography, creating (automatically)
+\bibliographystyle
+\bibliography
+
If you use the Bib&tex; program by Oren Patashnik (highly
recommended if you need a bibliography of more than a couple of
-titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don't use the
-thebibliography
environment (see thebibliography ). Instead,
+titles) to maintain your bibliography, you don&textrsquo;t use the
+thebibliography
environment (thebibliography ). Instead,
you include the lines
-\bibliographystyle{bibstyle}
-\bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2}
-
+
+\bibliographystyle{bibstyle}
+\bibliography{bibfile1,bibfile2}
+
+
The \bibliographystyle
command does not produce any output of
its own. Rather, it defines the style in which the bibliography will
be produced: bibstyle refers to a file
bibstyle.bst , which defines how your citations will look.
The standard style names distributed with Bib&tex; are:
-alpha
-Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of
+
+alpha
+Sorted alphabetically. Labels are formed from name of author and year of
publication.
- plain
-Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
- unsrt
-Like plain
, but entries are in order of citation.
- abbrv
-Like plain
, but more compact labels.
-
+ plain
+Sorted alphabetically. Labels are numeric.
+ unsrt
+Like plain
, but entries are in order of citation.
+ abbrv
+Like plain
, but more compact labels.
+
In addition, numerous other Bib&tex; style files exist tailored to
the demands of various publications. See
-http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib .
+http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib .
The \bibliography
command is what actually produces the
bibliography. The argument to \bibliography
refers to files
@@ -3173,72 +2922,71 @@ Bib&tex; format. Only the entries referred to via \cite
and
-
-theorem
-titlepage
-thebibliography
-Environments
-
-
-theorem
+theorem titlepage thebibliography Environments
+theorem
+
+theorem environment
+theorems, typesetting
-theorem environment theorems, typesetting
Synopsis:
-\begin{theorem}
+
+\begin{theorem}
theorem-text
-\end{theorem}
-
-The theorem
environment produces “Theorem n” in
+\end{theorem}
+
+
+The theorem
environment produces &textldquo;Theorem n&textrdquo; in
boldface followed by theorem-text, where the numbering
possibilities for n are described under \newtheorem
-(see \newtheorem ).
+(\newtheorem ).
-
-titlepage
-verbatim
-theorem
-Environments
-
-
-titlepage
+titlepage verbatim theorem Environments
+titlepage
+
+titlepage environment
+making a title page
+title pages, creating
-titlepage environment making a title page title pages, creating
Synopsis:
-\begin{titlepage}
+
+\begin{titlepage}
text
-\end{titlepage}
-
+\end{titlepage}
+
+
The titlepage
environment creates a title page, i.e., a page
with no printed page number or heading. It also causes the following
page to be numbered page one. Formatting the title page is left to
you. The \today
command may be useful on title pages
-(see \today ).
+(\today ).
-You can use the \maketitle
command (see \maketitle ) to
+You can use the \maketitle
command (\maketitle ) to
produce a standard title page without a titlepage
environment.
-
-verbatim
-verse
-titlepage
-Environments
-
-
-verbatim
+verbatim verse titlepage Environments
+verbatim
+
+verbatim environment
+verbatim text
+simulating typed text
+typed text, simulating
+code, typesetting
+computer programs, typesetting
-verbatim environment verbatim text simulating typed text typed text, simulating code, typesetting computer programs, typesetting
Synopsis:
-\begin{verbatim}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
literal-text
-\end{verbatim}
-
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
The verbatim
environment is a paragraph-making environment in
which &latex; produces exactly what you type in; for instance the
\
character produces a printed \. It turns &latex;
@@ -3248,59 +2996,59 @@ effect that they would on a typewriter.
The verbatim
uses a monospaced typewriter-like font (\tt
).
-
-
-\verb
-verbatim
-
-
-\verb
-
-\verb verbatim text, inline
+\verb The macro form of the verbatim
environment.
+
+
+\verb verbatim
+\verb
+
+\verb
+verbatim text, inline
+
Synopsis:
-\verbcharliteral-textchar
+
+\verbcharliteral-textchar
\verb*charliteral-textchar
-
+
+
The \verb
command typesets literal-text as it is input,
including special characters and spaces, using the typewriter
(\tt
) font. No spaces are allowed between \verb
or
\verb*
and the delimiter char, which begins and ends the
verbatim text. The delimiter must not appear in literal-text.
-visible space The *
-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a
-“visible space” character.
+visible space
+The *
-form differs only in that spaces are printed with a
+&textldquo;visible space&textrdquo; character.
+
+(Namely, {\tt\char&textlsquo;\ }.)
+
-
-verse
-verbatim
-Environments
-
-
-verse
+verse verbatim Environments
+verse
+
+verse environment
+poetry, an environment for
-verse environment poetry, an environment for
Synopsis:
-\begin{verse}
+
+\begin{verse}
line1 \\
line2 \\
...
-\end{verse}
-
+\end{verse}
+
+
The verse
environment is designed for poetry, though you may find
other uses for it.
-\\ for verse
The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not
+\\ for verse
+The margins are indented on the left and the right, paragraphs are not
indented, and the text is not justified. Separate the lines of each
stanza with \\
, and use one or more blank lines to separate the
stanzas.
@@ -3308,15 +3056,11 @@ stanzas.
-
-Line breaking
-Page breaking
-Environments
-Top
-
-
-Line breaking
-line breaking breaking lines
+Line breaking Page breaking Environments Top
+Line breaking
+line breaking
+breaking lines
+
The first thing &latex; does when processing ordinary text is to
translate your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To
produce a printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines
@@ -3327,57 +3071,23 @@ some environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the
\\
command, and you can always manually force breaks.
-
-
-
-\\
-\obeycr & \restorecr
-Line breaking
-
-
-\\
[*][morespace]
-\\ force line break new line, starting line break, forcing
+\\ Start a new line.
+
\obeycr & \restorecr Make each input line start a new output line.
+
\newline Break the line
+
\- (hyphenation) Insert explicit hyphenation.
+
\fussy Be fussy about line breaking.
+
\sloppy Be sloppy about line breaking.
+
\hyphenation Tell &latex; how to hyphenate a word.
+
\linebreak & \nolinebreak Forcing & avoiding line breaks.
+
+
+
+\\ \obeycr & \restorecr Line breaking
+\\
[*][morespace]
+\\ force line break
+new line, starting
+line break, forcing
+
The \\
command tells &latex; to start a new line. It has an
optional argument, morespace, that specifies how much extra
vertical space is to be inserted before the next line. This can be a
@@ -3388,15 +3098,12 @@ except that it tells &latex; not to start a new page after the line.
-
-\obeycr & \restorecr
-\newline
-\\
-Line breaking
-
-
-\obeycr
& \restorecr
-\obeycr \restorecr new line, output as input
+\obeycr & \restorecr \newline \\ Line breaking
+\obeycr
& \restorecr
+\obeycr
+\restorecr
+new line, output as input
+
The \obeycr
command makes a return in the input file
(^^M, internally) the same as \\
(followed by
\relax
). So each new line in the input will also be a new line
@@ -3406,30 +3113,22 @@ in the output.
-
-\newline
-\- (hyphenation)
-\obeycr & \restorecr
-Line breaking
-
-
-\newline
-\newline new line, starting (paragraph mode)
+\newline \- (hyphenation) \obeycr & \restorecr Line breaking
+\newline
+\newline
+new line, starting (paragraph mode)
+
The \newline
command breaks the line at the present point, with
no stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph
mode.
-
-\- (hyphenation)
-\fussy
-\newline
-Line breaking
-
-
-\-
(discretionary hyphen)
-\- (hyphenation) hyphenation, forcing
+\- (hyphenation) \fussy \newline Line breaking
+\-
(discretionary hyphen)
+\- (hyphenation)
+hyphenation, forcing
+
The \-
command tells &latex; that it may hyphenate the word at
that point. &latex; is very good at hyphenating, and it will usually
find most of the correct hyphenation points, and almost never use an
@@ -3443,54 +3142,41 @@ that &latex; might otherwise have chosen.
-
-\fussy
-\sloppy
-\- (hyphenation)
-Line breaking
-
-
-\fussy
-\fussy
+\fussy \sloppy \- (hyphenation) Line breaking
+\fussy
+\fussy
+
The declaration \fussy
(which is the default) makes &tex;
picky about line breaking. This usually avoids too much space between
words, at the cost of an occasional overfull box.
This command cancels the effect of a previous \sloppy
command
-(see \sloppy .
+(\sloppy .
-
-\sloppy
-\hyphenation
-\fussy
-Line breaking
-
-
-\sloppy
+\sloppy \hyphenation \fussy Line breaking
+\sloppy
The declaration \sloppy
makes &tex; less fussy about line
breaking. This will avoid overfull boxes, at the cost of loose
interword spacing.
-Lasts until a \fussy
command is issued (see \fussy ).
+Lasts until a \fussy
command is issued (\fussy ).
-
-\hyphenation
-\linebreak & \nolinebreak
-\sloppy
-Line breaking
-
-
-\hyphenation
-\hyphenation hyphenation, defining
+\hyphenation \linebreak & \nolinebreak \sloppy Line breaking
+\hyphenation
+\hyphenation
+hyphenation, defining
+
Synopsis:
-\hyphenation{word-one word-two}
-
+
+\hyphenation{word-one word-two}
+
+
The \hyphenation
command declares allowed hyphenation points
with a -
character in the given words. The words are separated
by spaces. &tex; will only hyphenate if the word matches exactly, no
@@ -3498,23 +3184,26 @@ inflections are tried. Multiple \hyphenation
commands
accumulate. Some examples (the default &tex; hyphenation patterns
misses the hyphenations in these words):
-\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
-
+
+\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix col-umns data-base data-bases}
+
+
-
-\linebreak & \nolinebreak
-\hyphenation
-Line breaking
-
-
-\linebreak
& \nolinebreak
-\linebreak \nolinebreak line breaks, forcing line breaks, preventing
+\linebreak & \nolinebreak \hyphenation Line breaking
+\linebreak
& \nolinebreak
+\linebreak
+\nolinebreak
+line breaks, forcing
+line breaks, preventing
+
Synopses:
-\linebreak[priority]
+
+\linebreak[priority]
\nolinebreak[priority]
-
+
+
By default, the \linebreak
(\nolinebreak
) command forces
(prevents) a line break at the current position. For
\linebreak
, the spaces in the line are stretched out so that it
@@ -3527,57 +3216,30 @@ from a demand to a request. The priority must be a number from
-
-Page breaking
-Footnotes
-Line breaking
-Top
-
-
-Page breaking
-page breaking breaking pages
+Page breaking Footnotes Line breaking Top
+Page breaking
+page breaking
+breaking pages
+
&latex; starts new pages asynchronously, when enough material has
accumulated to fill up a page. Usually this happens automatically,
but sometimes you may want to influence the breaks.
-
-
-
-\cleardoublepage
-\clearpage
-Page breaking
-
-
-\cleardoublepage
-
-\cleardoublepage starting on a right-hand page
+\cleardoublepage Start a new right-hand page.
+
\clearpage Start a new page.
+
\newpage Start a new page.
+
\enlargethispage Enlarge the current page a bit.
+
\pagebreak & \nopagebreak Forcing & avoiding page breaks.
+
+
+
+\cleardoublepage \clearpage Page breaking
+\cleardoublepage
+
+\cleardoublepage
+starting on a right-hand page
+
The \cleardoublepage
command ends the current page and causes all
figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
@@ -3585,49 +3247,39 @@ In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
-
-\clearpage
-\newpage
-\cleardoublepage
-Page breaking
-
-
-\clearpage
-\clearpage flushing floats and starting a page starting a new page and clearing floats
+\clearpage \newpage \cleardoublepage Page breaking
+\clearpage
+\clearpage
+flushing floats and starting a page
+starting a new page and clearing floats
+
The \clearpage
command ends the current page and causes all
figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-
-\newpage
-\enlargethispage
-\clearpage
-Page breaking
-
-
-\newpage
-\newpage new page, starting starting a new page
+\newpage \enlargethispage \clearpage Page breaking
+\newpage
+\newpage
+new page, starting
+starting a new page
+
The \newpage
command ends the current page, but does not clear
floats (see \clearpage
above).
-
-\enlargethispage
-\pagebreak & \nopagebreak
-\newpage
-Page breaking
-
-
-\enlargethispage
-\enlargethispage enlarge current page
-\enlargethispage{size}
+\enlargethispage \pagebreak & \nopagebreak \newpage Page breaking
+\enlargethispage
+\enlargethispage
+enlarge current page
+
+\enlargethispage{size}
-\enlargethispage*{size}
+\enlargethispage*{size}
Enlarge the \textheight
for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g. \enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
will allow one
+amount; e.g. \enlargethispage{\baselineskip}
will allow one
additional line.
The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page as
@@ -3636,22 +3288,23 @@ much as possible. This is normally used together with an explicit
-
-\pagebreak & \nopagebreak
-\enlargethispage
-Page breaking
-
-
-\pagebreak
& \nopagebreak
-\pagebreak \nopagebreak page break, forcing page break, preventing
+\pagebreak & \nopagebreak \enlargethispage Page breaking
+\pagebreak
& \nopagebreak
+\pagebreak
+\nopagebreak
+page break, forcing
+page break, preventing
+
Synopses:
-\pagebreak[priority]
+
+\pagebreak[priority]
\nopagebreak[priority]
-
+
+
By default, the \pagebreak
(\nopagebreak
) command forces
-(prevents) a page break at the current position. For
-\linebreak
, the vertical space on the page is stretched out
+(prevents) a page break at the current position. With
+\pagebreak
, the vertical space on the page is stretched out
where possible so that it extends to the normal bottom margin.
With the optional argument priority, you can convert the
@@ -3662,61 +3315,34 @@ insistent the request is.
-
-Footnotes
-Definitions
-Page breaking
-Top
-
-
-Footnotes
-footnotes, creating
+Footnotes Definitions Page breaking Top
+Footnotes
+footnotes, creating
+
Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced
with one command, the \footnote
command. They can also be
produced with two commands, the \footnotemark
and the
\footnotetext
commands.
-
-
-
-\footnote
-\footnotemark
-Footnotes
-
-
-\footnote
-\footnote
+\footnote Insert a footnote.
+
\footnotemark Insert footnote mark only.
+
\footnotetext Insert footnote text only.
+
Symbolic footnotes Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes.
+
Footnote parameters Parameters for footnote formatting.
+
+
+
+\footnote \footnotemark Footnotes
+\footnote
+\footnote
+
Synopsis:
-\footnote[number]{text}
-
+
+\footnote[number]{text}
+
+
The \footnote
command places the numbered footnote text
at the bottom of the current page. The optional argument number
changes the default footnote number.
@@ -3728,15 +3354,10 @@ tables or in a tabular
environment. (See following sections.)
-
-\footnotemark
-\footnotetext
-\footnote
-Footnotes
-
-
-\footnotemark
-\footnotemark
+\footnotemark \footnotetext \footnote Footnotes
+\footnotemark
+\footnotemark
+
With no optional argument, the \footnotemark
command puts the
current footnote number in the text. This command can be used in
inner paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately,
@@ -3745,25 +3366,25 @@ with the \footnotetext
command.
This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote
markers referring to the same footnote with
-\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
-
+
+\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+
+
+
after the first \footnote
command.
-
-\footnotetext
-Symbolic footnotes
-\footnotemark
-Footnotes
-
-
-\footnotetext
-\footnotetext
+\footnotetext Symbolic footnotes \footnotemark Footnotes
+\footnotetext
+\footnotetext
+
Synopsis:
-\footnotetext[number]{text}
-
+
+\footnotetext[number]{text}
+
+
The \footnotetext
command places text at the bottom of
the page as a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the
\footnotemark
command. The \footnotetext
command must
@@ -3773,314 +3394,270 @@ appear in outer paragraph mode.
-
-Symbolic footnotes
-Footnote parameters
-\footnotetext
-Footnotes
-
-
-Symbolic footnotes
+Symbolic footnotes Footnote parameters \footnotetext Footnotes
+Symbolic footnotes
-footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing
+footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered
+If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing
numbers, redefine \thefootnote
like this:
-\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
-
-\fnsymbol, and footnotes \@fnsymbol The \fnsymbol
command produces a predefined series of symbols
-(see \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol ). If you want to
-use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also
-redefine \@fnsymbol
.
+
+\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+
+
+\fnsymbol, and footnotes
+\&arobase;fnsymbol
+The \fnsymbol
command produces a predefined series of symbols
+(\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol ). If you want to
+use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you&textrsquo;ll need to also
+redefine \&arobase;fnsymbol
.
-
-Footnote parameters
-Symbolic footnotes
-Footnotes
-
-
-Footnote parameters
+Footnote parameters Symbolic footnotes Footnotes
+Footnote parameters
+
+footnote parameters
+parameters, for footnotes
-footnote parameters parameters, for footnotes
-\footnoterule \footnoterule
-Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page's
+
+\footnoterule \footnoterule
+Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the page&textrsquo;s
footnotes. Default dimensions: 0.4pt
thick (or wide), and
0.4\columnwidth
long in the standard document classes (except
slides, where it does not appear).
- \footnotesep \footnotesep
-The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By
+ \footnotesep \footnotesep
+The height of the strut placed at the beginning of the footnote. By
default, this is set to the normal strut for \footnotesize
-fonts (see Font sizes ), therefore there is no extra space between
+fonts (Font sizes ), therefore there is no extra space between
footnotes. This is 6.65pt for 10pt, 7.7pt for
11pt, and 8.4pt for 12pt.
-
+
-
-Definitions
-Counters
-Footnotes
-Top
-
-
-Definitions
-definitions
+Definitions Counters Footnotes Top
+Definitions
+definitions
+
&latex; has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
-
-
-
-\newcommand & \renewcommand
-\newcounter
-Definitions
-
-
-\newcommand
& \renewcommand
-\newcommand commands, defining new ones defining a new command new commands, defining
+\newcommand & \renewcommand (Re)define a new command.
+
\newcounter Define a new counter.
+
\newlength Define a new length.
+
\newsavebox Define a new box.
+
\newenvironment & \renewenvironment Define a new environment.
+
\newtheorem Define a new theorem-like environment.
+
\newfont Define a new font name.
+
\protect Using tricky commands.
+
+
+
+\newcommand & \renewcommand \newcounter Definitions
+\newcommand
& \renewcommand
+\newcommand
+commands, defining new ones
+defining a new command
+new commands, defining
+
\newcommand
and \renewcommand
define and redefine a
command, respectively. Synopses:
- \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
-\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
- \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
-\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
-
+
+ \newcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs]{defn}
+ \newcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
+\renewcommand{cmd}[nargs][default]{defn}
+
-cmd
-The command name beginning with \
. For \newcommand
, it
+
+
+cmd
+The command name beginning with \
. For \newcommand
, it
must not be already defined and must not begin with \end
; for
\renewcommand
, it must already be defined.
-nargs
-An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments
+ nargs
+An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments
that the command will take. The default is for the command to have no
arguments.
-default
-If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command's
+ default
+If this optional parameter is present, it means that the command&textrsquo;s
first argument is optional. When the new command is called, the
default value of the optional argument (i.e., if it is not specified
in the call) is the string def.
-defn
-The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd
; a
+ defn
+The text to be substituted for every occurrence of cmd
; a
construct of the form #n
in defn is replaced by the
text of the nth argument.
-
+
-
-\newcounter
-\newlength
-\newcommand & \renewcommand
-Definitions
-
-
-\newcounter
-\newcounter counters, defining new
+\newcounter \newlength \newcommand & \renewcommand Definitions
+\newcounter
+\newcounter
+counters, defining new
+
Synopsis:
-\newcounter{cnt}[countername]
-
+
+\newcounter{cnt}[countername]
+
+
The \newcounter
command defines a new counter named cnt.
The new counter is initialized to zero.
Given the optional argument [countername]
, cnt
will be reset whenever countername is incremented.
-See Counters , for more information about counters.
+Counters , for more information about counters.
-
-\newlength
-\newsavebox
-\newcounter
-Definitions
-
-
-\newlength
-\newlength lengths, defining new
+\newlength \newsavebox \newcounter Definitions
+\newlength
+\newlength
+lengths, defining new
+
Synopsis:
-\newlength{\arg}
-
+
+\newlength{\arg}
+
+
The \newlength
command defines the mandatory argument as a
length
command with a value of 0in
. The argument must
-be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}
. An error
+be a control sequence, as in \newlength{\foo}
. An error
occurs if \foo
is already defined.
-See Lengths , for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and
+Lengths , for how to set the new length to a nonzero value, and
for more information about lengths in general.
-
-\newsavebox
-\newenvironment & \renewenvironment
-\newlength
-Definitions
-
-
-\newsavebox
-\newsavebox
+\newsavebox \newenvironment & \renewenvironment \newlength Definitions
+\newsavebox
+\newsavebox
+
Synopsis:
-\newsavebox{cmd}
-
+
+\newsavebox{cmd}
+
+
Defines \cmd
, which must be a command name not already
defined, to refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
-
-\newenvironment & \renewenvironment
-\newtheorem
-\newsavebox
-Definitions
-
-
-\newenvironment
& \renewenvironment
-\newenvironment \renewenvironment environments, defining defining new environments redefining environments
+\newenvironment & \renewenvironment \newtheorem \newsavebox Definitions
+\newenvironment
& \renewenvironment
+\newenvironment
+\renewenvironment
+environments, defining
+defining new environments
+redefining environments
+
Synopses:
- \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
- \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef}
-\renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
-
+
+ \newenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
+ \newenvironment{env}[nargs][default]{begdef}{enddef}
+\renewenvironment{env}[nargs]{begdef}{enddef}
+
+
These commands define or redefine an environment env, that is,
-\begin{env} &dots; \end{env}
.
+\begin{env} &dots; \end{env}
.
-env
-The name of the environment. For \newenvironment
, env
+
+env
+The name of the environment. For \newenvironment
, env
must not be an existing environment, and the command \env
must be undefined. For \renewenvironment
, env must be
the name of an existing environment.
-nargs
-An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
+ nargs
+An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of
the newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
-default
-If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default
+ default
+If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and default
gives the default value for that argument.
-begdef
-The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}
; a
+ begdef
+The text expanded at every occurrence of \begin{env}
; a
construct of the form #n
in begdef is replaced by
the text of the nth argument.
-enddef
-The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}
. It
+ enddef
+The text expanded at every occurrence of \end{env}
. It
may not contain any argument parameters.
-
+
-
-\newtheorem
-\newfont
-\newenvironment & \renewenvironment
-Definitions
-
-
-\newtheorem
-\newtheorem theorems, defining defining new theorems
-\newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within]
-\newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label}
-
+\newtheorem \newfont \newenvironment & \renewenvironment Definitions
+\newtheorem
+\newtheorem
+theorems, defining
+defining new theorems
+
+
+\newtheorem{newenv}{label}[within]
+\newtheorem{newenv}[numbered_like]{label}
+
+
This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments:
-newenv
-The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an
+
+newenv
+The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of an
existing environment or otherwise defined.
-label
-The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
+ label
+The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
number. For example, Theorem.
-numbered_like
-(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment;
+ numbered_like
+(Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like environment;
the new environment will be numbered just like numbered_like.
-within
-(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit.
+ within
+(Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional unit.
The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as the
within counter.
-
+
At most one of numbered_like and within can be specified,
not both.
-
-\newfont
-\protect
-\newtheorem
-Definitions
-
-
-\newfont
-\newfont fonts, new commands for defining new fonts
+\newfont \protect \newtheorem Definitions
+\newfont
+\newfont
+fonts, new commands for
+defining new fonts
+
Synopsis:
-\newfont{cmd}{fontname}
-
+
+\newfont{cmd}{fontname}
+
+
Defines a control sequence \cmd
, which must not already
be defined, to make fontname be the current font. The file
looked for on the system is named fontname.tfm .
@@ -4090,319 +3667,238 @@ More commonly, fonts are defined in families through .fd files.
-
-\protect
-\newfont
-Definitions
-
-
-\protect
-\protect
-fragile commands moving arguments Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and
+\protect \newfont Definitions
+\protect
+\protect
+
+fragile commands
+moving arguments
+Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and
many more are so-called fragile commands. When a fragile
command is used in certain contexts, called moving arguments, it
must be preceded by \protect
. In addition, any fragile
commands within the arguments must have their own \protect
.
Some examples of moving arguments are \caption
-(see figure ), \thanks
(see \maketitle ), and
-expressions in tabular
and array
environments
-(see tabular ).
+(figure ), \thanks
(\maketitle ), and
+&hyphenbreak;expressions in tabular
and array
environments
+(tabular ).
-robust commands Commands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not
+robust commands
+Commands which are not fragile are called robust. They must not
be preceded by \protect
.
See also:
-http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html
-http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect
+
+http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html
+http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect
+
-
-Counters
-Lengths
-Definitions
-Top
-
-
-Counters
-counters, a list of variables, a list of
+Counters Lengths Definitions Top
+Counters
+counters, a list of
+variables, a list of
+
Everything &latex; numbers for you has a counter associated with
it. The name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment
or command that produces the number, except with no \
.
-(enumi
–enumiv
are used for the nested enumerate
-environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;'s
+(enumi
&textndash;enumiv
are used for the nested enumerate
+environment.) Below is a list of the counters used in &latex;&textrsquo;s
standard document classes to control numbering.
-part paragraph figure enumi
+
+part paragraph figure enumi
chapter subparagraph table enumii
section page footnote enumiii
subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
subsubsection
-
+
+
-
-
-
-\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
-\usecounter
-Counters
-
-
-\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
: Printing counters
+\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol Print value of a counter.
+
\usecounter Use a specified counter in a list environment.
+
\value Use the value of a counter in an expression.
+
\setcounter Set the value of a counter.
+
\addtocounter Add a quantity to a counter.
+
\refstepcounter Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+
\stepcounter Add to counter, resetting subsidiary counters.
+
\day \month \year Numeric date values.
+
+
+
+\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol \usecounter Counters
+\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
: Printing counters
All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
-instance, \alph{enumi}
.
+instance, \alph{enumi}
.
-\alph \alph
-prints counter using lowercase letters: `a', `b', &enddots;
+
+\alph \alph
+prints counter using lowercase letters: &textlsquo;a&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;b&textrsquo;, &enddots;
- \Alph \Alph
-uses uppercase letters: `A', `B', &enddots;
+ \Alph \Alph
+uses uppercase letters: &textlsquo;A&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;B&textrsquo;, &enddots;
-\arabic \arabic
-uses Arabic numbers: `1', `2', &enddots;
+ \arabic \arabic
+uses Arabic numbers: &textlsquo;1&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;2&textrsquo;, &enddots;
-\roman \roman
-uses lowercase roman numerals: `i', `ii', &enddots;
+ \roman \roman
+uses lowercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;i&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;ii&textrsquo;, &enddots;
-\roman \roman
-uses uppercase roman numerals: `I', `II', &enddots;
+ \roman \roman
+uses uppercase roman numerals: &textlsquo;I&textrsquo;, &textlsquo;II&textrsquo;, &enddots;
-\fnsymbol \fnsymbol
-prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine
+ \fnsymbol \fnsymbol
+prints the value of counter in a specific sequence of nine
symbols (conventionally used for labeling footnotes). The value of
counter must be between 1 and 9, inclusive.
-The symbols mostly aren't supported in Info, but here are the names:
- asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel
+
+Here are the symbols:
+$\ast$ $\dagger$ $\ddagger$ $\S$ $\P$ $\parallel$
+$\ast\ast$ $\dagger\dagger$ $\ddagger\ddagger$
+
+The symbols mostly aren&textrsquo;t supported in Info, but here are the names:
+
+asterix(*) dagger ddagger section-sign paragraph-sign parallel
double-asterix(**) double-dagger double-ddagger
-
-
+
+
+
-
-\usecounter
-\value
-\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol
-Counters
-
-
-\usecounter{counter}
-\usecounter list items, specifying counter numbered items, specifying counter
+\usecounter \value \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol Counters
+\usecounter{counter}
+\usecounter
+list items, specifying counter
+numbered items, specifying counter
+
Synopsis:
-\usecounter{counter}
-
+
+\usecounter{counter}
+
+
The \usecounter
command is used in the second argument of the
list
environment to specify counter to be used to number
the list items.
-
-\value
-\setcounter
-\usecounter
-Counters
-
-
-\value{counter}
-\value counters, getting value of
+\value \setcounter \usecounter Counters
+\value{counter}
+\value
+counters, getting value of
+
Synopsis:
-\value{counter}
-
+
+\value{counter}
+
+
The \value
command produces the value of counter. It can
be used anywhere &latex; expects a number, for example:
-\setcounter{myctr}{3}
-\addtocounter{myctr}{1}
-\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
-
-
-
-
-\setcounter
-\addtocounter
-\value
-Counters
-
-
-\setcounter{counter}{value}
-\setcounter counters, setting setting counters
+
+\setcounter{myctr}{3}
+\addtocounter{myctr}{1}
+\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}
+
+
+
+
+\setcounter \addtocounter \value Counters
+\setcounter{counter}{value}
+\setcounter
+counters, setting
+setting counters
+
Synopsis:
-\setcounter{\counter}{value}
-
+
+\setcounter{\counter}{value}
+
+
The \setcounter
command sets the value of \counter to the
value argument.
-
-\addtocounter
-\refstepcounter
-\setcounter
-Counters
-
-
-\addtocounter{counter}{value}
-\addtocounter
+\addtocounter \refstepcounter \setcounter Counters
+\addtocounter{counter}{value}
+\addtocounter
+
The \addtocounter
command increments counter by the
amount specified by the value argument, which may be negative.
-
-\refstepcounter
-\stepcounter
-\addtocounter
-Counters
-
-
-\refstepcounter{counter}
-\refstepcounter
+\refstepcounter \stepcounter \addtocounter Counters
+\refstepcounter{counter}
+\refstepcounter
+
The \refstepcounter
command works in the same way as
-\stepcounter
See \stepcounter , except it also defines the
+\stepcounter
\stepcounter , except it also defines the
current \ref
value to be the result of \thecounter
.
-
-\stepcounter
-\day \month \year
-\refstepcounter
-Counters
-
-
-\stepcounter{counter}
-\stepcounter
+\stepcounter \day \month \year \refstepcounter Counters
+\stepcounter{counter}
+\stepcounter
+
The \stepcounter
command adds one to counter and
resets all subsidiary counters.
-
-\day \month \year
-\stepcounter
-Counters
-
-
-\day \month \year
: Predefined counters
-\day \month \year
+\day \month \year \stepcounter Counters
+\day \month \year
: Predefined counters
+\day
+\month
+\year
+
&latex; defines counters for the day of the month (\day
,
-1–31), month of the year (\month
, 1–12), and year
+1&textndash;31), month of the year (\month
, 1&textndash;12), and year
(\year
, Common Era). When &tex; starts up, they are
set to the current values on the system where &tex; is running. They
are not updated as the job progresses.
The related command \today
produces a string representing the
-current day (see \today ).
+current day (\today ).
-
-Lengths
-Making paragraphs
-Counters
-Top
-
-
-Lengths
-lengths, defining and using
+Lengths Making paragraphs Counters Top
+Lengths
+lengths, defining and using
+
A length
is a measure of distance. Many &latex; commands take a
length as an argument.
-
-
-
-\setlength
-\addtolength
-Lengths
-
-
-\setlength{\len}{value}
-\setlength lengths, setting
+\setlength Set the value of a length.
+
\addtolength Add a quantity to a length.
+
\settodepth Set a length to the depth of something.
+
\settoheight Set a length to the height of something.
+
\settowidth Set a length to the width of something.
+
Predefined lengths Lengths that are, like, predefined.
+
+
+
+\setlength \addtolength Lengths
+\setlength{\len}{value}
+\setlength
+lengths, setting
+
The \setlength
sets the value of \len to the value
argument, which can be expressed in any units that &latex;
understands, i.e., inches (in
), millimeters (mm
), points
@@ -4410,47 +3906,33 @@ understands, i.e., inches (in
), millimeters (mm
), poin
-
-\addtolength
-\settodepth
-\setlength
-Lengths
-
-
-\addtolength{\len}{amount}
-\addtolength lengths, adding to
-The \addtolength
command increments a “length command”
+\addtolength \settodepth \setlength Lengths
+\addtolength{\len}{amount}
+\addtolength
+lengths, adding to
+
+The \addtolength
command increments a &textldquo;length command&textrdquo;
\len by the amount specified in the amount argument, which
may be negative.
-
-\settodepth
-\settoheight
-\addtolength
-Lengths
-
-
-\settodepth
-\settodepth
-\settodepth{\gnat}{text}
+\settodepth \settoheight \addtolength Lengths
+\settodepth
+\settodepth
+
+\settodepth{\gnat}{text}
The \settodepth
command sets the value of a length
command
equal to the depth of the text
argument.
-
-\settoheight
-\settowidth
-\settodepth
-Lengths
-
-
-\settoheight
-\settoheight
-\settoheight{\gnat}{text}
+\settoheight \settowidth \settodepth Lengths
+\settoheight
+\settoheight
+
+\settoheight{\gnat}{text}
The \settoheight
command sets the value of a length
command
equal to the height of the text
argument.
@@ -4458,94 +3940,67 @@ equal to the height of the text
argument.
-
-\settowidth
-Predefined lengths
-\settoheight
-Lengths
-
-
-\settowidth{\len}{text}
-\settowidth
+\settowidth Predefined lengths \settoheight Lengths
+\settowidth{\len}{text}
+\settowidth
+
The \settowidth
command sets the value of the command \len
to the width of the text argument.
-
-
-Predefined lengths
-\settowidth
-Lengths
-
-
-Predefined lengths
-lengths, predefined predefined lengths
+Predefined lengths \settowidth Lengths
+Predefined lengths
+lengths, predefined
+predefined lengths
+
\width
-\width
+\width
+
\height
-\height
+\height
+
\depth
-\depth
+\depth
+
\totalheight
-\totalheight
+\totalheight
+
These length parameters can be used in the arguments of the box-making
-commands (see Boxes ). They specify the natural width etc. of the
-text in the box. \totalheight
equals \height
+
+commands (Boxes ). They specify the natural width, etc., of
+the text in the box. \totalheight
equals \height
+
\depth
. To make a box with the text stretched to double the
natural size, e.g., say
-\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
+\makebox[2\width]{Get a stretcher}
-
-Making paragraphs
-Math formulas
-Lengths
-Top
-
-
-Making paragraphs
-making paragraphs paragraphs
-A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines—lines not
+Making paragraphs Math formulas Lengths Top
+Making paragraphs
+making paragraphs
+paragraphs
+
+A paragraph is ended by one or more completely blank lines&textmdash;lines not
containing even a %
. A blank line should not appear where a new
paragraph cannot be started, such as in math mode or in the argument of
a sectioning command.
-
-
-
-\indent
-\noindent
-Making paragraphs
-
-
-\indent
-\indent \parindent indent, forcing
+\indent Indent this paragraph.
+
\noindent Do not indent this paragraph.
+
\parskip Space added before paragraphs.
+
Marginal notes Putting remarks in the margin.
+
+
+
+\indent \noindent Making paragraphs
+\indent
+\indent
+\parindent
+indent, forcing
+
\indent
produces a horizontal space whose width equals the
width of the \parindent
length, the normal paragraph
indentation. It is used to add paragraph indentation where it would
@@ -4557,47 +4012,40 @@ mode, otherwise 15pt
for 10pt
documents, 17pt
-
-\noindent
-\parskip
-\indent
-Making paragraphs
-
-
-\noindent
-\noindent indent, suppressing
+\noindent \parskip \indent Making paragraphs
+\noindent
+\noindent
+indent, suppressing
+
When used at the beginning of the paragraph, \noindent
suppresses any paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in
the middle of a paragraph.
-
-\parskip
-Marginal notes
-\noindent
-Making paragraphs
-
-
-\parskip
-\parskip vertical space before paragraphs
+\parskip Marginal notes \noindent Making paragraphs
+\parskip
+\parskip
+vertical space before paragraphs
+
\parskip
is a rubber length defining extra vertical space added
before each paragraph. The default is 0pt plus1pt
.
-
-Marginal notes
-\parskip
-Making paragraphs
-
-
-Marginal notes
-marginal notes notes in the margin remarks in the margin \marginpar
+Marginal notes \parskip Making paragraphs
+Marginal notes
+marginal notes
+notes in the margin
+remarks in the margin
+\marginpar
+
Synopsis:
-\marginpar[left]{right}
-
+
+\marginpar[left]{right}
+
+
The \marginpar
command creates a note in the margin. The first
line of the note will have the same baseline as the line in the text
where the \marginpar
occurs.
@@ -4605,18 +4053,18 @@ where the \marginpar
occurs.
When you only specify the mandatory argument right, the text
will be placed
-• -
+
•
+•
in the right margin for one-sided layout;
-
--
+
•
in the outside margin for two-sided layout;
-
--
+
•
in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
-
-
+
-\reversemarginpar \normalmarginpar The command \reversemarginpar
places subsequent marginal notes
+\reversemarginpar
+\normalmarginpar
+The command \reversemarginpar
places subsequent marginal notes
in the opposite (inside) margin. \normalmarginpar
places them
in the default position.
@@ -4624,25 +4072,26 @@ in the default position.
margin, and right is used for the right margin.
The first word will normally not be hyphenated; you can enable
-hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}
.
+hyphenation there by beginning the node with \hspace{0pt}
.
These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
-\marginparpush \marginparpush
-Minimum vertical space between notes; default 7pt for
+
+\marginparpush \marginparpush
+Minimum vertical space between notes; default 7pt for
12pt documents, 5pt else.
- \marginparsep \marginparsep
-Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
+ \marginparsep \marginparsep
+Horizontal space between the main text and the note; default
11pt for 10pt documents, 10pt else.
-\marginparwidth \marginparwidth
-Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided 10pt document
+ \marginparwidth \marginparwidth
+Width of the note itself; default for a one-sided 10pt document
is 90pt, 83pt for 11pt, and 68pt for
12pt; 17pt more in each case for a two-sided document.
In two column mode, the default is 48pt.
-
+
The standard &latex; routine for marginal notes does not prevent
notes from falling off the bottom of the page.
@@ -4653,1050 +4102,1081 @@ notes from falling off the bottom of the page.
-
-Math formulas
-Modes
-Making paragraphs
-Top
-
-
-Math formulas
-math formulas formulas, math math mode, entering
-math environment displaymath environment equation environment There are three environments that put &latex; in math mode:
-
-math
-For formulas that appear right in the text.
- displaymath
-For formulas that appear on their own line.
- equation
-The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation
+Math formulas Modes Making paragraphs Top
+Math formulas
+math formulas
+formulas, math
+math mode, entering
+
+math environment
+displaymath environment
+equation environment
+There are three environments that put &latex; in math mode:
+
+
+math
+For formulas that appear right in the text.
+ displaymath
+For formulas that appear on their own line.
+ equation
+The same as the displaymath environment except that it adds an equation
number in the right margin.
-
+
-\( \) \[ \] The math
environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
+\(
+\)
+\[
+\]
+The math
environment can be used in both paragraph and LR mode,
but the displaymath
and equation
environments can be used
only in paragraph mode. The math
and displaymath
environments are used so often that they have the following short forms:
-\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
-\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
-
-$ In fact, the math
environment is so common that it has an even
+
+\(...\) instead of \begin{math}...\end{math}
+\[...\] instead of \begin{displaymath}...\end{displaymath}
+
+
+$
+In fact, the math
environment is so common that it has an even
shorter form:
-$ ... $ instead of \(...\)
-
-\boldmath \unboldmath The \boldmath
command changes math letters and symbols to be in
+
+$ ... $ instead of \(...\)
+
+
+\boldmath
+\unboldmath
+The \boldmath
command changes math letters and symbols to be in
a bold font. It is used outside of math mode. Conversely, the
\unboldmath
command changes math glyphs to be in a normal font;
it too is used outside of math mode.
-\displaystyle The \displaystyle
declaration forces the size and style of the
+\displaystyle
+The \displaystyle
declaration forces the size and style of the
formula to be that of displaymath
, e.g., with limits above and
below summations. For example
- $\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
-
+
+$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
+
+
-
-
-
-Subscripts & superscripts
-Math symbols
-Math formulas
-
-
-Subscripts & superscripts
-superscript subscript exponent _ ^
+Subscripts & superscripts Also known as exponent or index.
+
Math symbols Various mathematical squiggles.
+
Math functions Math function names like sin and exp.
+
Math accents Accents in math.
+
Spacing in math mode Thick, medium, thin and negative spaces.
+
Math miscellany Stuff that doesn&textrsquo;t fit anywhere else.
+
+
+
+Subscripts & superscripts Math symbols Math formulas
+Subscripts & superscripts
+superscript
+subscript
+exponent
+_
+^
+
To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type
-_{
exp}
. To get exp to appear as a
-superscript, you type ^{
exp}
. &latex; handles
+_{
exp}
. To get exp to appear as a
+superscript, you type ^{
exp}
. &latex; handles
superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the natural way.
It even does the right thing when something has both a subscript and a
superscript.
-
-Math symbols
-Math functions
-Subscripts & superscripts
-Math formulas
-
-
-Math symbols
-math symbols symbols, math greek letters
-&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to
+Math symbols Math functions Subscripts & superscripts Math formulas
+Math symbols
+math symbols
+symbols, math
+greek letters
+
+&latex; provides almost any mathematical symbol you&textrsquo;re likely to
need. The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode.
For example, if you include $\pi$
in your source, you will get
the pi symbol () in your output.
-\| \|
-
+
+\| \|
+
- \aleph \aleph
-
+ \aleph \aleph
+
-\alpha \alpha
-
+ \alpha \alpha
+
-\amalg \amalg
- (binary operation)
+ \amalg \amalg
+ (binary operation)
-\angle \angle
-
+ \angle \angle
+
-\approx \approx
- (relation)
+ \approx \approx
+ (relation)
-\ast \ast
- (binary operation)
+ \ast \ast
+ (binary operation)
-\asymp \asymp
- (relation)
+ \asymp \asymp
+ (relation)
-\backslash \backslash
-\ (delimiter)
+ \backslash \backslash
+\ (delimiter)
-\beta \beta
-
+ \beta \beta
+
-\bigcap \bigcap
-
+ \bigcap \bigcap
+
-\bigcirc \bigcirc
- (binary operation)
+ \bigcirc \bigcirc
+ (binary operation)
-\bigcup \bigcup
-
+ \bigcup \bigcup
+
-\bigodot \bigodot
-
+ \bigodot \bigodot
+
-\bigoplus \bigoplus
-
+ \bigoplus \bigoplus
+
-\bigotimes \bigotimes
-
+ \bigotimes \bigotimes
+
-\bigtriangledown \bigtriangledown
- (binary operation)
+ \bigtriangledown \bigtriangledown
+ (binary operation)
-\bigtriangleup \bigtriangleup
- (binary operation)
+ \bigtriangleup \bigtriangleup
+ (binary operation)
-\bigsqcup \bigsqcup
-
+ \bigsqcup \bigsqcup
+
-\biguplus \biguplus
-
+ \biguplus \biguplus
+
-\bigcap \bigcap
-
+ \bigcap \bigcap
+
-\bigwedge \bigwedge
-
+ \bigwedge \bigwedge
+
-\bot \bot
-
+ \bot \bot
+
-\bowtie \bowtie
- (relation)
+ \bowtie \bowtie
+ (relation)
-\Box \Box
-(square open box symbol)
+ \Box \Box
+(square open box symbol)
-\bullet \bullet
-bullet symbol (binary operation)
+\bullet \bullet
+bullet symbol
+ (binary operation)
-\cap \cap
- (binary operation)
+ \cap \cap
+ (binary operation)
-\cdot \cdot
- (binary operation)
+ \cdot \cdot
+ (binary operation)
-\chi \chi
-
+ \chi \chi
+
-\circ \circ
- (binary operation)
+ \circ \circ
+ (binary operation)
-\clubsuit \clubsuit
-
+ \clubsuit \clubsuit
+
-\cong \cong
- (relation)
+ \cong \cong
+ (relation)
-\coprod \coprod
-
+ \coprod \coprod
+
-\cup \cup
- (binary operation)
+ \cup \cup
+ (binary operation)
-\dagger \dagger
- (binary operation)
+ \dagger \dagger
+ (binary operation)
-\dashv \dashv
- (relation)
+ \dashv \dashv
+ (relation)
-\ddagger \ddagger
- (binary operation)
+ \ddagger \ddagger
+ (binary operation)
-\Delta \Delta
-
+ \Delta \Delta
+
-\delta \delta
-
+ \delta \delta
+
-\Diamond \Diamond
-bigger
+ \Diamond \Diamond
+bigger
-\diamond \diamond
- (binary operation)
+ \diamond \diamond
+ (binary operation)
-\diamondsuit \diamondsuit
-
+ \diamondsuit \diamondsuit
+
-\div \div
- (binary operation)
+ \div \div
+ (binary operation)
-\doteq \doteq
- (relation)
+ \doteq \doteq
+ (relation)
-\downarrow \downarrow
- (delimiter)
+ \downarrow \downarrow
+ (delimiter)
-\Downarrow \Downarrow
- (delimiter)
+ \Downarrow \Downarrow
+ (delimiter)
-\ell \ell
-
+ \ell \ell
+
-\emptyset \emptyset
-
+ \emptyset \emptyset
+
-\epsilon \epsilon
-
+ \epsilon \epsilon
+
-\equiv \equiv
- (relation)
+ \equiv \equiv
+ (relation)
-\eta \eta
-
+ \eta \eta
+
-\exists \exists
-
+ \exists \exists
+
-\flat \flat
-
+ \flat \flat
+
-\forall \forall
-
+ \forall \forall
+
-\frown \frown
- (relation)
+ \frown \frown
+ (relation)
-\Gamma \Gamma
-
+ \Gamma \Gamma
+
-\gamma \gamma
-
+ \gamma \gamma
+
-\ge \ge
-
+ \ge \ge
+
-\geq \geq
- (relation)
+ \geq \geq
+ (relation)
-\gets \gets
-
+ \gets \gets
+
-\gg \gg
- (relation)
+ \gg \gg
+ (relation)
-\hbar \hbar
-
+ \hbar \hbar
+
-\heartsuit \heartsuit
-
+ \heartsuit \heartsuit
+
-\hookleftarrow \hookleftarrow
-
+ \hookleftarrow \hookleftarrow
+
-\hookrightarrow \hookrightarrow
-
+ \hookrightarrow \hookrightarrow
+
-\iff \iff
-
+ \iff \iff
+
-\Im \Im
-
+ \Im \Im
+
-\in \in
- (relation)
+ \in \in
+ (relation)
-\infty \infty
-
+ \infty \infty
+
-\int \int
-
+ \int \int
+
-\iota \iota
-
+ \iota \iota
+
-\Join \Join
-condensed bowtie symbol (relation)
+ \Join \Join
+condensed bowtie symbol (relation)
-\kappa \kappa
-
+ \kappa \kappa
+
-\Lambda \Lambda
-
+ \Lambda \Lambda
+
-\lambda \lambda
-
+ \lambda \lambda
+
-\land \land
-
+ \land \land
+
-\langle \langle
- (delimiter)
+ \langle \langle
+ (delimiter)
-\lbrace \lbrace
- (delimiter)
+ \lbrace \lbrace
+ (delimiter)
-\lbrack \lbrack
- (delimiter)
+ \lbrack \lbrack
+ (delimiter)
-\lceil \lceil
- (delimiter)
+ \lceil \lceil
+ (delimiter)
-\le \le
-
+ \le \le
+
-\leadsto \leadsto
-
+\leadsto \leadsto
+
- \Leftarrow \Leftarrow
-
+ \Leftarrow \Leftarrow
+
-\leftarrow \leftarrow
-
+ \leftarrow \leftarrow
+
-\leftharpoondown \leftharpoondown
-
+ \leftharpoondown \leftharpoondown
+
-\leftharpoonup \leftharpoonup
-
+ \leftharpoonup \leftharpoonup
+
-\Leftrightarrow \Leftrightarrow
-
+ \Leftrightarrow \Leftrightarrow
+
-\leftrightarrow \leftrightarrow
-
+ \leftrightarrow \leftrightarrow
+
-\leq \leq
- (relation)
+ \leq \leq
+ (relation)
-\lfloor \lfloor
- (delimiter)
+ \lfloor \lfloor
+ (delimiter)
-\lhd \lhd
-(left-pointing arrow head)
+ \lhd \lhd
+(left-pointing arrow head)
-\ll \ll
- (relation)
+ \ll \ll
+ (relation)
-\lnot \lnot
-
+ \lnot \lnot
+
-\longleftarrow \longleftarrow
-
+ \longleftarrow \longleftarrow
+
-\longleftrightarrow \longleftrightarrow
-
+ \longleftrightarrow \longleftrightarrow
+
-\longmapsto \longmapsto
-
+ \longmapsto \longmapsto
+
-\longrightarrow \longrightarrow
-
+ \longrightarrow \longrightarrow
+
-\lor \lor
-
+ \lor \lor
+
-\mapsto \mapsto
-
+ \mapsto \mapsto
+
-\mho \mho
-
+\mho \mho
+
- \mid \mid
- (relation)
+ \mid \mid
+ (relation)
-\models \models
- (relation)
+ \models \models
+ (relation)
-\mp \mp
- (binary operation)
+ \mp \mp
+ (binary operation)
-\mu \mu
-
+ \mu \mu
+
-\nabla \nabla
-
+ \nabla \nabla
+
-\natural \natural
-
+ \natural \natural
+
-\ne \ne
-
+ \ne \ne
+
-\nearrow \nearrow
-
+ \nearrow \nearrow
+
-\neg \neg
-
+ \neg \neg
+
-\neq \neq
- (relation)
+ \neq \neq
+ (relation)
-\ni \ni
- (relation)
+ \ni \ni
+ (relation)
-\not \not
-Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in .
+ \not \not
+Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in .
-\notin \notin
-
+ \notin \notin
+
-\nu \nu
-
+ \nu \nu
+
-\nwarrow \nwarrow
-
+ \nwarrow \nwarrow
+
-\odot \odot
- (binary operation)
+ \odot \odot
+ (binary operation)
-\oint \oint
-
+ \oint \oint
+
-\Omega \Omega
-
+ \Omega \Omega
+
-\omega \omega
-
+ \omega \omega
+
-\ominus \ominus
- (binary operation)
+ \ominus \ominus
+ (binary operation)
-\oplus \oplus
- (binary operation)
+ \oplus \oplus
+ (binary operation)
-\oslash \oslash
- (binary operation)
+ \oslash \oslash
+ (binary operation)
-\otimes \otimes
- (binary operation)
+ \otimes \otimes
+ (binary operation)
-\owns \owns
-
+ \owns \owns
+
-\parallel \parallel
- (relation)
+ \parallel \parallel
+ (relation)
-\partial \partial
-
+ \partial \partial
+
-\perp \perp
- (relation)
+ \perp \perp
+ (relation)
-\phi \phi
-
+ \phi \phi
+
-\Pi \Pi
-
+ \Pi \Pi
+
-\pi \pi
-
+ \pi \pi
+
-\pm \pm
- (binary operation)
+ \pm \pm
+ (binary operation)
-\prec \prec
- (relation)
+ \prec \prec
+ (relation)
-\preceq \preceq
- (relation)
+ \preceq \preceq
+ (relation)
-\prime \prime
-
+ \prime \prime
+
-\prod \prod
-
+ \prod \prod
+
-\propto \propto
- (relation)
+ \propto \propto
+ (relation)
-\Psi \Psi
-
+ \Psi \Psi
+
-\psi \psi
-
+ \psi \psi
+
-\rangle \rangle
- (delimiter)
+ \rangle \rangle
+ (delimiter)
-\rbrace \rbrace
- (delimiter)
+ \rbrace \rbrace
+ (delimiter)
-\rbrack \rbrack
- (delimiter)
+ \rbrack \rbrack
+ (delimiter)
-\rceil \rceil
- (delimiter)
+ \rceil \rceil
+ (delimiter)
-\Re \Re
-
+ \Re \Re
+
-\rfloor \rfloor
-
+ \rfloor \rfloor
+
-\rhd \rhd
-(binary operation)
+ \rhd \rhd
+(binary operation)
-\rho \rho
-
+ \rho \rho
+
-\Rightarrow \Rightarrow
-
+ \Rightarrow \Rightarrow
+
-\rightarrow \rightarrow
-
+ \rightarrow \rightarrow
+
-\rightharpoondown \rightharpoondown
-
+ \rightharpoondown \rightharpoondown
+
-\rightharpoonup \rightharpoonup
-
+ \rightharpoonup \rightharpoonup
+
-\rightleftharpoons \rightleftharpoons
-
+ \rightleftharpoons \rightleftharpoons
+
-\searrow \searrow
-
+ \searrow \searrow
+
-\setminus \setminus
- (binary operation)
+ \setminus \setminus
+ (binary operation)
-\sharp \sharp
-
+ \sharp \sharp
+
-\Sigma \Sigma
-
+ \Sigma \Sigma
+
-\sigma \sigma
-
+ \sigma \sigma
+
-\sim \sim
- (relation)
+ \sim \sim
+ (relation)
-\simeq \simeq
- (relation)
+ \simeq \simeq
+ (relation)
-\smallint \smallint
-
+ \smallint \smallint
+
-\smile \smile
- (relation)
+ \smile \smile
+ (relation)
-\spadesuit \spadesuit
-
+ \spadesuit \spadesuit
+
-\sqcap \sqcap
- (binary operation)
+ \sqcap \sqcap
+ (binary operation)
-\sqcup \sqcup
- (binary operation)
+ \sqcup \sqcup
+ (binary operation)
-\sqsubset \sqsubset
-(relation)
+ \sqsubset \sqsubset
+(relation)
-\sqsubseteq \sqsubseteq
- (relation)
+ \sqsubseteq \sqsubseteq
+ (relation)
-\sqsupset \sqsupset
-(relation)
+ \sqsupset \sqsupset
+(relation)
-\sqsupseteq \sqsupseteq
- (relation)
+ \sqsupseteq \sqsupseteq
+ (relation)
-\star \star
- (binary operation)
+ \star \star
+ (binary operation)
-\subset \subset
- (relation)
+ \subset \subset
+ (relation)
-\subseteq \subseteq
- (relation)
+ \subseteq \subseteq
+ (relation)
-\succ \succ
- (relation)
+ \succ \succ
+ (relation)
-\succeq \succeq
- (relation)
+ \succeq \succeq
+ (relation)
-\sum \sum
-
+ \sum \sum
+
-\supset \supset
- (relation)
+ \supset \supset
+ (relation)
-\supseteq \supseteq
- (relation)
+ \supseteq \supseteq
+ (relation)
-\surd \surd
-
+ \surd \surd
+
-\swarrow \swarrow
-
+ \swarrow \swarrow
+
-\tau \tau
-
+ \tau \tau
+
-\theta \theta
-
+ \theta \theta
+
-\times \times
- (binary operation)
+ \times \times
+ (binary operation)
-\to \to
-
+ \to \to
+
-\top \top
-
+ \top \top
+
-\triangle \triangle
-
+ \triangle \triangle
+
-\triangleleft \triangleleft
- (binary operation)
+ \triangleleft \triangleleft
+ (binary operation)
-\triangleright \triangleright
- (binary operation)
+ \triangleright \triangleright
+ (binary operation)
-\unlhd \unlhd
-left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
+ \unlhd \unlhd
+left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
-\unrhd \unrhd
-right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
+ \unrhd \unrhd
+right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
-\Uparrow \Uparrow
- (delimiter)
+ \Uparrow \Uparrow
+ (delimiter)
-\uparrow \uparrow
- (delimiter)
+ \uparrow \uparrow
+ (delimiter)
-\Updownarrow \Updownarrow
- (delimiter)
+ \Updownarrow \Updownarrow
+ (delimiter)
-\updownarrow \updownarrow
- (delimiter)
+ \updownarrow \updownarrow
+ (delimiter)
-\uplus \uplus
- (binary operation)
+ \uplus \uplus
+ (binary operation)
-\Upsilon \Upsilon
-
+ \Upsilon \Upsilon
+
-\upsilon \upsilon
-
+ \upsilon \upsilon
+
-\varepsilon \varepsilon
-
+ \varepsilon \varepsilon
+
-\varphi \varphi
-
+ \varphi \varphi
+
-\varpi \varpi
-
+ \varpi \varpi
+
-\varrho \varrho
-
+ \varrho \varrho
+
-\varsigma \varsigma
-
+ \varsigma \varsigma
+
-\vartheta \vartheta
-
+ \vartheta \vartheta
+
-\vdash \vdash
- (relation)
+ \vdash \vdash
+ (relation)
-\vee \vee
- (binary operation)
+ \vee \vee
+ (binary operation)
-\Vert \Vert
- (delimiter)
+ \Vert \Vert
+ (delimiter)
-\vert \vert
- (delimiter)
+ \vert \vert
+ (delimiter)
-\wedge \wedge
- (binary operation)
+ \wedge \wedge
+ (binary operation)
-\wp \wp
-
+ \wp \wp
+
-\wr \wr
- (binary operation)
+ \wr \wr
+ (binary operation)
-\Xi \Xi
-
+ \Xi \Xi
+
-\xi \xi
-
+ \xi \xi
+
-\zeta \zeta
-
+ \zeta \zeta
+
-
+
-
-Math functions
-Math accents
-Math symbols
-Math formulas
-
-
-Math functions
-math functions functions, math
+Math functions Math accents Math symbols Math formulas
+Math functions
+math functions
+functions, math
+
These commands produce roman function names in math mode with proper
spacing.
-\arccos \arccos
-
+
+\arccos \arccos
+
- \arcsin \arcsin
-
+ \arcsin \arcsin
+
-\arctan \arctan
-
+ \arctan \arctan
+
-\arg \arg
-
+ \arg \arg
+
-\bmod \bmod
-Binary modulo operator ()
+ \bmod \bmod
+Binary modulo operator ()
-\cos \cos
-
+ \cos \cos
+
-\cosh \cosh
-
+ \cosh \cosh
+
-\cot \cot
-
+ \cot \cot
+
-\coth \coth
-
+ \coth \coth
+
-\csc \csc
-
+ \csc \csc
+
-\deg \deg
-
+ \deg \deg
+
-\det \det
-
+ \det \det
+
-\dim \dim
-
+ \dim \dim
+
-\exp \exp
-
+ \exp \exp
+
-\gcd \gcd
-
+ \gcd \gcd
+
-\hom \hom
-
+ \hom \hom
+
-\inf \inf
-
+ \inf \inf
+
-\ker \ker
-
+ \ker \ker
+
-\lg \lg
-
+ \lg \lg
+
-\lim \lim
-
+ \lim \lim
+
-\liminf \liminf
-
+ \liminf \liminf
+
-\limsup \limsup
-
+ \limsup \limsup
+
-\ln \ln
-
+ \ln \ln
+
-\log \log
-
+ \log \log
+
-\max \max
-
+ \max \max
+
-\min \min
-
+ \min \min
+
-\pmod \pmod
-parenthesized modulus, as in ()
+ \pmod \pmod
+parenthesized modulus, as in ()
-\Pr \Pr
-
+ \Pr \Pr
+
-\sec \sec
-
+ \sec \sec
+
-\sin \sin
-
+ \sin \sin
+
-\sinh \sinh
-
+ \sinh \sinh
+
-\sup \sup
-
+ \sup \sup
+
-\tan \tan
-
+ \tan \tan
+
-\tanh \tanh
-
+ \tanh \tanh
+
-
+
-
-Math accents
-Spacing in math mode
-Math functions
-Math formulas
-
-
-Math accents
-math accents accents, mathematical
+Math accents Spacing in math mode Math functions Math formulas
+Math accents
+math accents
+accents, mathematical
+
&latex; provides a variety of commands for producing accented letters
in math. These are different from accents in normal text
-(see Accents ).
+(Accents ).
+
+
+\acute \acute
+acute accent, math
+Math acute accent: .
-\acute \acute
-acute accent, math Math acute accent: .
+\bar \bar
+bar-over accent, math
+macron accent, math
+Math bar-over accent: .
-\bar \bar
-bar-over accent, math macron accent, math Math bar-over accent: .
+\breve \breve
+breve accent, math
+Math breve accent: .
-\breve \breve
-breve accent, math Math breve accent: .
+\check \check
+check accent, math
+ha c ek accent, math
+Math ha c ek (check) accent: .
-\check \check
-check accent, math hác<ek accent, math Math hác<ek (check) accent: .
+\ddot \ddot
+double dot accent, math
+Math dieresis accent: .
-\ddot \ddot
-double dot accent, math Math dieresis accent: .
+\dot \dot
+overdot accent, math
+dot over accent, math
+Math dot accent: .
-\dot \dot
-overdot accent, math dot over accent, math Math dot accent: .
+\grave \grave
+grave accent, math
+Math grave accent: .
-\grave \grave
-grave accent, math Math grave accent: .
+\hat \hat
+hat accent, math
+circumflex accent, math
+Math hat (circumflex) accent: .
-\hat \hat
-hat accent, math circumflex accent, math Math hat (circumflex) accent: .
+\imath \imath
+dotless i, math
+Math dotless i.
-\imath \imath
-dotless i, math Math dotless i.
+\jmath \jmath
+dotless j, math
+Math dotless j.
-\jmath \jmath
-dotless j, math Math dotless j.
+\mathring \mathring
+ring accent, math
+Math ring accent: x .
-\tilde \tilde
-tilde accent, math Math tilde accent: .
+\tilde \tilde
+tilde accent, math
+Math tilde accent: .
-\vec \vec
-vector symbol, math Math vector symbol: .
+\vec \vec
+vector symbol, math
+Math vector symbol: .
-\widehat \widehat
-wide hat accent, math Math wide hat accent: .
+\widehat \widehat
+wide hat accent, math
+Math wide hat accent: .
-\widehat \widehat
-wide tile accent, math Math wide tilde accent: .
+\widehat \widehat
+wide tile accent, math
+Math wide tilde accent: .
-
+
-
-Spacing in math mode
-Math miscellany
-Math accents
-Math formulas
-
-
-Spacing in math mode
-spacing within math mode math mode, spacing
+Spacing in math mode Math miscellany Math accents Math formulas
+Spacing in math mode
+spacing within math mode
+math mode, spacing
+
In a math
environment, &latex; ignores the spaces you type and
puts in the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics
texts. If you want different spacing, &latex; provides the following
commands for use in math mode:
-\;
-\; A thick space (quad).
-\:
-\>
-\: \> Both of these produce a medium space (quad).
-\,
-\, A thin space (quad); not restricted to math mode.
-\!
-A negative thin space (quad).
-
-
-
-
-
-Math miscellany
-Spacing in math mode
-Math formulas
-
-
-Math miscellany
-math miscellany
-\* \*
-discretionary multiplication multiplication symbol, discretionary line break A “discretionary” multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
+
+\;
+\;
+A thick space (quad).
+ \:
+\>
+\:
+\>
+Both of these produce a medium space (quad).
+ \,
+\,
+A thin space (quad); not restricted to math mode.
+ \!
+A negative thin space (quad).
+
+
+
+
+Math miscellany Spacing in math mode Math formulas
+Math miscellany
+math miscellany
+
+
+
+ \* \*
+discretionary multiplication
+multiplication symbol, discretionary line break
+A &textldquo;discretionary&textrdquo; multiplication symbol, at which a line break is
allowed.
- \cdots \cdots
-A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line.
+ \cdots \cdots
+A horizontal ellipsis with the dots raised to the center of the line.
+
+As in: &textlsquo;$\cdots$&textrsquo;.
+
-\ddots \ddots
-A diagonal ellipsis: .
+ \ddots \ddots
+A diagonal ellipsis: .
-\frac{num}{den} \frac{num}{den}
-\frac Produces the fraction num
divided by den
.
+\frac{num}{den} \frac{num}{den}
+\frac
+Produces the fraction num
divided by den
.
-\left delim1 ... \right delim2 \left delim1 ... \right delim2
-\right null delimiter The two delimiters need not match; . acts as a null delimiter,
+\left delim1 ... \right delim2 \left delim1 ... \right delim2
+\right
+null delimiter
+The two delimiters need not match; . acts as a null delimiter,
producing no output. The delimiters are sized according to the math
in between. Example: \left( \sum_i=1^10 a_i \right]
.
-\overbrace{text} \overbrace{text}
-Generates a brace over text.
+ \overbrace{text} \overbrace{text}
+Generates a brace over text.
For example, .
-\overline{text} \overline{text}
-Generates a horizontal line over tex.
+ \overline{text} \overline{text}
+Generates a horizontal line over tex.
For exampe, .
-\sqrt[root]{arg} \sqrt[root]{arg}
-Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The
+ \sqrt[root]{arg} \sqrt[root]{arg}
+Produces the representation of the square root of arg. The
optional argument root determines what root to produce. For
example, the cube root of x+y
would be typed as
-$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$
.
-
-\stackrel{text}{relation} \stackrel{text}{relation}
-Puts text above relation. For example,
-\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}
.
-
-\underbrace{math} \underbrace{math}
-Generates math with a brace underneath.
-
-\underline{text} \underline{text}
-Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be
+$\sqrt[3]{x+y}$
.
+
+In &tex;, the result looks like this:
+$\root 3 \of x+y$.
+
+
+\stackrel{text}{relation} \stackrel{text}{relation}
+Puts text above relation. For example,
+\stackrel{f}{\longrightarrow}
.
+
+In &tex;, the result looks like this:
+$\buildrel f \over \longrightarrow$.
+
+
+\underbrace{math} \underbrace{math}
+Generates math with a brace underneath.
+
+In &tex;, the result looks like this:
+$\underbrace{x+y+z}_{>\,0}$.
+
+
+\underline{text} \underline{text}
+Causes text, which may be either math mode or not, to be
underlined. The line is always below the text, taking account of
descenders.
+
+In &tex;, the result looks like this:
+$\underline{xyz}$
+
-\vdots \vdots
-\vdots Produces a vertical ellipsis.
+\vdots \vdots
+\vdots
+Produces a vertical ellipsis.
+
+In &tex;, the result looks like this:
+$\vdots$.
+
-
+
-
-Modes
-Page styles
-Math formulas
-Top
-
-
-Modes
-modes paragraph mode math mode left-to-right mode lR mode
+Modes Page styles Math formulas Top
+Modes
+modes
+paragraph mode
+math mode
+left-to-right mode
+lR mode
+
When &latex; is processing your input text, it is always in one of three
modes:
-• -
+
•
+•
Paragraph mode
-
--
+
•
Math mode
-
--
+
•
Left-to-right mode, called LR mode for short
-
-
+
&latex; changes mode only when it goes up or down a staircase to a
different level, though not all level changes produce mode changes.
Mode changes occur only when entering or leaving an environment, or when
&latex; is processing the argument of certain text-producing commands.
-“Paragraph mode” is the most common; it's the one &latex; is in
+&textldquo;Paragraph mode&textrdquo; is the most common; it&textrsquo;s the one &latex; is in
when processing ordinary text. In that mode, &latex; breaks your
text into lines and breaks the lines into pages. &latex; is in
-“math mode” when it's generating a mathematical formula. In “LR
-mode”, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it
+&textldquo;math mode&textrdquo; when it&textrsquo;s generating a mathematical formula. In &textldquo;LR
+mode&textrdquo;, as in paragraph mode, &latex; considers the output that it
produces to be a string of words with spaces between them. However,
unlike paragraph mode, &latex; keeps going from left to right; it
never starts a new line in LR mode. Even if you put a hundred words
@@ -5711,169 +5191,152 @@ There are also several text-producing commands and environments for
making a box that put &latex; in paragraph mode. The box make by one of
these commands or environments will be called a parbox
. When
&latex; is in paragraph mode while making a box, it is said to be in
-“inner paragraph mode”. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out
-in, is called “outer paragraph mode”.
+&textldquo;inner paragraph mode&textrdquo;. Its normal paragraph mode, which it starts out
+in, is called &textldquo;outer paragraph mode&textrdquo;.
-
-Page styles
-Spaces
-Modes
-Top
-
-
-Page styles
-styles, page page styles
+Page styles Spaces Modes Top
+Page styles
+styles, page
+page styles
+
The \documentclass
command determines the size and position of
-the page's head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
+the page&textrsquo;s head and foot. The page style determines what goes in them.
-
-
-
-\maketitle
-\pagenumbering
-Page styles
-
-
-\maketitle
-titles, making \maketitle
+\maketitle Generate a title page.
+
\pagenumbering Set the style used for page numbers.
+
\pagestyle Change the headings/footings style.
+
\thispagestyle Change the headings/footings style for this page.
+
+
+
+\maketitle \pagenumbering Page styles
+\maketitle
+titles, making
+\maketitle
+
The \maketitle
command generates a title on a separate title
-page—except in the article
class, where the title is placed
+page&textmdash;except in the article
class, where the title is placed
at the top of the first page. Information used to produce the title
is obtained from the following declarations:
-\author{name \and name2} \author{name \and name2}
-author, for titlepage \\ for \author
\and for \author
The \author
command declares the document author(s), where the
+
+\author{name \and name2} \author{name \and name2}
+author, for titlepage
+\\ for \author
+\and for \author
+The \author
command declares the document author(s), where the
argument is a list of authors separated by \and
commands. Use
-\\
to separate lines within a single author's entry—for
-example, to give the author's institution or address.
+\\
to separate lines within a single author&textrsquo;s entry&textmdash;for
+example, to give the author&textrsquo;s institution or address.
- \date{text} \date{text}
-date, for titlepage The \date
command declares text to be the document's
-date. With no \date
command, the current date (see \today )
+\date{text} \date{text}
+date, for titlepage
+The \date
command declares text to be the document&textrsquo;s
+date. With no \date
command, the current date (\today )
is used.
-\thanks{text} \thanks{text}
-thanks, for titlepage credit footnote The \thanks
command produces a \footnote
to the title,
+\thanks{text} \thanks{text}
+thanks, for titlepage
+credit footnote
+The \thanks
command produces a \footnote
to the title,
usually used for credit acknowledgements.
-\title{text} \title{text}
-title, for titlepage \\ for \title
The \title
command declares text to be the title of the
+\title{text} \title{text}
+title, for titlepage
+\\ for \title
+The \title
command declares text to be the title of the
document. Use \\
to force a line break, as usual.
-
+
-
-\pagenumbering
-\pagestyle
-\maketitle
-Page styles
-
-
-\pagenumbering
-\pagenumbering page numbering style
+\pagenumbering \pagestyle \maketitle Page styles
+\pagenumbering
+\pagenumbering
+page numbering style
+
Synopsis:
-\pagenumbering{style}
-
+
+\pagenumbering{style}
+
+
Specifies the style of page numbers, according to style:
-arabic
-arabic numerals
- roman
-lowercase Roman numerals
- Roman
-uppercase Roman numerals
- alph
-lowercase letters
- Alph
-uppercase letters
-
-
-
-
-
-\pagestyle
-\thispagestyle
-\pagenumbering
-Page styles
-
-
-\pagestyle
-\pagestyle header style footer style running header and footer style
+
+arabic
+arabic numerals
+ roman
+lowercase Roman numerals
+ Roman
+uppercase Roman numerals
+ alph
+lowercase letters
+ Alph
+uppercase letters
+
+
+
+
+\pagestyle \thispagestyle \pagenumbering Page styles
+\pagestyle
+\pagestyle
+header style
+footer style
+running header and footer style
+
Synopsis:
-\pagestyle{style}
-
+
+\pagestyle{style}
+
+
The \pagestyle
command specifies how the headers and footers
are typeset from the current page onwards. Values for style:
-plain
-Just a plain page number.
+
+plain
+Just a plain page number.
-empty
-Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers.
+ empty
+Empty headers and footers, e.g., no page numbers.
-headings
-Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what
+ headings
+Put running headers on each page. The document style specifies what
goes in the headers.
-myheadings
-Custom headers, specified via the \markboth
or the
+ myheadings
+Custom headers, specified via the \markboth
or the
\markright
commands.
-
+
Here are the descriptions of \markboth
and \markright
:
-\markboth{left}{right} \markboth{left}{right}
-Sets both the left and the right heading. A “left-hand heading”
+
+\markboth{left}{right} \markboth{left}{right}
+Sets both the left and the right heading. A &textldquo;left-hand heading&textrdquo;
(left) is generated by the last \markboth
command before
-the end of the page, while a “right-hand heading” (right is
+the end of the page, while a &textldquo;right-hand heading&textrdquo; (right is
generated by the first \markboth
or \markright
that
comes on the page if there is one, otherwise by the last one before
the page.
- \markright{right} \markright{right}
-Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.
+ \markright{right} \markright{right}
+Sets the right heading, leaving the left heading unchanged.
-
+
-
-\thispagestyle
-\pagestyle
-Page styles
-
-
-\thispagestyle{style}
-\thispagestyle
+\thispagestyle \pagestyle Page styles
+\thispagestyle{style}
+\thispagestyle
+
The \thispagestyle
command works in the same manner as the
\pagestyle
command (see previous section) except that it
changes to style for the current page only.
@@ -5881,100 +5344,45 @@ changes to style for the current page only.
-
-Spaces
-Boxes
-Page styles
-Top
-
-
-Spaces
-spaces
+Spaces Boxes Page styles Top
+Spaces
+spaces
+
&latex; has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
-Another space-producing command is \,
to produce a “thin”
+Another space-producing command is \,
to produce a &textldquo;thin&textrdquo;
space (usually 1/6quad ). It can be used in text mode, but is
-more often useful in math mode (see Spacing in math mode ).
+more often useful in math mode (Spacing in math mode ).
-
-
-
-\hspace
-\hfill
-Spaces
-
-
-\hspace
-\hspace
+Horizontal space
+
\hspace Fixed horizontal space.
+
\hfill Stretchable horizontal space.
+
\SPACE Normal interword space.
+
\AT Ending a sentence.
+
\thinspace One-sixth of an em.
+
\/ Per-character italic correction.
+
\hrulefill Stretchable horizontal rule.
+
\dotfill Stretchable horizontal dots.
+
+Vertical space
+
\addvspace Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
+
\bigskip \medskip \smallskip Fixed vertical spaces.
+
\vfill Infinitely stretchable vertical space.
+
\vspace Add arbitrary vertical space.
+
+
+
+\hspace \hfill Spaces
+\hspace
+\hspace
+
Synopsis:
-\hspace[*]{length}
-
+
+\hspace[*]{length}
+
+
The \hspace
command adds horizontal space. The length
argument can be expressed in any terms that &latex; understands:
points, inches, etc. It is a rubber length. You can add both
@@ -5987,36 +5395,29 @@ form.
-
-\hfill
-\SPACE
-\hspace
-Spaces
-
-
-\hfill
+\hfill \SPACE \hspace Spaces
+\hfill
-\hfill The \hfill
fill command produces a “rubber length” which has
+\hfill
+The \hfill
fill command produces a &textldquo;rubber length&textrdquo; which has
no natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as
needed.
-\fill The \fill
parameter is the rubber length itself (technically,
+\fill
+The \fill
parameter is the rubber length itself (technically,
the glue value 0pt plus1fill); thus, \hspace\fill
is
equivalent to \hfill
.
-
-\SPACE
-\AT
-\hfill
-Spaces
-
-
-\SPACE
-\SPACE \TAB \NEWLINE
-The \
(space) command produces a normal interword space. It's
-useful after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example
+\SPACE \AT \hfill Spaces
+\SPACE
+\SPACE
+\TAB
+\NEWLINE
+
+The \
(space) command produces a normal interword space. It&textrsquo;s
+useful after punctuation which shouldn&textrsquo;t end a sentence. For example
Knuth's article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental
.
It is also often used after control sequences, as in \TeX\ is a
nice system.
@@ -6026,117 +5427,97 @@ are equivalent to \
.
-
-\AT
-\thinspace
-\SPACE
-Spaces
-
-
-\@
-\@
-The \@
command makes the following punctuation character end a
+\AT \thinspace \SPACE Spaces
+\&arobase;
+\&arobase;
+
+The \&arobase;
command makes the following punctuation character end a
sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after
a capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without
-\@
:
+\&arobase;
:
-&dots; in C\@. Pascal, though &dots;
-&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots;
-
-produces
+
+&dots; in C\&arobase;. Pascal, though &dots;
+&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots;
+
+
+produces
-&dots; in C&eosperiod; Pascal, though &dots;
-&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots;
+&dots; in C&eosperiod; Pascal, though &dots;
+&dots; in C. Pascal, though &dots;
-
-\thinspace
-\/
-\AT
-Spaces
-
-
-\thinspace
-\thinspace
+\thinspace \/ \AT Spaces
+\thinspace
+\thinspace
+
\thinspace
produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that
is 1/6 of an em. This is the proper space to use in nested quotes, as
-in '” .
+in &textrsquo;&textrdquo; .
-
-\/
-\hrulefill
-\thinspace
-Spaces
-
-
-\/
-\/
+\/ \hrulefill \thinspace Spaces
+\/
+\/
+
The \/
command produces an italic correction. This is a
small space defined by the font designer for a given character,
to avoid the character colliding with whatever follows. The italic
f character typically has a large italic correction value.
-If the following character is a period or comma, it's not necessary to
+If the following character is a period or comma, it&textrsquo;s not necessary to
insert an italic correction, since those punctuation symbols have a
very small height. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as
normal letters, it can help. Compare
-f: f; (in the &tex; output, the `f's are nicely separated)
+
+{\it f\/: f\/;}
+
+f: f; (in the &tex; output, the &textlsquo;f&textrsquo;s are nicely separated)
with f: f;.
Despite the name, roman characters can also have an italic
correction. Compare
-pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the `f')
+
+pdf\/\TeX{}
+
+pdf&tex; (in the &tex; output, there is a small space after the &textlsquo;f&textrsquo;)
with pdf&tex;.
-
-\hrulefill
-\dotfill
-\/
-Spaces
-
-
-\hrulefill
-\hrulefill
-The \hrulefill
fill command produces a “rubber length” which can
+\hrulefill \dotfill \/ Spaces
+\hrulefill
+\hrulefill
+
+The \hrulefill
fill command produces a &textldquo;rubber length&textrdquo; which can
stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
rule.
-
-\dotfill
-\addvspace
-\hrulefill
-Spaces
-
-
-\dotfill
+\dotfill \addvspace \hrulefill Spaces
+\dotfill
-\dotfill
-The \dotfill
command produces a “rubber length” that fills
+\dotfill
+
+The \dotfill
command produces a &textldquo;rubber length&textrdquo; that fills
with dots instead of just white space.
-
-\addvspace
-\bigskip \medskip \smallskip
-\dotfill
-Spaces
-
-
-\addvspace
-\addvspace vertical space space, inserting vertical
-\addvspace{length}
+\addvspace \bigskip \medskip \smallskip \dotfill Spaces
+\addvspace
+\addvspace
+vertical space
+space, inserting vertical
+
+\addvspace{length}
The \addvspace
command normally adds a vertical space of height
length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
@@ -6146,62 +5527,56 @@ of the total vertical space equal to length
.
-
-\bigskip \medskip \smallskip
-\vfill
-\addvspace
-Spaces
-
-
-\bigskip \medskip \smallskip
+\bigskip \medskip \smallskip \vfill \addvspace Spaces
+\bigskip \medskip \smallskip
These commands produce a given amount of space.
-\bigskip
-\bigskip \bigskipamount The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}
, ordinarily about one line
+
+\bigskip
+\bigskip
+\bigskipamount
+The same as \vspace{bigskipamount}
, ordinarily about one line
space (with stretch and shrink).
-\medskip
-\medskip \medskipamount The same as \vspace{medskipamount}
, ordinarily
+\medskip
+\medskip
+\medskipamount
+The same as \vspace{medskipamount}
, ordinarily
about half of a line space (with stretch and shrink).
-\smallskip
-\smallskip \smallskipamount The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}
, ordinarily about a
+\smallskip
+\smallskip
+\smallskipamount
+The same as \vspace{smallskipamount}
, ordinarily about a
quarter of a line space (with stretch and shrink).
-
+
The \...amount
parameters are determined by the document class.
-
-\vfill
-\vspace
-\bigskip \medskip \smallskip
-Spaces
-
-
-\vfill
-\vfill
+\vfill \vspace \bigskip \medskip \smallskip Spaces
+\vfill
+\vfill
+
The \vfill
fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which
-can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to
-\vspace{\fill}
(see \hfill ).
+can stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It&textrsquo;s equivalent to
+\vspace{\fill}
(\hfill ).
-
-\vspace
-\vfill
-Spaces
-
-
-\vspace[*]{length}
-\vspace
+\vspace \vfill Spaces
+\vspace[*]{length}
+\vspace
+
Synopsis:
-\vspace[*]{length}
-
+
+\vspace[*]{length}
+
+
The \vspace
command adds the vertical space length, i.e.,
a rubber length. length can be negative or positive.
@@ -6212,97 +5587,51 @@ space is not removed.
-
-Boxes
-Special insertions
-Spaces
-Top
-
-
-Boxes
-
-boxes
-All the predefined length parameters (see Predefined lengths ) can be
+Boxes Special insertions Spaces Top
+Boxes
+
+boxes
+
+All the predefined length parameters (Predefined lengths ) can be
used in the arguments of the box-making commands.
-
-
-
-\mbox
-\fbox and \framebox
-Boxes
-
-
-\mbox{text}
-\mbox
-hyphenation, preventing The \mbox
command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
+\mbox Horizontal boxes.
+
\fbox and \framebox Put a frame around a box.
+
lrbox An environment like \sbox.
+
\makebox Box, adjustable position.
+
\parbox Box with text in paragraph mode.
+
\raisebox Raise or lower text.
+
\savebox Like \makebox, but save the text for later use.
+
\sbox Like \mbox, but save the text for later use.
+
\usebox Print saved text.
+
+
+
+\mbox \fbox and \framebox Boxes
+\mbox{text}
+\mbox
+
+hyphenation, preventing
+The \mbox
command creates a box just wide enough to hold the
text created by its argument. The text is not broken into
lines, so it can be used to prevent hyphenation.
-
-\fbox and \framebox
-lrbox
-\mbox
-Boxes
-
-
-\fbox
and \framebox
+\fbox and \framebox lrbox \mbox Boxes
+\fbox
and \framebox
+
+\fbox
+\framebox
-\fbox \framebox
Synopses:
-\fbox{text}
-\framebox[width][position]{text}
-
+
+\fbox{text}
+\framebox[width][position]{text}
+
+
The \fbox
and \framebox
commands are like \mbox
,
except that they put a frame around the outside of the box being created.
@@ -6311,25 +5640,22 @@ specification of the box width with the optional width argument
(a dimension), and positioning with the optional position
argument.
-\fboxrule \fboxsep Both commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule
(default
+\fboxrule
+\fboxsep
+Both commands produce a rule of thickness \fboxrule
(default
.4pt), and leave a space of \fboxsep
(default
3pt) between the rule and the contents of the box.
-See \framebox (picture) , for the \framebox
command in the
+\framebox (picture) , for the \framebox
command in the
picture
environment.
-
-lrbox
-\makebox
-\fbox and \framebox
-Boxes
-
-
-lrbox
-lrbox
-\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}
+lrbox \makebox \fbox and \framebox Boxes
+lrbox
+lrbox
+
+\begin{lrbox}{cmd} text \end{lrbox}
This is the environment form of \sbox
.
@@ -6338,69 +5664,65 @@ must have been declared with \newsavebox
.
-
-\makebox
-\parbox
-lrbox
-Boxes
-
-
-\makebox
-\makebox
+\makebox \parbox lrbox Boxes
+\makebox
+\makebox
+
Synopsis:
-\makebox[width][position]{text}
-
+
+\makebox[width][position]{text}
+
+
The \makebox
command creates a box just wide enough to contain
the text specified. The width of the box is specified by the
optional width argument. The position of the text within the box
is determined by the optional position argument, which may take
the following values:
-c
-Centered (default).
- l
-Flush left.
- r
-Flush right.
- s
-Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain
+
+c
+Centered (default).
+ l
+Flush left.
+ r
+Flush right.
+ s
+Stretch (justify) across entire width; text must contain
stretchable space for this to work.
-
+
\makebox
is also used within the picture environment
-see \makebox (picture) .
+\makebox (picture) .
-
-\parbox
-\raisebox
-\makebox
-Boxes
-
-
-\parbox
-\parbox
+\parbox \raisebox \makebox Boxes
+\parbox
+\parbox
+
Synopsis:
-\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
-
+
+\parbox[position][height][inner-pos]{width}{text}
+
+
The \parbox
command produces a box whose contents are created
in paragraph
mode. It should be used to make a box small
pieces of text, with nothing fancy inside. In particular, you
-shouldn't use any paragraph-making environments inside a
+shouldn&textrsquo;t use any paragraph-making environments inside a
\parbox
argument. For larger pieces of text, including ones
containing a paragraph-making environment, you should use a
-minipage
environment (see minipage ).
+minipage
environment (minipage ).
\parbox
has two mandatory arguments:
-width
-the width of the parbox;
- text
-the text that goes inside the parbox.
-
+
+width
+the width of the parbox;
+ text
+the text that goes inside the parbox.
+
The optional position argument allows you to align either the
top or bottom line in the parbox with the baseline of the surrounding
@@ -6411,32 +5733,30 @@ text (default is top).
The inner-pos argument controls the placement of the text inside
the box, as follows; if it is not specified, position is used.
-t
-text is placed at the top of the box.
- c
-text is centered in the box.
- b
-text is placed at the bottom of the box.
- s
-stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space
+
+t
+text is placed at the top of the box.
+ c
+text is centered in the box.
+ b
+text is placed at the bottom of the box.
+ s
+stretch vertically; the text must contain vertically stretchable space
for this to work.
-
+
-
-\raisebox
-\savebox
-\parbox
-Boxes
-
-
-\raisebox
-\raisebox
+\raisebox \savebox \parbox Boxes
+\raisebox
+\raisebox
+
Synopsis:
-\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text}
-
+
+\raisebox{distance}[height][depth]{text}
+
+
The \raisebox
command raises or lowers text. The first
mandatory argument specifies how high text is to be raised (or
lowered if it is a negative amount). text itself is processed
@@ -6449,347 +5769,409 @@ ignoring its natural height and depth.
-
-\savebox
-\sbox
-\raisebox
-Boxes
-
-
-\savebox
-\savebox
+\savebox \sbox \raisebox Boxes
+\savebox
+\savebox
+
Synopsis:
-\savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text}
-
+
+\savebox{\boxcmd}[width][pos]{text}
+
+
This command typeset text in a box just as with \makebox
-(see \makebox ), except that instead of printing the resulting box,
+(\makebox ), except that instead of printing the resulting box,
it saves it in the box labeled \boxcmd, which must have been
-declared with \newsavebox
(see \newsavebox ).
+declared with \newsavebox
(\newsavebox ).
-
-\sbox
-\usebox
-\savebox
-Boxes
-
-
-\sbox{\boxcmd}{text}
-\sbox
+\sbox \usebox \savebox Boxes
+\sbox{\boxcmd}{text}
+\sbox
+
Synopsis:
-\sbox{\boxcmd}{text}
-
+
+\sbox{\boxcmd}{text}
+
+
\sbox
types text in a box just as with \mbox
-(see \mbox ) except that instead of the resulting box being
+(\mbox ) except that instead of the resulting box being
included in the normal output, it is saved in the box labeled
\boxcmd. \boxcmd must have been previously declared with
-\newsavebox
(see \newsavebox ).
+\newsavebox
(\newsavebox ).
-
-\usebox
-\sbox
-Boxes
-
-
-\usebox{\boxcmd
-\usebox
+\usebox \sbox Boxes
+\usebox{\boxcmd
+\usebox
+
Synopsis:
-\usebox{\boxcmd}
-
+
+\usebox{\boxcmd}
+
+
\usebox
producesthe box most recently saved in the bin
-\boxcmd by a \savebox
command (see \savebox ).
+\boxcmd by a \savebox
command (\savebox ).
-
-Special insertions
-Splitting the input
-Boxes
-Top
-
-
-Special insertions
+Special insertions Splitting the input Boxes Top
+Special insertions
&latex; provides commands for inserting characters that have a
special meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
-
-
-
-Reserved characters
-Text symbols
-Special insertions
-
-
-Reserved characters
-reserved characters characters, reserved
+Reserved characters Inserting # $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
Text symbols Inserting other non-letter symbols in text.
+
Accents Inserting accents.
+
Non-English characters Inserting other non-English characters.
+
\rule Inserting lines and rectangles.
+
\today Inserting today&textrsquo;s date.
+
+
+
+Reserved characters Text symbols Special insertions
+Reserved characters
+reserved characters
+characters, reserved
+
The following characters play a special role in &latex; and are called
-“reserved characters” or “special characters”.
-
-# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
-
-\# \$ \% \& \_ \{ \} Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex;
+&textldquo;reserved characters&textrdquo; or &textldquo;special characters&textrdquo;.
+
+
+# $ % & ~ _ ^ \ { }
+
+
+\#
+\$
+\%
+\&
+\_
+\{
+\}
+Whenever you write one of these characters into your file, &latex;
will do something special. If you simply want the character to be
printed as itself, include a \
in front of the character. For
example, \$
will produce $
in your output.
-\backslash One exception to this rule is \
itself, because \\
has
+\backslash
+One exception to this rule is \
itself, because \\
has
its own special (context-dependent) meaning. A roman \ is produced by
typing $\backslash$
in your file, and a typewriter \
is
-produced by using \ in a verbatim command (see verbatim ).
+produced by using \ in a verbatim command (verbatim ).
-\~ \^ Also, \~
and \^
place tilde and circumflex accents over
-the following letter, as in õ and ô (see Accents ); to get
+\~
+\^
+Also, \~
and \^
place tilde and circumflex accents over
+the following letter, as in o and o (Accents ); to get
a standalone ~
or ^
, you can again use a verbatim
command.
-\symbol accessing any character of a font
+\symbol
+accessing any character of a font
+
Finally, you can access any character of the current font once you
know its number by using the \symbol
command. For example, the
visible space character used in the \verb*
command has the code
-decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}
.
+decimal 32, so it can be typed as \symbol{32}
.
You can also specify octal numbers with '
or hexadecimal numbers
with "
, so the previous example could also be written as
-\symbol{'40}
or \symbol{"20}
.
+\symbol{'40}
or \symbol{"20}
.
-
-Text symbols
-Accents
-Reserved characters
-Special insertions
-
-
-Text symbols
+Text symbols Accents Reserved characters Special insertions
+Text symbols
-text symbols textcomp package &latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols
+text symbols
+textcomp package
+&latex; provides commands to generate a number of non-letter symbols
in running text. Some of these, especially the more obscure ones, are
not available in OT1; you may need to load the textcomp
package.
-\copyright \copyright
-\textcopyright \textcopyright
-copyright symbol The copyright symbol, ©right;.
-
-\dag \dag
-dagger, in text The dagger symbol (in text).
-
-\ddag \ddag
-double dagger, in text The double dagger symbol (in text).
-
-\LaTeX \LaTeX
-&latex; logo logo, &latex; The &latex; logo.
-
-\guillemotleft («) \guillemotleft («)
-\guillemotright (») \guillemotright (»)
-\guilsinglleft (‹) \guilsinglleft (‹)
-\guilsinglright (›) \guilsinglright (›)
-double guillemets single guillemets left angle quotation marks right angle quotation marks double angle quotation marks single angle quotation marks French quotation marks quotation marks, French Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French:
+
+
+ \copyright \copyright
+\textcopyright \textcopyright
+copyright symbol
+The copyright symbol, ©right;.
+
+\dag \dag
+dagger, in text
+The dagger symbol (in text).
+
+\ddag \ddag
+double dagger, in text
+The double dagger symbol (in text).
+
+\LaTeX \LaTeX
+&latex; logo
+logo, &latex;
+The &latex; logo.
+
+\guillemotleft («) \guillemotleft («)
+\guillemotright (») \guillemotright (»)
+\guilsinglleft (‹) \guilsinglleft (‹)
+\guilsinglright (›) \guilsinglright (›)
+double guillemets
+single guillemets
+left angle quotation marks
+right angle quotation marks
+double angle quotation marks
+single angle quotation marks
+French quotation marks
+quotation marks, French
+Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used in French:
«, », ‹, ›.
- \ldots \ldots
-\dots \dots
-\textellipsis \textellipsis
-ellipsis An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): `&dots;'. \ldots
+\ldots \ldots
+\dots \dots
+\textellipsis \textellipsis
+ellipsis
+An ellipsis (three dots at the baseline): &textlsquo;&dots;&textrsquo;. \ldots
and \dots
also work in math mode.
-\lq \lq
-left quote opening quote Left (opening) quote: `.
-
-\P \P
-\textparagraph \textparagraph
-paragraph symbol pilcrow Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
-
-\pounds \pounds
-\textsterling \textsterling
-pounds symbol sterling symbol English pounds sterling: £.
-
-\quotedblbase („) \quotedblbase („)
-\quotesinglbase (‚) \quotesinglbase (‚)
-double low-9 quotation mark single low-9 quotation mark low-9 quotation marks, single and double Double and single quotation marks on the baseline:
+\lq \lq
+left quote
+opening quote
+Left (opening) quote: &textlsquo;.
+
+\P \P
+\textparagraph \textparagraph
+paragraph symbol
+pilcrow
+Paragraph sign (pilcrow).
+
+\pounds \pounds
+\textsterling \textsterling
+pounds symbol
+sterling symbol
+English pounds sterling: £.
+
+\quotedblbase („) \quotedblbase („)
+\quotesinglbase (‚) \quotesinglbase (‚)
+double low-9 quotation mark
+single low-9 quotation mark
+low-9 quotation marks, single and double
+Double and single quotation marks on the baseline:
„ and ‚.
-\rq \rq
-right quote closing quote Right (closing) quote: '.
-
-\S \S
-section symbol Section symbol.
-
-\TeX \TeX
-&tex; logo logo, &tex; The &tex; logo.
-
-\textasciicircum \textasciicircum
-circumflex, ASCII, in text ASCII circumflex, in text ASCII circumflex: ^.
-
-\textasciitilde \textasciitilde
-tilde, ASCII, in text ASCII tilde, in text ASCII tilde: ~.
-
-\textasteriskcentered \textasteriskcentered
-asterisk, centered, in text centered asterisk, in text Centered asterisk: *.
-
-\textbackslash \textbackslash
-backslash, in text Backslash: \.
-
-\textbar \textbar
-vertical bar, in text bar, vertical, in text Vertical bar: |.
-
-\textbardbl \textbardbl
-vertical bar, double, in text bar, double vertical, in text double vertical bar, in text Double vertical bar.
-
-\textbigcircle \textbigcircle
-big circle symbols, in text circle symbol, big, in text Big circle symbol.
-
-\textbraceleft \textbraceleft
-left brace, in text brace, left, in text Left brace: {.
-
-\textbraceright \textbraceright
-right brace, in text brace, right, in text Right brace: }.
-
-\textbullet \textbullet
-bullet, in text Bullet: •.
-
-\textcircled{letter} \textcircled{letter}
-circled letter, in text letter in a circle, as in ®istered;.
-
-\textcompwordmark \textcompwordmark
-\textcapitalwordmark \textcapitalwordmark
-\textascenderwordmark \textascenderwordmark
-composite word mark, in text cap height ascender height Composite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital...
form
+\rq \rq
+right quote
+closing quote
+Right (closing) quote: &textrsquo;.
+
+\S \S
+section symbol
+Section symbol.
+
+\TeX \TeX
+&tex; logo
+logo, &tex;
+The &tex; logo.
+
+\textasciicircum \textasciicircum
+circumflex, ASCII, in text
+ASCII circumflex, in text
+ASCII circumflex: ^.
+
+\textasciitilde \textasciitilde
+tilde, ASCII, in text
+ASCII tilde, in text
+ASCII tilde: ~.
+
+\textasteriskcentered \textasteriskcentered
+asterisk, centered, in text
+centered asterisk, in text
+Centered asterisk: *.
+
+\textbackslash \textbackslash
+backslash, in text
+Backslash: \.
+
+\textbar \textbar
+vertical bar, in text
+bar, vertical, in text
+Vertical bar: |.
+
+\textbardbl \textbardbl
+vertical bar, double, in text
+bar, double vertical, in text
+double vertical bar, in text
+Double vertical bar.
+
+\textbigcircle \textbigcircle
+big circle symbols, in text
+circle symbol, big, in text
+Big circle symbol.
+
+\textbraceleft \textbraceleft
+left brace, in text
+brace, left, in text
+Left brace: {.
+
+\textbraceright \textbraceright
+right brace, in text
+brace, right, in text
+Right brace: }.
+
+\textbullet \textbullet
+bullet, in text
+Bullet: •.
+
+\textcircled{letter} \textcircled{letter}
+circled letter, in text
+letter in a circle, as in ®istered;.
+
+\textcompwordmark \textcompwordmark
+\textcapitalwordmark \textcapitalwordmark
+\textascenderwordmark \textascenderwordmark
+composite word mark, in text
+cap height
+ascender height
+Composite word mark (invisible). The \textcapital...
form
has the cap height of the font, while the \textascender...
form
has the ascender height.
-\textdagger \textdagger
-dagger, in text Dagger: .
-
-\textdaggerdbl \textdaggerdbl
-dagger, double, in text double dagger, in text Double dagger: .
-
-\textdollar (or $
) \textdollar (or $
)
-dollar sign currency, dollar Dollar sign: $.
-
-\textemdash (or ---
) \textemdash (or ---
)
-em-dash Em-dash: — (for punctuation).
-
-\textendash (or --
) \textendash (or --
)
-e-dash En-dash: — (for ranges).
-
-\texteuro \texteuro
-euro symbol currency, euro The Euro symbol: €.
-
-\textexclamdown (or !`
) \textexclamdown (or !`
)
-exclamation point, upside-down Upside down exclamation point: ¡.
-
-\textgreater \textgreater
-greater than symbol, in text Greater than: >.
-
-\textless \textless
-less than symbol, in text Less than: <.
-
-\textleftarrow \textleftarrow
-arrow, left, in text left arrow, in text Left arrow.
-
-\textordfeminine \textordfeminine
-\textordmasculine \textordmasculine
-feminine ordinal symbol masculine ordinal symbol ordinals, feminine and masculine Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º.
-
-\textperiodcentered \textperiodcentered
-period, centered, in text centered period, in text Centered period: .
-
-\textquestiondown (or ?`
) \textquestiondown (or ?`
)
-questionation point, upside-down Upside down questionation point: ¿.
-
-\textquotedblleft (or ``
) \textquotedblleft (or ``
)
-left quote, double double left quote Double left quote: “.
-
-\textquotedblright (or '
) \textquotedblright (or '
)
-right quote, double double right quote Double right quote: ”.
-
-\textquoteleft (or `
) \textquoteleft (or `
)
-left quote, single single left quote Single left quote: `.
-
-\textquoteright (or '
) \textquoteright (or '
)
-right quote, single single right quote Single right quote: '.
-
-\textquotestraightbase \textquotestraightbase
-\textquotestraightdblbase \textquotestraightdblbase
-quote, straight base straight quote, base double quote, straight base straight double quote, base Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
-
-\textregistered \textregistered
-registered symbol Registered symbol: ®istered;.
-
-\textrightarrow \textrightarrow
-arrow, right, in text right arrow, in text Right arrow.
-
-\textthreequartersemdash \textthreequartersemdash
-three-quarters em-dash em-dash, three-quarters “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
-
-\texttrademark \texttrademark
-trademark symbol Trademark symbol: .
-
-\texttwelveudash \texttwelveudash
-two-thirds em-dash em-dash, two-thirds “Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
-
-\textunderscore \textunderscore
-underscore, in text Underscore: _.
-
-\textvisiblespace \textvisiblespace
-visible space symbol, in text Visible space symbol.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Accents
-Non-English characters
-Text symbols
-Special insertions
-
-
-Accents
-
-accents characters, accented letters, accented
-&latex; has wide support for many of the world's scripts and
+\textdagger \textdagger
+dagger, in text
+Dagger: .
+
+\textdaggerdbl \textdaggerdbl
+dagger, double, in text
+double dagger, in text
+Double dagger: .
+
+\textdollar (or $
) \textdollar (or $
)
+dollar sign
+currency, dollar
+Dollar sign: $.
+
+\textemdash (or ---
) \textemdash (or ---
)
+em-dash
+Em-dash: &textmdash; (for punctuation).
+
+\textendash (or --
) \textendash (or --
)
+e-dash
+En-dash: &textmdash; (for ranges).
+
+\texteuro \texteuro
+euro symbol
+currency, euro
+The Euro symbol: €.
+
+\textexclamdown (or !`
) \textexclamdown (or !`
)
+exclamation point, upside-down
+Upside down exclamation point: ¡.
+
+\textgreater \textgreater
+greater than symbol, in text
+Greater than: >.
+
+\textless \textless
+less than symbol, in text
+Less than: <.
+
+\textleftarrow \textleftarrow
+arrow, left, in text
+left arrow, in text
+Left arrow.
+
+\textordfeminine \textordfeminine
+\textordmasculine \textordmasculine
+feminine ordinal symbol
+masculine ordinal symbol
+ordinals, feminine and masculine
+Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine
+Feminine and masculine ordinal symbols: ª, º.
+
+\textperiodcentered \textperiodcentered
+period, centered, in text
+centered period, in text
+Centered period: .
+
+\textquestiondown (or ?`
) \textquestiondown (or ?`
)
+questionation point, upside-down
+Upside down questionation point: ¿.
+
+\textquotedblleft (or ``
) \textquotedblleft (or ``
)
+left quote, double
+double left quote
+Double left quote: &textldquo;.
+
+\textquotedblright (or '
) \textquotedblright (or '
)
+right quote, double
+double right quote
+Double right quote: &textrdquo;.
+
+\textquoteleft (or `
) \textquoteleft (or `
)
+left quote, single
+single left quote
+Single left quote: &textlsquo;.
+
+\textquoteright (or '
) \textquoteright (or '
)
+right quote, single
+single right quote
+Single right quote: &textrsquo;.
+
+\textquotestraightbase \textquotestraightbase
+\textquotestraightdblbase \textquotestraightdblbase
+quote, straight base
+straight quote, base
+double quote, straight base
+straight double quote, base
+Single and double straight quotes on the baseline.
+
+\textregistered \textregistered
+registered symbol
+Registered symbol: ®istered;.
+
+\textrightarrow \textrightarrow
+arrow, right, in text
+right arrow, in text
+Right arrow.
+
+\textthreequartersemdash \textthreequartersemdash
+three-quarters em-dash
+em-dash, three-quarters
+&textldquo;Three-quarters&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+
+\texttrademark \texttrademark
+trademark symbol
+Trademark symbol: .
+
+\texttwelveudash \texttwelveudash
+two-thirds em-dash
+em-dash, two-thirds
+&textldquo;Two-thirds&textrdquo; em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+
+\textunderscore \textunderscore
+underscore, in text
+Underscore: _.
+
+\textvisiblespace \textvisiblespace
+visible space symbol, in text
+Visible space symbol.
+
+
+
+
+
+Accents Non-English characters Text symbols Special insertions
+Accents
+
+accents
+characters, accented
+letters, accented
+
+&latex; has wide support for many of the world&textrsquo;s scripts and
languages, through the babel
package and related support. This
section does not attempt to cover all that support. It merely lists
the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters.
@@ -6797,274 +6179,345 @@ the core &latex; commands for creating accented characters.
The \capital...
commands produce alternative forms for use with
capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
-\"
-\capitaldieresis
-\" (umlaut accent) \capitaldieresis umlaut accent dieresis accent Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in ö.
-
-\'
-\capitalacute
-\' (acute accent) \capitalacute acute accent Produces an acute accent, as in ó. In the tabbing
+
+\"
+\capitaldieresis
+\" (umlaut accent)
+\capitaldieresis
+umlaut accent
+dieresis accent
+Produces an umlaut (dieresis), as in o .
+
+\'
+\capitalacute
+\&textrsquo; (acute accent)
+\capitalacute
+acute accent
+Produces an acute accent, as in o . In the tabbing
environment, pushes current column to the right of the previous column
-(see tabbing ).
-
-\.
-\. (dot-over accent) dot accent dot-over accent Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o..
-
-\=
-\capitalmacron
-\= (macron accent) \capitalmacron macron accent overbar accent bar-over accent Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o¯.
-
-\^
-\capitalcircumflex
-\^ (circumflex accent) \capitalcircumflex circumflex accent hat accent Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in ô.
-
-\`
-\capitalgrave
-\` (grave accent) \capitalgrave grave accent Produces a grave accent over the following, as in ò. In the
+(tabbing ).
+
+\.
+\. (dot-over accent)
+dot accent
+dot-over accent
+Produces a dot accent over the following, as in o .
+
+\=
+\capitalmacron
+\= (macron accent)
+\capitalmacron
+macron accent
+overbar accent
+bar-over accent
+Produces a macron (overbar) accent over the following, as in o .
+
+\^
+\capitalcircumflex
+\^ (circumflex accent)
+\capitalcircumflex
+circumflex accent
+hat accent
+Produces a circumflex (hat) accent over the following, as in o .
+
+\`
+\capitalgrave
+\&textlsquo; (grave accent)
+\capitalgrave
+grave accent
+Produces a grave accent over the following, as in o . In the
tabbing
environment, move following text to the right margin
-(see tabbing ).
-
-\~
-\capitaltilde
-\~ (tilde accent) \capitaltilde tilde accent Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in ñ.
-
-\b
-\b (bar-under accent) bar-under accent Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_.
-
-\c
-\capitalcedilla
-\c (cedilla accent) \capitalcedilla cedilla accent Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in ç.
-
-\d
-\capitaldotaccent
-\d (dot-under accent) \capitaldotaccent dot-under accent Produces a dot accent under the following, as in .o.
-
-\H
-\capitalhungarumlaut
-\H (Hungarian umlaut accent) \capitalhungarumlaut hungarian umlaut accent Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o''.
-
-\i
-\i (dotless i) dotless i Produces a dotless i, as in `i'.
-
-\j
-\j (dotless j) dotless j Produces a dotless j, as in `j'.
-
-\k
-\capitalogonek
-\k (ogonek) \capitalogonek ogonek Produces a letter with ogonek, as in `o;'. Not available in
+(tabbing ).
+
+\~
+\capitaltilde
+\~ (tilde accent)
+\capitaltilde
+tilde accent
+Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n .
+
+\b
+\b (bar-under accent)
+bar-under accent
+Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o .
+
+\c
+\capitalcedilla
+\c (cedilla accent)
+\capitalcedilla
+cedilla accent
+Produces a cedilla accent under the following, as in c .
+
+\d
+\capitaldotaccent
+\d (dot-under accent)
+\capitaldotaccent
+dot-under accent
+Produces a dot accent under the following, as in o .
+
+\H
+\capitalhungarumlaut
+\H (Hungarian umlaut accent)
+\capitalhungarumlaut
+hungarian umlaut accent
+Produces a long Hungarian umlaut accent over the following, as in o .
+
+\i
+\i (dotless i)
+dotless i
+Produces a dotless i, as in &textlsquo;i &textrsquo;.
+
+\j
+\j (dotless j)
+dotless j
+Produces a dotless j, as in &textlsquo;j &textrsquo;.
+
+\k
+\capitalogonek
+\k (ogonek)
+\capitalogonek
+ogonek
+Produces a letter with ogonek, as in &textlsquo;o &textrsquo;. Not available in
the OT1 encoding.
-\r
-\capitalring
-\r (ring accent) \capitalring ring accent Produces a ring accent, as in `o*'.
-
-\t
-\capitaltie
-\newtie
-\capitalnewtie
-\t (tie-after accent) \capitaltie \newtie \capitalnewtie tie-after accent Produces a tie-after accent, as in `oo['. The
+\r
+\capitalring
+\r (ring accent)
+\capitalring
+ring accent
+Produces a ring accent, as in &textlsquo;o &textrsquo;.
+
+\t
+\capitaltie
+\newtie
+\capitalnewtie
+\t (tie-after accent)
+\capitaltie
+\newtie
+\capitalnewtie
+tie-after accent
+Produces a tie-after accent, as in &textlsquo;oo &textrsquo;. The
\newtie
form is centered in its box.
-\u
-\capitalbreve
-\u (breve accent) \capitalbreve breve accent Produces a breve accent, as in `o('.
-
-\underbar
-\underbar underbar Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text.
+\u
+\capitalbreve
+\u (breve accent)
+\capitalbreve
+breve accent
+Produces a breve accent, as in &textlsquo;o &textrsquo;.
+
+\underbar
+\underbar
+underbar
+Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text.
The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is
always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through
-descenders. See also \underline
in Math miscellany .
+descenders. See also \underline
in Math miscellany .
-\v
-\capitalcaron
-\v (breve accent) \capitalcaron hacek accent check accent caron accent Produces a hác<ek (check, caron) accent, as in `o<'.
+\v
+\capitalcaron
+\v (breve accent)
+\capitalcaron
+hacek accent
+check accent
+caron accent
+Produces a ha c ek (check, caron) accent, as in &textlsquo;o &textrsquo;.
-
+
-
-Non-English characters
-\rule
-Accents
-Special insertions
-
-
-Non-English characters
+Non-English characters \rule Accents Special insertions
+Non-English characters
+
+special characters
+non-English characters
+characters, non-English
+letters, non-English
-special characters non-English characters characters, non-English letters, non-English
Here are the basic &latex; commands for inserting characters commonly
used in languages other than English.
-\aa
-\AA
-\aa (å) \AA (Å) aring å and Å.
-
-\ae
-\AE
-\ae (æ) \AE (Æ) ae ligature æ and Æ.
-
-\dh
-\DH
-\dh (æ) \DH (Æ) Icelandic eth eth, Icelandic letter Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð.
-
-\dj
-\DJ
-\dj \DJ xxxx
-
-\ij
-\IJ
-\ij (ij) \IJ (IJ) ij letter, Dutch ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
-
-\l
-\L
-\l (/l) \L (/L) polish l /l and /L.
-
-\ng
-\NG
-\ng \NG xxxx
-
-\o
-\O
-\o (ø) \O (Ø) oslash ø and Ø.
-
-\oe
-\OE
-\oe (œ) \OE (Œ) oe ligature œ and Œ.
-
-\ss
-\SS
-\ss (ß) \SS (SS) es-zet German letter sharp S letters ß and SS.
-
-\th
-\TH
-\th (þ) \TH (Þ) Icelandic thorn thorn, Icelandic letter Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ.
-
-
-
+
+
+ \aa
+\AA
+\aa (å)
+\AA (Å)
+aring
+å and Å.
+
+\ae
+\AE
+\ae (æ)
+\AE (Æ)
+ae ligature
+æ and Æ.
+
+\dh
+\DH
+\dh (æ)
+\DH (Æ)
+Icelandic eth
+eth, Icelandic letter
+Icelandic letter eth: ð and Ð.
+
+\dj
+\DJ
+\dj
+\DJ
+xxxx
+
+\ij
+\IJ
+\ij (ij)
+\IJ (IJ)
+ij letter, Dutch
+ij and IJ (except somewhat closer together than appears here).
+
+\l
+\L
+\l (&lslash;)
+\L (&Lslash;)
+polish l
+&lslash; and &Lslash;.
+
+\ng
+\NG
+\ng
+\NG
+xxxx
+
+\o
+\O
+\o (ø)
+\O (Ø)
+oslash
+ø and Ø.
+
+\oe
+\OE
+\oe (œ)
+\OE (Œ)
+oe ligature
+œ and Œ.
+
+\ss
+\SS
+\ss (ß)
+\SS (SS)
+es-zet German letter
+sharp S letters
+ß and SS.
+
+\th
+\TH
+\th (þ)
+\TH (Þ)
+Icelandic thorn
+thorn, Icelandic letter
+Icelandic letter thorn: þ and Þ.
+
+
+
+
+
+\rule \today Non-English characters Special insertions
+\rule
+\rule
-
-
-\rule
-\today
-Non-English characters
-Special insertions
-
-
-\rule
-\rule
Synopsis:
-\rule[raise]{width}{thickness}
-
+
+\rule[raise]{width}{thickness}
+
+
The \rule
command produces rules, that is, lines or
rectangles. The arguments are:
-raise
-How high to raise the rule (optional).
+
+raise
+How high to raise the rule (optional).
-width
-The length of the rule (mandatory).
+ width
+The length of the rule (mandatory).
-thickness
-The thickness of the rule (mandatory).
-
+ thickness
+The thickness of the rule (mandatory).
+
-
-\today
-\rule
-Special insertions
-
-
-\today
-\today
-The \today
command produces today's date, in the format
-month dd, yyyy; for example, `July 4, 1976'.
+\today \rule Special insertions
+\today
+\today
+
+The \today
command produces today&textrsquo;s date, in the format
+month dd, yyyy; for example, &textlsquo;July 4, 1976&textrsquo;.
It uses the predefined counters \day
, \month
, and
-\year
(see \day \month \year ) to do this. It is not
+\year
(\day \month \year ) to do this. It is not
updated as the program runs.
-datetime
package The datetime
package, among others, can produce a wide variety
+datetime
package
+The datetime
package, among others, can produce a wide variety
of other date formats.
-
-Splitting the input
-Front/back matter
-Special insertions
-Top
-
-
-Splitting the input
-splitting the input file input file
+Splitting the input Front/back matter Special insertions Top
+Splitting the input
+splitting the input file
+input file
+
A large document requires a lot of input. Rather than putting the whole
-input in a single large file, it's more efficient to split it into
+input in a single large file, it&textrsquo;s more efficient to split it into
several smaller ones. Regardless of how many separate files you use,
there is one that is the root file; it is the one whose name you type
when you run &latex;.
-
-
-
-\include
-\includeonly
-Splitting the input
-
-
-\include
-\include
+\include Conditionally include a file.
+
\includeonly Determine which files are included.
+
\input Unconditionally include a file.
+
+
+
+\include \includeonly Splitting the input
+\include
+\include
+
Synopsis:
-\include{file}
-
+
+\include{file}
+
+
If no \includeonly
command is present, the \include
command executes \clearpage
to start a new page
-(see \clearpage ), then reads file, then does another
+(\clearpage ), then reads file, then does another
\clearpage
.
Given an \includeonly
command, the \include
actions are
only run if file is listed as an argument to
\includeonly
. See the next section.
-nested \include
, not allowed The \include
command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
+nested \include
, not allowed
+The \include
command may not appear in the preamble or in a file
read by another \include
command.
-
-\includeonly
-\input
-\include
-Splitting the input
-
-
-\includeonly
-\includeonly
+\includeonly \input \include Splitting the input
+\includeonly
+\includeonly
+
Synopsis:
-\includeonly{file1,file2,...}
-
+
+\includeonly{file1,file2,...}
+
+
The \includeonly
command controls which files will be read by
subsequent \include
commands. The list of filenames is
comma-separated. Each file must exactly match a filename
@@ -7075,18 +6528,16 @@ effective.
-
-\input
-\includeonly
-Splitting the input
-
-
-\input
-\input
+\input \includeonly Splitting the input
+\input
+\input
+
Synopsis:
-\input{file}
-
+
+\input{file}
+
+
The \input
command causes the specified file to be read
and processed, as if its contents had been inserted in the current
file at that point.
@@ -7099,44 +6550,24 @@ is tried (foo or foo.bar).
-
-Front/back matter
-Letters
-Splitting the input
-Top
-
-
-Front/back matter
+Front/back matter Letters Splitting the input Top
+Front/back matter
-
-
-
-Tables of contents
-Glossaries
-Front/back matter
-
-
-Tables of contents
-
-table of contents, creating
-\tableofcontents .toc file A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents
+Tables of contents
+
Glossaries
+
Indexes
+
+
+
+Tables of contents Glossaries Front/back matter
+Tables of contents
+
+table of contents, creating
+
+\tableofcontents
+.toc file
+A table of contents is produced with the \tableofcontents
command. You put the command right where you want the table of
contents to go; &latex; does the rest for you. A previous run must
have generated a .toc file.
@@ -7146,107 +6577,98 @@ not automatically start a new page. If you want a new page after the
table of contents, write a \newpage
command after the
\tableofcontents
command.
-\listoffigures \listoftables The analogous commands \listoffigures
and \listoftables
+\listoffigures
+\listoftables
+The analogous commands \listoffigures
and \listoftables
produce a list of figures and a list of tables, respectively.
Everything works exactly the same as for the table of contents.
-\nofiles The command \nofiles
overrides these commands, and
+\nofiles
+The command \nofiles
overrides these commands, and
prevents any of these lists from being generated.
-
-
-
-\addcontentsline
-\addtocontents
-Tables of contents
-
-
-\addcontentsline
-\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text} table of contents entry, manually adding
-The \addcontentsline
{ext}{unit}{text}
+\addcontentsline Add an entry to table of contents etc.
+
\addtocontents Add text directly to table of contents file etc.
+
+
+
+\addcontentsline \addtocontents Tables of contents
+\addcontentsline
+\addcontentsline{ext}{unit}{text}
+table of contents entry, manually adding
+
+The \addcontentsline
{ext}{unit}{text}
command adds an entry to the specified list or table where:
-ext
-The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
+
+ext
+The extension of the file on which information is to be written,
typically one of: toc
(table of contents), lof
(list of
figures), or lot
(list of tables).
-unit
-The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the
+ unit
+The name of the sectional unit being added, typically one of the
following, matching the value of the ext argument:
-toc
-The name of the sectional unit: part
, chapter
,
+
+toc
+The name of the sectional unit: part
, chapter
,
section
, subsection
, subsubsection
.
- lof
-For the list of figures.
- lot
-For the list of tables.
-
+ lof
+For the list of figures.
+ lot
+For the list of tables.
+
-entry
-The actual text of the entry.
-
+ entry
+The actual text of the entry.
+
-\contentsline What is written to the .ext file is the
-command \contentsline{unit}{name}
.
+\contentsline
+What is written to the .ext file is the
+command \contentsline{unit}{name}
.
-
-\addtocontents
-\addcontentsline
-Tables of contents
-
-
-\addtocontents
-\addtocontents{ext}{text}
-The \addtocontents
{ext}{text} command adds text
+\addtocontents \addcontentsline Tables of contents
+\addtocontents
+\addtocontents{ext}{text}
+
+The \addtocontents
{ext}{text} command adds text
(or formatting commands) directly to the .ext file that
generates the table of contents or lists of figures or tables.
-ext
-The extension of the file on which information is to be written:
+
+ext
+The extension of the file on which information is to be written:
toc (table of contents), lof (list of figures), or
lot (list of tables).
-text
-The text to be written.
-
+ text
+The text to be written.
+
-
-Glossaries
-Indexes
-Tables of contents
-Front/back matter
-
-
-Glossaries
-glossaries
-\makeglossary The command \makeglossary
enables creating glossaries.
-
-\glossary .glo file The command \glossary{text}
writes a glossary entry for
+Glossaries Indexes Tables of contents Front/back matter
+Glossaries
+glossaries
+
+\makeglossary
+The command \makeglossary
enables creating glossaries.
+
+\glossary
+.glo file
+The command \glossary{text}
writes a glossary entry for
text to an auxiliary file with the .glo extension.
-\glossaryentry Specifically, what gets written is the command
-\glossaryentry{text}{pageno}
, where
+\glossaryentry
+Specifically, what gets written is the command
+\glossaryentry{text}{pageno}
, where
pageno is the current \thepage
value.
The glossary
package on CTAN provides support for fancier
@@ -7254,67 +6676,74 @@ glossaries.
-
-Indexes
-Glossaries
-Front/back matter
-
-
-Indexes
-indexes
-\makeindex The command \makeindex
enables creating indexes. Put this in
+Indexes Glossaries Front/back matter
+Indexes
+indexes
+
+\makeindex
+The command \makeindex
enables creating indexes. Put this in
the preamble.
-\index .idx file The command \index{text}
writes an index entry for
+\index
+.idx file
+The command \index{text}
writes an index entry for
text to an auxiliary file with the .idx extension.
-\indexentry Specifically, what gets written is the command
-\indexentry{text}{pageno}
, where pageno
+\indexentry
+Specifically, what gets written is the command
+\indexentry{text}{pageno}
, where pageno
is the current \thepage
value.
-`see' and `see also' index entries To generate a index entry for `bar' that says `See foo', use a
-vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}
. Use seealso
-instead of see
to make a `See also' entry.
+&textlsquo;see&textrsquo; and &textlsquo;see also&textrsquo; index entries
+To generate a index entry for &textlsquo;bar&textrsquo; that says &textlsquo;See foo&textrsquo;, use a
+vertical bar: \index{bar|see{foo}}
. Use seealso
+instead of see
to make a &textlsquo;See also&textrsquo; entry.
-\seename \alsoname The text `See' is defined by the macro \seename
, and `See also'
+\seename
+\alsoname
+The text &textlsquo;See&textrsquo; is defined by the macro \seename
, and &textlsquo;See also&textrsquo;
by the macro \alsoname
. These can be redefined for other
languages.
-makeindex programxindy program.ind file The generated .idx file is then sorted with an external
+makeindex program
+xindy program
+.ind file
+The generated .idx file is then sorted with an external
command, usually either makeindex
-(http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex ) or (the
-multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net ).
+(http://mirror.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex ) or (the
+multi-lingual) xindy (http://xindy.sourceforge.net ).
This results in a .ind file, which can then be read to typeset
the index.
-printindex makeidx
package The index is usually generated with the \printindex
command.
+printindex
+makeidx
package
+The index is usually generated with the \printindex
command.
This is defined in the makeidx
package, so
-\usepackage{makeidx}
needs to be in the preamble.
+\usepackage{makeidx}
needs to be in the preamble.
-indexspace The rubber length \indexspace
is inserted before each new
+indexspace
+The rubber length \indexspace
is inserted before each new
letter in the printed index; its default value is 10pt plus5pt
minus3pt.
-showidx
package The showidx
package causes each index entries to be shown in
+showidx
package
+The showidx
package causes each index entries to be shown in
the margin on the page where the entry appears. This can help in
preparing the index.
-multind
package The multind
package supports multiple indexes. See also the
+multind
package
+The multind
package supports multiple indexes. See also the
&tex; FAQ entry on this topic,
-http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind .
+http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multind .
-
-Letters
-Terminal input/output
-Front/back matter
-Top
-
-
-Letters
-letters creating letters
+Letters Terminal input/output Front/back matter Top
+Letters
+letters
+creating letters
+
You can use &latex; to typeset letters, both personal and business. The
letter
document class is designed to make a number of letters at
once, although you can make just one if you so desire.
@@ -7323,202 +6752,138 @@ once, although you can make just one if you so desire.
document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a
minimum:
- \documentclass{letter}
- \begin{document}
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \begin{document}
... letters ...
- \end{document}
-
+ \end{document}
+
+
Each letter is a letter
environment, whose argument is the name
and address of the recipient. For example, you might have:
- \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
- \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+
+ \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
+ \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
...
- \end{letter}
-
+ \end{letter}
+
+
The letter itself begins with the \opening
command. The text of
the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary &latex; input. Commands that
make no sense in a letter, like \chapter
, do not work. The letter
closes with a \closing
command.
-\\ for letters After the closing
, you can have additional material. The
-\cc
command produces the usual “cc: &dots;”. There's also a
+\\ for letters
+After the closing
, you can have additional material. The
+\cc
command produces the usual &textldquo;cc: &dots;&textrdquo;. There&textrsquo;s also a
similar \encl
command for a list of enclosures. With both these
commands, use \\
to separate the items.
These commands are used with the letter
class.
-
-
-
-\address
-\cc
-Letters
-
-
-\address{return-address}
-\address
+\address Your return address.
+
\cc Cc list.
+
\closing Saying goodbye.
+
\encl List of enclosed material.
+
\location Your organisation&textrsquo;s address.
+
\makelabels Making address labels.
+
\name Your name, for the return address.
+
\opening Saying hello.
+
\ps Adding a postscript.
+
\signature Your signature.
+
\startbreaks Allow page breaks.
+
\stopbreaks Disallow page breaks.
+
\telephone Your phone number.
+
+
+
+\address \cc Letters
+\address{return-address}
+\address
+
The \address
specifies the return address of a letter, as it
should appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the
address should be separated by \\
commands.
If you do not make an \address
declaration, then the letter
-will be formatted for copying onto your organisation's standard
-letterhead. (See Overview , for details on your local
+will be formatted for copying onto your organisation&textrsquo;s standard
+letterhead. (Overview , for details on your local
implementation). If you give an \address
declaration, then the
letter will be formatted as a personal letter.
-
-\cc
-\closing
-\address
-Letters
-
-
-\cc
+\cc \closing \address Letters
+\cc
+
+\cc
+cc list, in letters
-\cc cc list, in letters
Synopsis:
-\cc{name1\\name2}
-
+
+\cc{name1\\name2}
+
+
Produce a list of names the letter was copied to. Each name is
printed on a separate line.
-
-\closing
-\encl
-\cc
-Letters
-
-
-\closing
+\closing \encl \cc Letters
+\closing
+
+\closing
+letters, ending
+closing letters
-\closing letters, ending closing letters
Synopsis:
-\closing{text}
-
+
+\closing{text}
+
+
A letter closes with a \closing
command, for example,
- \closing{Best Regards,}
-
+
+\closing{Best Regards,}
+
+
-
-\encl
-\location
-\closing
-Letters
-
-
-\encl
+\encl \location \closing Letters
+\encl
+
+\encl
+enclosure list
-\encl enclosure list
Synopsis:
-\encl{line1\\line2}
-
+
+\encl{line1\\line2}
+
+
Declare a list of one more enclosures.
-
-\location
-\makelabels
-\encl
-Letters
-
-
-\location
-\location
-\location{address}
+\location \makelabels \encl Letters
+\location
+\location
+
+\location{address}
-This modifies your organisation's standard address. This only appears
+This modifies your organisation&textrsquo;s standard address. This only appears
if the firstpage
pagestyle is selected.
-
-\makelabels
-\name
-\location
-Letters
-
-
-\makelabels
-\makelabels
-\makelabels{number}
+\makelabels \name \location Letters
+\makelabels
+\makelabels
+
+\makelabels{number}
If you issue this command in the preamble, &latex; will create a sheet of
address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
@@ -7526,81 +6891,62 @@ address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
-
-\name
-\opening
-\makelabels
-Letters
-
-
-\name
-\name
-\name{June Davenport}
+\name \opening \makelabels Letters
+\name
+\name
+
+\name{June Davenport}
Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return
address.
-
-\opening
-\ps
-\name
-Letters
-
-
-\opening{text}
-\opening letters, starting
+\opening \ps \name Letters
+\opening{text}
+\opening
+letters, starting
+
Synopsis:
-\opening{text}
-
+
+\opening{text}
+
+
A letter begins with the \opening
command. The mandatory
argument, text, is whatever text you wish to start your letter.
For instance:
-\opening{Dear Joe,}
-
+
+\opening{Dear Joe,}
+
+
-
-\ps
-\signature
-\opening
-Letters
-
-
-\ps
-\ps postscript, in letters
+\ps \signature \opening Letters
+\ps
+\ps
+postscript, in letters
+
Use the \ps
command to start a postscript in a letter, after
\closing
.
-
-\signature
-\startbreaks
-\ps
-Letters
-
-
-\signature{text}
-\signature
+\signature \startbreaks \ps Letters
+\signature{text}
+\signature
+
Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the
space for your signature. \\
starts a new line within
text as usual.
-
-\startbreaks
-\stopbreaks
-\signature
-Letters
-
-
-\startbreaks
-\startbreaks
+\startbreaks \stopbreaks \signature Letters
+\startbreaks
+\startbreaks
+
\startbreaks
Used after a \stopbreaks
command to allow page breaks again.
@@ -7608,15 +6954,10 @@ space for your signature. \\
starts a new line within
-
-\stopbreaks
-\telephone
-\startbreaks
-Letters
-
-
-\stopbreaks
-\stopbreaks
+\stopbreaks \telephone \startbreaks Letters
+\stopbreaks
+\stopbreaks
+
\stopbreaks
Inhibit page breaks until a \startbreaks
command occurs.
@@ -7624,15 +6965,11 @@ space for your signature. \\
starts a new line within
-
-\telephone
-\stopbreaks
-Letters
-
-
-\telephone
-\telephone
-\telephone{number}
+\telephone \stopbreaks Letters
+\telephone
+\telephone
+
+\telephone{number}
This is your telephone number. This only appears if the
firstpage
pagestyle is selected.
@@ -7640,41 +6977,27 @@ space for your signature. \\
starts a new line within
-
-Terminal input/output
-Command line
-Letters
-Top
-
-
-Terminal input/output
-input/output terminal input/output
+Terminal input/output Command line Letters Top
+Terminal input/output
+input/output
+terminal input/output
+
-
-
-
-\typein
-\typeout
-Terminal input/output
-
-
-\typein[cmd]{msg}
-\typein
+\typein Read text from the terminal.
+
\typeout Write text to the terminal.
+
+
+
+\typein \typeout Terminal input/output
+\typein[cmd]{msg}
+\typein
+
Synopsis:
-\typein[\cmd]{msg}
-
+
+\typein[\cmd]{msg}
+
+
\typein
prints msg on the terminal and causes &latex; to
stop and wait for you to type a line of input, ending with return. If
the optional \cmd argument is omitted, the typed input is
@@ -7685,24 +7008,22 @@ redefined to be the typed input.
-
-\typeout
-\typein
-Terminal input/output
-
-
-\typeout{msg}
-\typeout
+\typeout \typein Terminal input/output
+\typeout{msg}
+\typeout
+
Synopsis:
-\typeout{msg}
-
+
+\typeout{msg}
+
+
Prints msg
on the terminal and in the log
file.
Commands in msg
that are defined with \newcommand
or
\renewcommand
(among others) are replaced by their definitions
before being printed.
-&latex;'s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+&latex;&textrsquo;s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to msg
. A
\space
command in msg
causes a single space to be
printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J
in
@@ -7711,73 +7032,53 @@ printed, independent of surrounding spaces. A ^^J
in
-
-Command line
-Document templates
-Terminal input/output
-Top
-
-
-Command line
-command line
+Command line Document templates Terminal input/output Top
+Command line
+command line
+
The input file specification indicates the file to be formatted;
&tex; uses .tex as a default file extension. If you omit the
input file entirely, &tex; accepts input from the terminal. You
specify command options by supplying a string as a parameter to the
command; e.g.
-latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
-
+
+latex '\nonstopmode\input foo.tex'
+
+
+
will process foo.tex without pausing after every error.
-* prompt prompt, * \stop If &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a
+* prompt
+prompt, *
+\stop
+If &latex; stops in the middle of the document and gives you a
* prompt, it is waiting for input. You can type \stop
(and return) and it will prematurely end the document.
-
-Document templates
-Concept Index
-Command line
-Top
-
-
-Document templates
-document templates
+Document templates Concept Index Command line Top
+Document templates
+document templates
+
Although not reference material, perhaps these document templates will
-be useful. Additional templates are collected at
-http://www.howtotex.com/templates .
+be useful. Additional template resources are listed
+http://tug.org/interest.html#latextemplates .
-
-
-
-book template
-beamer template
-Document templates
-
-
-book
template
-
-\documentclass{book}
+book template
+
beamer template
+
tugboat template
+
+
+
+book template beamer template Document templates
+book
template
+
+
+\documentclass{book}
\title{Book Class Template}
\author{Alex Author}
@@ -7795,19 +7096,16 @@ The end.
\end{document}
+
+
-
-beamer template
-tugboat template
-book template
-Document templates
-
-
-beamer
template
+beamer template tugboat template book template Document templates
+beamer
template
The beamer
class creates slides presentations.
-\documentclass{beamer}
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
\title{Beamer Class template}
\author{Alex Author}
@@ -7831,29 +7129,27 @@ The end.
+
+
-
-tugboat template
-beamer template
-Document templates
-
-
-tugboat
template
+tugboat template beamer template Document templates
+tugboat
template
TUGboat is the journal of the &tex; Users Group,
-http://tug.org/TUGboat .
+http://tug.org/TUGboat .
-\documentclass{ltugboat}
+
+\documentclass{ltugboat}
\usepackage{graphicx}
\usepackage{ifpdf}
\ifpdf
- \usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
- urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[breaklinks,colorlinks,linkcolor=black,citecolor=black,
+ urlcolor=black]{hyperref}
\else
- \usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{url}
\fi
-\title{Example \TUB\ Article}
+\title{Example \TUB\ article}
% repeat info for each author.
\author{First Last}
@@ -7861,12 +7157,12 @@ The end.
\netaddress{user (at) example dot org}
\personalURL{http://example.org/~user/}
-\maketitle
-
\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
\begin{abstract}
-This is an example article for a regular \TUB{} issue.
+This is an example article for \TUB{}.
\end{abstract}
\section{Introduction}
@@ -7878,22 +7174,23 @@ We recommend the graphicx package for image inclusions, and the
hyperref package for active url's (in the \acro{PDF} output).
Nowadays \TUB\ is produced using \acro{PDF} files exclusively.
-The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others:
+The \texttt{ltugboat} class provides these abbreviations and many more:
-{\small
-\begin{verbatim}
+% verbatim blocks are often better in \small
+\begin{verbatim}[\small]
\AllTeX \AMS \AmS \AmSLaTeX \AmSTeX \aw \AW
\BibTeX \CTAN \DTD \HTML
-\ISBN \ISSN \JTeX \LaTeXe
-\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX \Pas
+\ISBN \ISSN \LaTeXe
+\Mc \mf \MFB \mtex \PCTeX \pcTeX
\PiC \PiCTeX \plain \POBox \PS
-\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP \TUB \TUG \tug
+\SC \SGML \SliTeX \TANGLE \TB \TP
+\TUB \TUG \tug
\UG \UNIX \VAX \XeT \WEB \WEAVE
\Dash \dash \vellipsis \bull \cents \Dag
\careof \thinskip
-\acro{FRED} -> {\small fred} % please use!
+\acro{FRED} -> {\small[er] fred} % please use!
\cs{fred} -> \fred
\env{fred} -> \begin{fred}
\meta{fred} -> <fred>
@@ -7901,14 +7198,13 @@ The \texttt{ltug*} classes provide these abbreviations, among many others:
\sfrac{3/4} -> 3/4
\booktitle{Book of Fred}
\end{verbatim}
-}
For more information, see the ltubguid document at:
\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/tugboat}
+(we recommend using \verb|mirror.ctan.org| for \CTAN\ references).
Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
-
\bibliographystyle{plain} % we recommend the plain bibliography style
\nocite{book-minimal} % just making the bibliography non-empty
\bibliography{xampl} % xampl.bib comes with BibTeX
@@ -7917,30 +7213,22 @@ Email \verb|tugboat@tug.org| if problems or questions.
\end{document}
+
+
-
-Concept Index
-Command Index
-Document templates
-Top
-
-
-Concept Index
+Concept Index Command Index Document templates Top
+Concept Index
-cp
+
-
-Command Index
-Concept Index
-Top
-
-
-Command Index
+Command Index Concept Index Top
+Command Index
-fn
+
+
--
cgit v1.2.3